Class Series 2 Programmer`s Manual
Class Series 2
Programmer’s Manual
Datamax Corporate Headquarters
4501 Parkway Commerce Boulevard
Orlando, Florida USA 32808
Phone (407) 578-8007
Fax (407) 578-8377
[email protected]
Datamax International
Phone +44 1279 772200
[email protected]
Datamax Latin America
Phone (407) 523-5520
[email protected]
Datamax Asia Pacific
Phone +65-6542-2611
[email protected]
Datamax China
Phone +86-21-64952882
[email protected]
CG Times (based upon Times New Roman), CG Triumvirate, MicroType, and TrueType are
trademarks of the AGFA Monotype Corporation.
PCL, Intellifont, and HP Laser JetII are trademarks of the Hewlett Packard Corporation.
Macintosh is a trademark of the Apple Corporation.
Windows is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
All other brand and product names are trademarks, service marks, registered trademarks,
or registered service marks of their respective companies.
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on the part of Datamax Corporation. No part of this manual may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, for any purpose other than the
purchaser’s personal use, without the expressed written permission of Datamax
Corporation.
© 2008 by Datamax Corporation
Part Number: 88-2341-01
Revision B
Contents
1 Overview................................................................................................. 1
Who Should Use this Manual ................................................................. 1
The Scope of this Manual ...................................................................... 1
General Conventions ............................................................................ 3
Computer Entry and Display Conventions ................................................ 3
Important Safety Instructions................................................................ 3
Special Instructions.............................................................................. 4
Typical Data Flow Sequence .................................................................. 4
2 Control Code Command Functions ........................................................... 9
Introduction ............................................................................................ 9
Attention-Getters................................................................................. 9
Alternate Control Code Modes................................................................ 9
3 Immediate Command Functions............................................................ 11
Introduction .......................................................................................... 11
SOH #
Reset................................................................................... 11
SOH *
Reset................................................................................... 11
SOH A
Send ASCII Status String ....................................................... 12
SOH a
Send ASCII Extended Status String.......................................... 12
SOH B
Toggle Pause ........................................................................ 13
SOH C
Stop/Cancel.......................................................................... 14
SOH D
SOH Shutdown...................................................................... 14
SOH E
Send Batch Remaining Quantity .............................................. 14
SOH e
Send Batch Printed Quantity ................................................... 15
i
SOH F
Send Status Byte .................................................................. 15
4 System-Level Command Functions ........................................................ 17
Introduction .......................................................................................... 17
STX A
Set Time and Date................................................................. 17
STX a
Enable Feedback Characters ................................................... 18
STX B
Get Printer Time and Date Information ..................................... 18
STX c
Set Continuous Paper Length .................................................. 19
STX E
Set Quantity for Stored Label .................................................. 19
STX e
Select Edge Sensor................................................................ 20
STX F
Form Feed............................................................................ 20
STX f
Set Form Stop Position (Backfeed) ........................................... 20
STX G
Print Last Label Format .......................................................... 21
STX I
Input Image Data.................................................................. 21
STX i
Scalable Font Downloading ..................................................... 22
STX J
Set Pause for Each Label ........................................................ 23
STX K
Extended System-Level Commands ......................................... 23
STX k
Test RS-232 Port ................................................................... 23
STX L
Enter Label Formatting Command Mode.................................... 23
STX M
Set Maximum Label Length ..................................................... 24
STX m
Set Printer to Metric Mode ...................................................... 24
STX n
Set Printer to Imperial Mode ................................................... 24
STX O
Set Start of Print Position ....................................................... 25
STX o
Cycle Cutter ......................................................................... 26
STX P
Set Hex Dump Mode .............................................................. 26
ii
STX p
Controlled Pause ................................................................... 26
STX Q
Clear All Modules................................................................... 26
STX q
Clear Module ........................................................................ 27
STX q
Clear Module ........................................................................ 27
STX R
Ribbon Saver Control ............................................................. 27
STX r
Select Reflective Sensor ......................................................... 28
STX S
Set Feed Speed..................................................................... 28
STX T
Print Quality Label ................................................................. 28
STX t
Test DRAM Memory Module..................................................... 29
STX U
Label Format String Replacement Field ..................................... 29
STX V
Software Switch Settings ........................................................ 31
STX v
Request Firmware Version ...................................................... 32
STX W
Request Memory Module Information ....................................... 32
STX w
Test Flash Memory Module...................................................... 33
STX X
Set Default Module ................................................................ 33
STX x
Delete File from Module.......................................................... 34
STX Y
Output Sensor Values ............................................................ 35
STX y
Select Font Symbol Set .......................................................... 35
STX Z
Print Configuration Label ........................................................ 36
STX z
Pack Module ......................................................................... 36
5 Extended System-Level Command Functions ........................................ 37
Introduction .......................................................................................... 37
STX K
Memory Configuration ....................................................... 37
STX K}E
Empty Sensor Calibration ................................................... 38
iii
STX K}M
Manual Media Calibration.................................................... 39
STX K}Q
Quick Media Calibration ..................................................... 39
STX KaR
Read Data from RFID Tag .................................................. 40
STX KaW
Write Data to RFID Tag...................................................... 41
STX Kb
Backfeed Time Delay ......................................................... 41
STX KC
Get Configuration.............................................................. 42
STX Kc
Configuration Set .............................................................. 43
STX KD
Database Configuration...................................................... 93
STX Kd
Set File as Factory Default.................................................. 94
STX KE
Character Encoding ........................................................... 94
STX KF
Select Factory Defaults ...................................................... 96
STX Kf
Set Present Distance ......................................................... 96
STX KH
Dot Check........................................................................ 97
STX KJ
Assign Communication Port (MCL) ....................................... 98
STX KI
GPIO Input ...................................................................... 99
STX Kn
NIC Reset ........................................................................ 99
STX KO
GPIO Output ...................................................................100
STX Kp
Module Protection ............................................................101
STX KQ
Query Memory Configuration .............................................102
STX Kq
Query Memory Configuration .............................................104
STX KR
Reset Memory Configuration..............................................105
STX Kr
Resettable Counter Reset ..................................................105
STX KS
Memory Configuration, Scalable Font Cache.........................105
STX KtA
Write Application Family Identifier (AFI) to Tag ....................106
iv
STX KtD
Write Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID) to Tag ............106
STX KtE
Write Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) Bit ......................107
STX KtH
Read and Feedback Tag Information to Host ........................107
STX KtR
Read Data from RFID Tag .................................................108
STX KtW
Write Data to RFID Tag.....................................................110
STX KuB
Read Data from Gen2 Tag Section ......................................111
STX KuF
Send RFID Device Firmware Version ...................................111
STX KuJ
Write Data to Gen 2 Tag Section ........................................111
STX KuR
Read Data from RFID Tag .................................................112
STX KuW
Write Data to RFID Tag.....................................................113
STX KV
Verifier Enable/Disable......................................................113
STX KW
Memory Configuration, Printable Label Width .......................113
STX Kx
Delete Configuration File ...................................................114
STX KZ
Immediately Set Parameter ...............................................114
6 Label Formatting Command Functions ................................................ 115
Introduction .........................................................................................115
:
Set Cut by Amount ...............................................................115
A
Set Format Attribute .............................................................116
B
Bar Code Magnification..........................................................117
C
Set Column Offset Amount ....................................................117
c
Set Cut by Amount ...............................................................118
D
Set Dot Size Width and Height ...............................................118
E
Terminate Label Formatting Mode and Print Label .....................119
e
Recall Printer Configuration....................................................119
v
F
Advanced Format Attributes...................................................119
f
Set Present Speed ................................................................120
G
Place Data in Global Register..................................................120
H
Enter Heat Setting ................................................................121
J
Justification .........................................................................121
M
Select Mirror Mode ...............................................................122
m
Set Metric Mode ...................................................................122
n
Set Inch (Imperial) Mode.......................................................122
P
Set Print Speed ....................................................................123
p
Set Backfeed Speed ..............................................................123
Q
Set Quantity of Labels to Print................................................124
R
Set Row Offset Amount .........................................................124
r
Recall Stored Label Format ....................................................125
S
Set Feed Speed....................................................................125
s
Store Label Format in Module .................................................126
T
Set Field Data Line Terminator ...............................................126
U
Mark Previous Field as a String Replacement Field.....................127
X
Terminate Label Formatting Mode ...........................................127
y
Select Font Symbol Set .........................................................128
z
Zero (Ø) Conversion to “0” ....................................................128
+ (>)(() Make Last Field Entered Increment .......................................129
– (<)())
^
Make Last Field Entered Decrement.......................................130
Set Count by Amount............................................................131
Special Label Formatting Command Functions ...........................................131
vi
STX S
Recall Global Data and Place in Field .......................................132
STX T
Print Time and Date ..............................................................132
7 Font Loading Command Functions....................................................... 135
Introduction .........................................................................................135
*c###D
Assign Font ID Number......................................................135
)s###W
Font Descriptor ................................................................136
*c###E
Character Code.................................................................136
(s#W
Character Download Data ..................................................136
8 Generating Label Formats ................................................................... 137
Introduction .........................................................................................137
Format Record Commands .................................................................137
Generating Records...........................................................................138
The Structure of a Record ..................................................................138
Record Structure Types .....................................................................142
Advanced Format Attributes ...............................................................151
Appendix A.............................................................................................. 155
ASCII Control Chart...............................................................................155
Appendix B.............................................................................................. 157
Sample Programs ..................................................................................157
Appendix C.............................................................................................. 167
Available Fonts – Sizes, References, and Samples......................................167
vii
Appendix D ............................................................................................. 173
Reset Codes .........................................................................................173
Appendix E .............................................................................................. 175
Single Byte Symbol Sets ........................................................................175
Appendix F .............................................................................................. 187
Bar Code Summary Data ........................................................................187
Bar Code Default Widths and Heights .......................................................190
Appendix G.............................................................................................. 193
Bar Code Details ...................................................................................193
Appendix H ............................................................................................. 235
Single and Double Byte Character Font Mapping ........................................235
Appendix I .............................................................................................. 237
Symbol Sets and Character Maps ............................................................237
Symbol Set Selection ........................................................................237
Double-Byte Symbols, Chinese, Kanji, and Korean .....................................240
Appendix J .............................................................................................. 241
General Purpose Input Output Port Applications.........................................241
Applicator Interface Card (Type 1) ......................................................241
Applicator Interface Card (Type 2) ......................................................245
I-Class GPIO ....................................................................................251
M-Class II GPIO................................................................................252
Appendix K.............................................................................................. 255
Maximum Field & Character Values ..........................................................255
Print Resolutions and Maximum Width & Record Column Values ...................256
viii
Row Adjust Range .................................................................................257
Memory Module Identifiers and Allocations................................................258
Appendix L .............................................................................................. 259
Speed Ranges.......................................................................................259
Appendix M ............................................................................................. 261
Commands by Function ..........................................................................261
Appendix N ............................................................................................. 263
Image Loading......................................................................................263
Appendix O ............................................................................................. 265
UPC-A and EAN-13: Variable Price/Weight Bar Codes .................................265
Appendix P.............................................................................................. 267
International Language Print Capability (ILPC) Programming Examples .........267
ILPC - CG® TIMES .............................................................................267
ILPC - Kanji .....................................................................................268
ILPC - Chinese .................................................................................272
ILPC - Korean...................................................................................275
Appendix Q ............................................................................................. 277
Plug and Play IDs ..................................................................................277
Appendix R.............................................................................................. 279
Line Mode ............................................................................................279
Appendix S.............................................................................................. 283
RFID Overview......................................................................................283
Direct Mode .....................................................................................283
Label Formatting Mode ......................................................................284
ix
GEN2 Kill/Access Passwords ...............................................................288
GEN2 Lock States .............................................................................288
Appendix T .............................................................................................. 289
WiFi Region Country Codes .....................................................................289
Appendix U ............................................................................................. 295
Graphics Display Icon Key ......................................................................295
Control Panel Button Sequences ..............................................................296
Appendix V.............................................................................................. 299
Bar Code Symbology Information Resources .............................................299
Glossary .................................................................................................. 301
x
1
Overview
Who Should Use this Manual
This manual is intended for programmers who wish to create their own label production
software.
The Scope of this Manual
This manual, arranged alphabetically by command, explains Datamax Programming
Language (DPL) and its related uses in the writing, loading and storing of programs for the
control and production of label formats (designs) for the following printers at, or above, the
listed firmware version below:
Printers (all models, unless where otherwise noted)
Applicable Firmware Version
A-Class
EX2
H-Class
11.042
I-Class
M-Class Mark II
Model distinctions, including configurations (i.e., Display or Non-Display) and equipment
types (e.g., GPIO-1, graphics display, RFID, etc.), will be indicated in this text to
differentiate command compatibility. The appendices of this manual also contain details that
cannot be ignored; the use of any command will require checking for possible exclusionary
conditions.
• See the <STX>KC command for information regarding attainment of the printer’s firmware
version; and then, if necessary, upgrade that firmware. Upgrades are available at
http://www.datamaxcorp.com/.
• Programming information for Class Series printers (or firmware versions for Class Series
printers) not found in this manual can be found in the Class Series Programmer’s Manual
(part number 88-2316-01), except the S-Class printer and the legacy model printers which
can be found in the DPL Programmer’s Manual (part number 88-2051-01); and, for the E3202 see the E-3202 Programmer’s Manual (part number 88-2257-01). All aforementioned
manuals can be downloaded from our web site at http://www.datamaxcorp.com/.
• References to “Menu Settings” refer either to the set-up menu or to the system menu of
the printer; consult to the appropriate Operator’s Manual for details.
• Where applicable, printer responses to a host device will depend upon the communication
port, port settings, and cabling.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
1
Overview
This manual contains the following sections and appendices:
OVERVIEW on page 1
Contents, organization, and conventions used in this manual; also includes a
typical data flow sequence for the printer.
CONTROL CODE COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 9
Description of the attention-getter characters necessary for the printer to receive a
command sequence, and available alternate characters and line terminators.
IMMEDIATE COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 11
Description of the commands, listed alphabetically, that perform status queries and
printer control commands.
SYSTEM-LEVEL COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 17
Description of the commands, listed alphabetically, that control the printer and
allow scalable font and image downloads.
EXTENDED SYSTEM-LEVEL COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 37
Description of the commands (listed alphabetically) that control the printer.
LABEL FORMATTING COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 115
Description of commands, listed alphabetically, that control the position of text and
images on the media, print or store, and end the formatting process.
FONT LOADING COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 135
Description of commands, listed alphabetically, used when downloading font data
in PCL-4 compatible bitmaps.
GENERATING LABEL FORMATS on page 137
Description of the structure of records, the different types, and their use in
generating label formats.
APPENDICES on pages 155 – 299
These contain details that cannot be ignored including various tables, programming
examples, printer default values, and bar code symbology details. See the Table of
Contents for specific content information.
GLOSSARY on page 301
Definitions of words, abbreviations, and acronyms used in this manual.
2
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Overview
General Conventions
These are some of the conventions followed in this manual:
On the header of each page, the name of the section.
On the footer of each page, the page number and the title of the manual.
Names of other manuals referenced are in Italics.
Notes are added to bring your attention to important considerations, tips or helpful
suggestions.
Boldface is also used to bring your attention to important information.
This manual refers to IBM-PC based keyboard command characters for access to the
ASCII character set. Systems based on different formats (e.g., Apple’s Macintosh™)
should use the appropriate keyboard command to access the desired ASCII
character. See Appendix A for the ASCII character set.
Computer Entry and Display Conventions
Command syntax and samples are formatted as follows:
The Courier font in boldface indicates the DPL command syntax, and Italics are
used to indicate the command syntax parameters.
Regular Courier font indicates sample commands, files and printer responses.
Square brackets ([ ]) indicate that the item is optional.
<CR> is used to identify the line termination character. Other strings placed
between < > in this manual represent the character of the same ASCII name, and
are single-byte hexadecimal values (e.g., <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> equal 02, 0D,
and 0D, respectively).
Hexadecimal values are often displayed in ‘C’ programming language conventions
(e.g., 0x02 = 02 hex, 0x41 = 41 hex, etc.)
Important Safety Instructions
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the
user to the presence of important operating and maintenance instructions.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
3
Overview
Special Instructions
The green check box is intended to alert the user to conventions used within this
text or to notable operating details of the printer.
Typical Data Flow Sequence
The typical data flow sequence is summarized in the following bullets and detailed in the
table below. Printer Commands data is transmitted to the printer as shown in the table from
left to right, top to bottom.
Status commands
Configuration commands
Download commands
Label format
Status commands
Label reprint commands
Memory cleanup
Printer Commands
Notes
<STX>WG
“Status” commands: Get
Status, Request Memory
Module Storage
Information…
Optional,
bidirectional
communication
required for these
commands.
<STX>O220
<STX>n
<STX>V0
“Configuration”
commands, download
image…
See <STX>Kc to
reduce configuration
commands
transferred
<SOH>D
<STX>IApImagename<CR>image data...data
<CR>
“Download” commands,
image, fonts…
RAM (temporary) or
Flash (semipermanent)
memory.
<STX>L
Begin label
D11
Label Header record
131100000500050Typical text field 01
Label Formatting Data
record –
Object type, orientation,
position, data
Q0001
Label Quantity
E
Label Terminate record
<SOH>A
4
Description
Existing label
formats may be
recalled. Label
header records are
not required.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Overview
Printer Commands
Description
<SOH>A
Notes
Status command
Optional,
bidirectional
communication
required for these
commands.
Reprint with New Data
Records
Used for fast
reprints.
Memory cleanup
Typically used for
temporary storage.
<STX>U01new data for field 01
<STX>E0005
<STX>G
<STX>xImagename<CR>
<STX>zA
Commands are available for retrieving stored label formats, updating data, and adding new
data. These techniques are used for increasing throughput. See <STX>G, Label Recall
Command ‘r’, and Label Save Command ‘s’.
Typical commands used in the various stages shown above are listed in the tables that
follow.
Configuration Commands
The following table lists some commands useful in controlling printer configuration.
These commands are generally effective only for the current power-up session; toggling
power restores the default configuration. See <STX>Kc for changes to the default powerup configuration. Changing the default power-up configuration and saving objects in
printer Flash memory can reduce the data transmitted for each label and therefore
improve throughput.
Configuration
Command
Name
Function
<STX>A
Set Date and Time
Sets Date and Time.
<STX>c
Set Continuous Paper Length
Must be 0000 for gap media; not used
for reflective media.
<STX>e
Set Edge Sensor
Sets sensing for gap or registration hole
type stock.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
5
Overview
Configuration
Command
6
Name
Function
<STX>Kf
Set Present Distance
Determines label stop position, head
relative. <STX>f edge sensor relative
equivalent command, older models.
<STX>Kc
Configuration Set
Determines default power-up
configuration.
<STX>F
Send Form Feed
Sets the stop position of the printed
label.
<STX>M
Set Maximum Label Length
Length to search for next gap or
reflective mark; not used with
continuous media.
<STX>m
Set to Metric Mode
Subsequent measurements interpreted
in metric (most units, mm/10). Label
equivalent command can be used.
<STX>n
Set to Inch Mode
Subsequent measurements interpreted
in inches (most units in/100) label
equivalent command can be used.
<STX>O
Set Start of Print Position
Effect is not on label immediately
following command since media position
is at Start of Print between labels;
<STX>K default position relative ± 64
in/100 maximum deviation.
<STX>S
Set Feed Rate
Sets blank label movement speed.
<STX>V
Software Switch
Enables optional hardware, cutter,
present sensor.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Overview
Download Commands
Download
Command
Name
Function
<STX>I
Download Image
Downloads Image to selected memory
module.
<STX>i
Download Scalable Font
Downloads Scalable Font to selected
memory module.
<ESC>
Download Bitmapped Font
Downloads Bitmapped Font to selected
memory module.
Label Header Commands
These commands determine how the label formatting occurs, the print quality and
quantity. They are typically issued immediately following the <STX>L start of the label
format. The Format Attribute (A) and the Offset (C, R) commands can be changed at
any point between format records to achieve desired effects.
Label Header Command
Name
A
Set Format Attribute
C
Column Offset
D
Set Width and Dot Size
H
Set Heat Setting
M
Set Mirror Mode
P
Set Print Speed
P
Set Backup Speed
Q
Set Quantity
R
Set Row Offset
S
Set Feed Speed
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
7
Overview
8
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
2
Control Code Command Functions
Introduction
The printer requires a special “attention-getter” character in order to receive a command
sequence, informing the printer that it is about to receive a command and the type of
command it will be. Control Commands, System-Level Commands, and Font Loading
Commands have their own unique attention-getter, followed by a command character that
directs printer action.
Attention-Getters
The attention-getters (e.g., “SOH”) are standard ASCII control labels that represent a one
character control code (i.e., ^A or Ctrl A). Appendix A contains the entire ASCII Control
Code Chart.
Attention-Getter
ASCII Character
Decimal Value
HEX Value
Immediate Commands
SOH
1
01
System-Level Commands
STX
2
02
Font Loading Commands
ESC
27
1B
Table 2-1: Control Code Listings
Alternate Control Code Modes
For systems unable to transmit certain control codes, Alternate Control Code Modes are
available. Configuring the printer to operate in an Alternate Control Code Mode (selected via
the Setup Menu, the <STX>Kc command or, where applicable, the <STX>KD command)
requires the substitution of Standard Control Characters with Alternate Control Characters in
what is otherwise a normal data stream.
Control
Character
Standard
Alternate
Alternate 2
Custom
Command
Type
SOH
0x01
0x5E
0x5E
User Defined
Control
STX
0x02
0x7E
0x7E
User Defined
System
CR
0x0D
0x0D
0x7C
User Defined
Line Termination
ESC
0x1B
0x1B
0x1B
User Defined
Font Loading
0x5E
0x40
0x40
User Defined
Label Formatting
“Count By”
[1]
[1]
See Label Formatting Commands, ^ set count by amount.
Table 2-2: Alternate Control Code Listings
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
9
Control Code Command Functions
Throughout this manual <SOH>, <STX>, <CR>, <ESC>, and ^, will be used to indicate
the control codes. The actual values will depend on whether standard or alternate
control codes are enabled for the particular application.
Alternate Line Terminator Example: Alternate Control Codes provide for substitution of
the line terminator, as well as the control characters listed above. For example using
Alternate 2, the line terminator <CR> (0x0D) is replaced by | (0x7C). The following is a
sample label format data stream for a printer configured for Alternate-2 Control Codes:
~L|1911A10001000101234560|X|~UT01ABCDE|~G|
10
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
3
Immediate Command Functions
Introduction
When the printer receives an Immediate Command, its current operation will be
momentarily interrupted to respond to the command. Immediate Commands may be issued
before or after System-Level commands; however, they may not be issued among Label
Formatting Commands or during font or image downloading. Immediate Commands consist
of:
1. Attention-Getter, 0x01 or 0x5E; see Control Codes.
2. Command Character
SOH #
Reset
This command resets the printer. Resetting the printer returns all settings to default and
clears both the communications and printing buffers. The command also clears DRAM
memory.
Syntax:
<SOH>#
Printer Response:
The printer will reset.
<XON> T (The T may come before the <XON>)
SOH *
Reset (Display-Equipped Models only)
This command forces a soft reset of the microprocessor, resetting the printer, returning
all factory default values, and clearing the communication and print buffers.
Syntax:
<SOH>*
Printer Response:
The printer will reset.
<XON> R (The R may come before the <XON>)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
11
Immediate Command Functions
SOH A
Send ASCII Status String
This command allows the host computer to check the current printer status. The printer
returns a string of eight characters, followed by a carriage return. Each character (see
below) indicates an associated condition, either true (Y) or false (N). Byte 1 is
transmitted first. See <SOH>F.
Syntax:
<SOH>A
Sample:
<SOH>A
Printer Response:
abcdefgh<CR>
Where:
Possible
Values
Interpretation
Transmit
Sequence
a
-
Y/N
Y
=
Interpreter busy (imaging)
1
b
-
Y/N
Y
=
Paper out or fault
2
c
-
Y/N
Y
=
Ribbon out or fault
3
d
-
Y/N
Y
=
Printing batch
4
e
-
Y/N
Y
=
Busy printing
5
f
-
Y/N
Y
=
Printer paused
6
g
-
Y/N
Y
=
Label presented
7
h
-
N
N
=
Always No
8
Table 3-1: ASCII Status Bytes
SOH a
Send ASCII Extended Status String
This command allows the host computer to check an extended current printer status.
The printer returns a string of seventeen characters, followed by a carriage return. Most
characters (see below) indicate an associated condition, either true (Y) or false (N). Byte
1 is transmitted first. See <SOH>F.
Syntax:
<SOH>a
Sample:
<SOH>a
Printer Response:
abcdefgh:ijklmnop<CR>
Where:
12
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Immediate Command Functions
Possible
Values
Interpretation
Transmit
Sequence
a
-
Y/N
Y
=
Interpreter busy (imaging)
1
b
-
Y/N
Y
=
Paper out or fault
2
c
-
Y/N
Y
=
Ribbon out or fault
3
d
-
Y/N
Y
=
Printing batch
4
e
-
Y/N
Y
=
Busy printing
5
f
-
Y/N
Y
=
Printer paused
6
g
-
Y/N
Y
=
Label presented
7
h
-
N
N
=
Always No
8
-
:
:
=
Always :
9
i
-
Y/N
Y
=
Cutter Fault
10
j
-
Y/N
Y
=
Paper Out
11
k
-
Y/N
Y
=
Ribbon Saver Fault
12
l
-
Y/N
Y
=
Print Head Up
13
m
-
Y/N
Y
=
Top of Form Fault
14
n
-
Y/N
Y
=
Ribbon Low
15
o
-
Y/N
Y
=
N (reserved for future)
16
p
-
Y/N
Y
=
N (reserved for future)
17
Table 3-1: ASCII Status Bytes
SOH B
Toggle Pause
This command toggles the printer’s paused state between on and off. (This is the same
function achieved by pressing the PAUSE Key on the printer.)
Syntax:
<SOH>B
Sample:
<SOH>B
Printer Response:
This command will illuminate the Paused/Stop Indicator and/or
indicate PAUSED on the LCD or graphics display panel, suspend
printing, and wait until one of the following occurs:
•
•
The <SOH>B command is sent to the printer.
The PAUSE Key is pressed.
Upon which the printer will turn the Paused/Stop Indicator ‘Off’
and/or remove PAUSED from the LCD or graphics display, then
resume operation from the point of interruption. (If the Receive
Buffer is not full, an <XON> character will be transmitted from
the printer.)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
13
Immediate Command Functions
SOH C
Stop/Cancel
This command performs the same function as pressing the STOP/CANCEL Key on the
printer. This function clears the current format from the print buffer, pauses the printer,
and illuminates the Paused/Stop Indicator. (The pause condition is terminated as
described under <SOH>B.)
Syntax:
<SOH>C
Sample:
<SOH>C
Printer Response:
This command will clear the print buffer, pause the printer,
illuminate the Paused/Stop Indicator and/or indicate PAUSED on
the LCD or graphics display, suspend printing, and wait until one
of the following occurs:
•
•
The <SOH>B command is sent to the printer; or
The PAUSE Key is pressed.
Upon which the printer will turn the Paused/Stop Indicator ‘Off’
and/or remove PAUSED from the LCD or graphics display. (If the
Receive Buffer is not full, an <XON> character will be transmitted
from the printer.)
SOH D
SOH Shutdown
This command is ignored by the printer.
SOH E
Send Batch Remaining Quantity
This command causes the printer to return a four-digit number indicating the quantity of
labels that remain to be printed in the current batch, followed by a carriage return.
Communications latency may cause this value to be higher than actual on some printers.
14
Syntax:
<SOH>E
Printer response:
nnnn<CR>
Where:
nnnn
- Are four decimal digits, 0-9999.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Immediate Command Functions
SOH e
Send Batch Printed Quantity
This command causes the printer to return a four-digit number indicating the quantity of
labels that have been printed in the current batch, followed by a carriage return.
Communications latency may cause this value to be lower than actual on some printers.
Syntax:
<SOH>e
Printer response:
nnnn<CR>
Where:
nnnn
SOH F
- Are four decimal digits, 0-9999.
Send Status Byte
This command instructs the printer to send a single status byte where each bit (1 or 0)
represents one of the printer’s status flags, followed by a carriage return (see below). If
an option is unavailable for the printer, the single bit will always be zero. See <SOH>A.
Syntax:
<SOH>F
Response format:
X<CR>
Where:
‘X’ is 0 through 0xef with bits as indicated in the ‘Condition’
column below:
*
Bit*
Value
Condition
8
0
Always zero
7
1 or 0
Label presented
6
1 or 0
Printer paused
5
1 or 0
Busy printing
4
1 or 0
Printing batch
3
1 or 0
Ribbon out or Fault
2
1 or 0
Paper out or Fault
1
1 or 0
Command interpreter busy (imaging)
One is the least significant bit.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
15
Immediate Command Functions
16
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
4
System-Level Command Functions
Introduction
The most commonly used commands are the System-Level Commands. These are used to
load and store graphics information, in addition to printer control. System-Level Commands
are used to override default parameter values (fixed and selectable) and may be used
before or after Immediate Commands but cannot be issued among Label Formatting
Commands. System-Level Commands consist of:
1. Attention-Getter, 0x02 or 0x7E; see Control Codes.
2. Command Character
3. Parameters (if any).
STX A
Set Time and Date
This command sets the time and date. The initial setting of the date will be stored in the
printer’s internal inch counter. This date can be verified by printing a Configuration
Label.
Syntax:
<STX>AwmmddyyyyhhMMjjj
Where:
w
1 digit for day of week; 1 = Monday; 7 = Sunday
mm
2 digits for month
dd
2 digits for day
yyyy
4 digits for year
hh
2 digits for hour in 24 hour format
MM
2 digits for minutes
jjj
3 digits for Julian date / constant; see notes below.
Sample:
<STX>A1020319960855034
Printed response:
Mon. Feb 3, 1996, 8:55AM, 034
• When set to 000, the Julian date is automatically calculated; otherwise, the Julian
date will print as entered, without daily increments. If factory defaults are restored
the actual Julian date will also be restored.
• Printers without the Real Time Clock option lose the set time/date when power is
removed.
• Response format is variable; see the Special Label Formatting Command <STX>T.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
17
System-Level Command Functions
STX a
Enable Feedback Characters
This command enables the feedback ASCII hex characters to be returned from the
printer following specific events after each completed batch of labels when using serial
communications. The default value is ‘Off’.
Syntax:
<STX>a
Printer response:
Event dependent. (Also see Appendix D for error codes.)
Where:
STX B
Event
Return Characters
Invalid character
0x07 ( BEL )
Label printed
0x1E ( RS )
End of batch
0x1F ( US )
Get Printer Time and Date Information
This command instructs the printer to retrieve its internal time and date information.
Syntax:
<STX>B
Sample:
<STX>B
Response format:
wmmddyyyyhhMMjjj<CR>
Where:
w
1 digit for day of week; 1 = Monday
mm
2 digits for month
dd
2 digits for day
yyyy
4 digits for year
hh
2 digits for hour in 24 hour format
MM
2 digits for minutes
jjj
3 digits for Julian date / constant*
* See <STX>A for details and restrictions.
Response sample:
18
1020319960855034<CR>
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX c
Set Continuous Paper Length
This command sets the label size for applications using continuous media. It disables the
top-of-form function performed by the Media Sensor. The sensor, however, continues to
monitor paper-out conditions. See <STX>M.
Syntax:
<STX>cnnnn
Where:
nnnn
Sample:
<STX>c0100
- Specifies the length of the media feed for each label
format, in inches/100 or millimeters/10 (see <STX>m).
The sample above sets a label length of 100, which equals 1.00
inch (assuming Imperial Mode is selected).
This command must be reset to zero for edge or reflective sensing operation.
STX E
Set Quantity for Stored Label
This command sets the number of labels for printing using the format currently in the
print buffer. (The printer automatically stores the most recent format received in the
buffer until the printer is reset or power is removed.) When used in conjunction with the
<STX>G command, this will print the format.
Syntax:
<STX>Ennnnn<CR>
Where:
nnnnn
- A five-digit quantity, including leading zeros.
<CR>
- 0x0d terminates the name.
Sample:
<STX>E00025<CR>
<STX>G
Printer response:
25 labels of the current format in memory will be printed.
If no <CR> terminates the command, a four-digit quantity (nnnn) can be entered; and,
specifying 9999 will cause continuous printing.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
19
System-Level Command Functions
STX e
Select Edge Sensor
This command enables transmissive (see-through) sensing for top-of-form detection of
die-cut and holed (notched) media. This sensor will detect a minimum gap of 0.1 inches
(2.5 mm) between labels (see the Operator’s Manual for media requirements). This is
the default setting.
Syntax:
<STX>e
This command is ignored when <STX>cnnnn is issued with a non-zero value for nnnn.
STX F
Form Feed
This commands the printer to form feed to the next start of print.
Syntax:
<STX>F
Printer response:
The printer will form feed.
STX f
Set Form Stop Position (Backfeed Command)
This sets the stop position of the printed label, allowing the label to stop at a point past
the start-of-print position. When the next label format is sent, the printer motor
reverses direction to retract the media to the start-of-print position. If quantities of more
than one label are requested, the printer will operate without backfeeding. Backfeed will
then only occur when printing has stopped for a few seconds.
Non-Display Models: Option Control must be set via the printer menu to ‘Host’ for this
command to have effect.
Display-Equipped Models: This command is not honored; see <STX>Kf and <STX>Kc.
Syntax:
<STX>fnnn
Where:
nnn
Sample:
<STX>f230
- Is a three-digit distance from the Media Sensor, in
inches/100 or mm/10. This distance is independent of
the start-of-print position (<STX>O), yet it must be
greater than the start-of-print position to take effect.
The sample above sets a stop position distance of 230 (2.3 inches
from the Media Sensor’s eye).
20
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX G
Print Last Label Format
This command prints a previously formatted label and restarts a canceled batch job
following the last processed label. This is used when there is a label format in the buffer.
The <STX>E command is used to enter the quantity. (Without the <STX>E command, one
label will print.)
Syntax:
STX I
<STX>G
Input Image Data
This command must precede image downloading from the host to the printer. The data
that immediately follows the command string will be image data. If any of the 8-bit
input formats are to be used, it is necessary to disable the Immediate Command
interpreter by executing an <SOH>D command before issuing the <STX>I command. See
Appendix N for more information. To print an image, refer to Generating Label Formats.
A-Class (and large display H–Class models): A “ready mode” logo image can be
input using this command. The image must be stored on a Flash module. The image
name must be “logolab” (lowercase only) in the following DPL command. Also, printer
power must be cycled for the new image to appear. The available display area is 312
pixels wide by 94 pixels high. Images larger than this specified width or height will be
clipped along the right and/or bottom edges.
The native format for storing downloaded PCX and BMP images is RLE-2, which results
in a better compression ratio for less module space usage when downloading gray-scale
images and images with large black or white areas.
Syntax:
<STX>Iabfnn…n<CR>data
Where:
a
- Memory Module Bank Select (see Appendix K).
b
- Data Type (optional), A or omit:
b Value:
A
omit
f
- Format Designator:
f Designator:
F
B
b
I
i
P
p
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Image Data Value Range:
ASCII Characters 0-9, A-F, (7 bit)
00-FF, (8 bit)
Format Type:
7-bit Datamax image load file
.BMP 8-bit format, flipped, black
and white (B&W)
.BMP 8-bit format, B&W
.IMG 8-bit format, flipped, B&W
.IMG 8-bit format, B&W
.PCX 8-bit format, flipped, B&W
.PCX 8-bit format, B&W
21
System-Level Command Functions
Sample:
nn…n
- Up to 16 characters used as an image name.
<CR>
- 0x0d terminates the name.
data
- Image data
<SOH>D
<STX>IDpTest <CR>
data...data <CR>
The sample above instructs the printer to (1) receive an 8-bit PCX
image sent by the host in an 8-bit data format, (2) name the
image ‘Test’, and (3) store it in Module D (with a .dim file
extension).
STX i
Scalable Font Downloading
The command structure for downloading TrueType (.TTF) scalable fonts (font files may
be single-byte or double-byte character systems) is as follows:
Syntax:
<STX>imtnnName<CR>xx…xdata…
Where:
m
- The designator of the module where the font is to be
saved; see Appendix K.
t
- Type of scalable font being downloaded:
T = TrueType
nn
- Two-digit font reference ID. Valid range is 50-99,
9A-9Z, 9a-9z (base 62 numbers).
Name
- The title, up to 16 characters, for this font.
<CR>
- 0x0d terminates the Name.
xx…x
- Eight-digit size of the font data, number of bytes,
hexadecimal, padded with leading zeros.
data
- The scalable font data.
Sample:
<STX>iDT52Tree Frog<CR>000087C2data...
The sample above downloads a TrueType font to Module D, and
assigns it the Font ID of 52 with the name “Tree Frog” and file
extension .dtt. The size of the font data is 0x87C2 bytes long.
22
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX J
Set Pause for Each Label
This command causes the printer to pause after printing each label. It is intended for
use with the peel mechanism or tear bar when the Present Sensor option is not installed.
After removing the printed label, the PAUSE Key must be pushed in order to print the
next label. (The printer must be reset to clear the <STX>J command.)
Syntax:
STX K
<STX>J
Extended System-Level Commands
This is an expansion of the System-Level Command structure; see Extended SystemLevel Commands for more information.
STX k
Test RS-232 Port
This command instructs the printer to transmit the Y character from the printer’s RS-232
port. (Failure to receive Y could indicate an interfacing problem.)
Syntax:
<STX>k
Printer response:
Y
STX L
Enter Label Formatting Command Mode
This command switches the printer to the Label Formatting Command Mode. Once in this
mode, the printer expects to receive Record Structures and Label Formatting
Commands. Immediate, System-Level, and Font Loading commands will be ignored until
the label formatting mode is terminated with E, s, or X, (see Label Formatting
Commands for additional information).
Syntax:
<STX>L
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
23
System-Level Command Functions
STX M
Set Maximum Label Length
This command instructs the printer move media this distance in search of the top-ofform (label edge, notch, black mark, etc.) before declaring a paper fault. A paper fault
condition can occur if this setting is too close (within 0.1 inch [2.54 mm]) to the physical
length of the label. Therefore, it is a good practice to set this command to 2.5 to 3 times
the actual label length used. The minimum value should be at least 5” (127 mm).
Syntax:
<STX>Mnnnn
Where:
nnnn
Sample:
<STX>M0500
- Is a four-digit length, 0000-9999, in/100 or mm/10.
Maximum setting is 9999 (99.99 inches or 2540
mm). The default setting is 16 inches/ 406.4 mm.
The sample above sets a maximum travel distance of 5 inches
(unless the printer is in metric mode; see <STX>m).
STX m
Set Printer to Metric Mode
This command sets the printer to interpret measurements as metric values (e.g.,
<STX>c0100 will equal 10.0 mm). The default is Imperial (see <STX>n).
Syntax:
STX n
<STX>m
Set Printer to Imperial Mode
This command sets the printer to interpret measurements as inch values (e.g.,
<STX>c0100 will equal 1.00 inch), and is the default mode.
Syntax:
24
<STX>n
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX O
Set Start of Print (SOP) Position
This command sets the point to begin printing relative to the top-of-form (the label’s
edge as detected by the Media Sensor). The printer will feed from the top-of-form to the
value specified in this command to begin printing.
This value operates independently of the <STX>f command.
Non-Display Models: The printer Options Control must be set (via the menu) to ‘Host’ for
this command to have effect.
Display-Equipped Models: If SOP Emulation is set to ‘enabled’ (via the menu), this
command sets the point where printing starts, emulating the selected legacy printer’s
distance, as measured between the media sensor and the print head burn line. In
addition, regardless of the SOP Emulation setting, the start of print position can be finetuned via the menu: Menu Mode / Print Control / Custom Adjustments / Row Adjust.
Syntax:
<STX>Onnnn
Where:
nnnn
- Is a four-digit offset value in inches/100 or mm/10.
The “zero” setting is the default value, and settings
below 50 are adjusted back to the default value.
Non-Display: The default setting is 0220 in Imperial
Mode (0559 in Metric Mode).
Display-Equipped: The default setting is ‘Off’ and the
printer assumes the natural SOP position.
Sample
(Non-Display
models):
<STX>O0300
The sample above sets a start of print position of 3.0 inches
(unless in Metric Mode; see <STX>m).
Sample
(Display-Equipped
<STX>O0210
models):
The sample above will begin printing 0.1 inch closer to the leading
edge of the label if the 220 (Allegro) SOP Emulation was selected,
or 1.0 inch farther away from the leading edge if 110 (ProdPlus)
SOP Emulation was selected.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
25
System-Level Command Functions
STX o
Cycle Cutter
This command will cause the optional cutter mechanism to immediately perform a cut
after all previously received commands are executed. The cutter must be installed,
enabled and the interlock(s) closed for operation.
Syntax:
STX P
<STX>o
Set Hex Dump Mode
This command instructs the printer to assume Hex Dump Mode. Instead of a formatted
product, data sent to the printer following this command will be printed in the raw ASCII
format. To capture this data, labels must be at least four inches (102 mm) long and as
wide as the maximum print width. This command has the same effect as turning the
printer ON while pressing the FEED Key. To return to normal operation the printer must
be manually reset.
Syntax:
STX p
<STX>P
Controlled Pause
The controlled pause command will cause the printer to pause only after all previously
received commands are executed. This is often useful between label batches. (This
command will not clear the pause condition; see <SOH>B).
Syntax:
STX Q
<STX>p
Clear All Modules
This command instructs the printer to clear all of the Flash and DRAM modules, but will
not affect Module Y or the ILPC Font module; see the Operator’s Manual of the
corresponding printer for applicable module options. All stored data will be
destroyed.
Syntax:
<STX>Q
Will not affect Module Y or the ILPC Font module.
26
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX q
Clear Module
This command clears the selected Flash or DRAM module. During normal operations if a
module becomes corrupted (identifiable when the printer responds with a ‘No Modules
Available’ message to a <STX>W command) it must be cleared. All stored data will be
destroyed.
Syntax:
<STX>qa
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>qA
- Memory module designator; see Appendix K.
The sample above clears memory Module A.
Will not affect Module Y or the ILPC Font module.
STX R
Ribbon Saver Control
This command enables the operation of the optional Ribbon Saver. It is the only
command used to control the Ribbon Saver. Its operation is continuous when enabled.
The printer must be set to thermal transfer (ribbon) printing mode then, during
operation, the Ribbon Saver engages automatically, lifting when the minimum amount of
label white space is exceeded.
Syntax:
<STX>Rx
Where:
x
Sample:
<STX>RY
- Y - Enabled (Default = Menu selection.)
N - Disabled
The sample above will turn the ribbon saver on.
This command is ignored on non-equipped printers.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
27
System-Level Command Functions
STX r
Select Reflective Sensor
This command enables reflective (black mark) sensing for top-of-form detection of rolled
butt-cut, and fan-fold or tag stocks with reflective marks on the underside. This Media
Sensor will detect a minimum mark of 0.1 inches (2.54 mm) between labels (see the
Operator’s Manual for media requirements). The end of the black mark determines the
top of form. Use the <STX>O command to adjust the print position.
Syntax:
<STX>r
Default setting:
Edge sensing
STX S
Set Feed Speed
This command controls the output rate of the media when the FEED Key is pressed.
Syntax:
<STX>Sn
Where:
n
STX T
- Is a letter value (see Appendix L).
Print Quality Label
This command instructs the printer to produce a Print Quality label, a format comprised
of different patterns and bar codes useful in printer setup. To capture all printed
information, use the labels as wide as the maximum print width (see Appendix K) and at
least four inches (102 mm) long.
Syntax:
<STX>T
Printer response
(dot patterns may
vary):
28
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX t
Test DRAM Memory Module
This command tests the DRAM module. The printer returns a one-line message stating
the module condition (no message is returned if a module is unavailable). The printer
must have Feedback Characters enabled for this command to function. Feedback
Characters can be enabled via the menu (see the Operator’s Manual for additional
information).
Syntax:
<STX>t
Response format:
Module D: xxxxK
Where:
xxxx
- Module size in Kbytes.
results
- Test results given as ‘Good’ or ‘Bad’.
STX U
RAM Tested results <CR>
Label Format String Replacement Field
This command places new label data into format fields to build a label. Two options are
available: Exact Length and Truncated Length.
To easily keep track of fields, place all of the fields to be updated with the command at
the beginning of the label format. A maximum of 99 format fields can be updated. Fields
are numbered consecutively 01 to 99 in the order received.
Exact Length Replacement Field Functions – The new data string must equal the
original string length and contain valid data. When the dynamic data is shorter than the
length of the originally defined data field, then field will be padded with blanks (or zero
when the Format Record header specifies a numeric bar code).
Syntax:
<STX>Unnss…s<CR>
Where:
nn
- Is the format field number, 2 digits.
ss…s
- Is the new string data, followed by a <CR>
Exact Length
Sample:
<STX>L
1A1100001000100data field 1<CR>
161100001100110data field 2<CR>
161100001200120data field 3<CR>
Q0001
E
<STX>U01123<CR>
<STX>U02New data F2<CR>
<STX>E0002
<STX>G
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
29
System-Level Command Functions
The sample above produces three labels. The first is formatted
with the commands between <STX>L and E. The next two labels
print with the replacement data contained in the <STX>U
commands (see <STX>E and <STX>G). The bar code is the same
length: 3 digits and nine spaces.
Truncated Length Replacement Field Functions – A variant of the <STX>U command
includes the truncate option ‘T’, where dynamic data shorter than the originally defined
field length will not be padded and the original maximum field length is maintained for
subsequent replacements.
Syntax:
<STX>UTnnss…s<CR>
Where:
nn
- Is the format field number, 2 digits.
T
- Truncate option
ss…s
- Is the new string data, followed by a <CR>.
Truncated Sample:
<STX>L
1A1100001000100data field 1<CR>
161100001100110data field 2<CR>
161100001200120data field 3<CR>
Q0001
E
<STX>UT01123<CR>
<STX>U02New data F2<CR>
<STX>E0002
<STX>G
The sample above produces three labels. The first is formatted
with the commands between <STX>L and E. The next two labels
print with the replacement data contained in the <STX>U
commands (see <STX>E and <STX>G). The bar code is shortened;
it only has three digits (and no spaces).
30
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX V
Software Switch Settings
This command controls the printer options, where the appropriate value allows the
option(s) to be ‘on’ or ‘off.’ Each option has a corresponding bit whose value is ‘1’ when
enabled. The tables below indicate the bit assignments and corresponding command
value needed to enable the desired option(s). Printer options are set by entering
selections through the menu. The software setting command allows two of these option
settings to be modified without returning to the menu.
Syntax:
<STX>Vn
Where:
n
Sample:
<STX>V5
- Is a single digit ASCII numeric value from 0-F. The
value of n is used to override the power-up option
settings. Reset or power-up returns the printer to the
original settings.
The sample above corresponds to setting Bits 0 and 2, creating a
command value of 5. When applied, this enables the Present
Sensor and Cutter options.
Bit Assignment
Printer Option
0
Cutter
1
N/A
2
Present Sensor
3
N/A
Table 4-1: Software Switch Bit Assignment
Use the bit assignment table above to determine the command value n in the binary
table below (e.g., the command value 5 sets the bits 0 and 2 to ‘1’).
Command Values for Bits Assigned
Bit
n Value
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
4
0
1
0
0
5
0
1
0
1
Table 4-2: Software Switch Binary
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
31
System-Level Command Functions
STX v
Request Firmware Version
This command causes the printer to send its version string (this data is the same as that
printed on the configuration label). The version may be different from printer to printer.
Syntax:
<STX>v
Printer Response:
VER: H-4212–11.04 01/01/2008<CR>
STX W
Request Memory Module Information
This command requests a memory module directory listing. Results may vary depending
on printer class, model, or firmware version.
Syntax:
<STX>W[b][c]a
Where:
b
s optional – list file size also
c
e optional – list file extension also
a
- Data type:
F
G
L
C
X
N
M
f
p
*
Sample:
Printer response
(using an H-Class):
32
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Downloaded fonts
Graphics (Image)
Label formats
Configuration files
Language files
Plug-ins
Miscellaneous type files
Resident fonts
Entire module contents
All types
<STX>WF
MODULE: D<CR>
S50 92244ttf50<CR>
AVAILABLE BYTES: 945152<CR>
MODULE: G<CR>
AVAILABLE BYTES: 852480<CR>
MODULE: X<CR>
AVAILABLE BYTES: 852480<CR>
MODULE: Y<CR>
AVAILABLE BYTES: 852480<CR>
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX w
Test Flash Memory Module
This command tests the Flash module. The time for each test will vary from 20 to 120
seconds, depending upon the size of the module. All stored data will be destroyed. If
no module is present, there will be no printer response.
Syntax:
<STX>wa
Where:
a
Response format:
Module A: xxxxK results
Where:
A
- Module tested.
xxxx
- Module size in Kbytes.
results
- Test results given as ‘Good’ or ‘Bad’.
STX X
- Module designator; see Appendix K.
Set Default Module
This command, typically used prior to the loading of PCL-4 bitmapped fonts (see Font
Loading Commands), is designed to allow the user to select between modules when
downloading information. The default module is one of the following:
1. The first alpha designator of the existing modules if item 2 has not occurred.
2. The module selected by this command.
Syntax:
<STX>Xa
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>XB
- Module designator; See Appendix K.
The sample above sets ‘B’ as the default module.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
33
System-Level Command Functions
STX x
Delete File from Module
This command removes a specific file from the specified module. The file name is
removed from the module directory and thus the file cannot be accessed. The actual
storage space occupied by the file is not released. To reclaim deleted file storage space
use <STX>z to pack the module.
Syntax:
<STX>xmtnn…n<CR>
Where:
m
- Module designator; see Appendix K.
t
- The file type identification code:
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
G
L
F
S
C
X
N
M
u
nn…n
Image file
Label format file
Downloaded bitmapped font file
Downloaded scalable font file
Configuration file
Language file
Plug-in file
Miscellaneous file type
Unknown type – must use extension if
applicable
- The file to delete, where:
• Font (bitmapped), three character font identifier;
• Font (scalable), two character font identifier;
• Graphic name, up to sixteen alphanumeric
characters; or,
• Label format name, up to sixteen alphanumeric
characters.
Sample:
<STX>xDS50<CR>
The sample above deletes a downloaded scalable font with ID 50
from Module D.
34
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX Y
Output Sensor Values
This command causes a sensor value response. When <STX>Y is received, the printer will
respond with the digitally converted values of the internal analog sensors (see below).
To repeat the display of values, send the printer a ‘SPACE’ character (20 hexadecimal);
or, send <ESC> to terminate this function.
The printer must have Feedback Characters enabled for this command to function.
(Feedback Mode [Characters] can be enabled via command or menu setting; see the
<STX>KcFM command or the Operator’s Manual for additional information).
Syntax:
<STX>Y
Printer response:
Thermistor ADC: 0048 Reflective ADC: 0000
Transmissive ADC: 0204 Paperout ADC: 0000 24 Volt ADC:
0217 Contrast ADC: 0093 TOF Adjust ADC: 0170 Ribbon
ADC: 0125 Battery Level: Good <CR>
Where:
Paperout ADC:
0225 indicates paper is present;
0000 indicates paper is not present.
Battery level:
Good indicates a sufficient battery charge;
Low indicates an insufficient charge.
• Equipped sensors vary with printer, model, and options;
• Some readings require printer-controlled paper movement to produce a meaningful
value; and,
• Media Sensor readings require the appropriate sensor selection, transmissive
(<STX>e) or reflective (<STX>r), and label stock placed in the sensor.
STX y
Select Font Symbol Set
This command selects the scalable font symbol set. The selected symbol set remains
active until another symbol set is selected. See the <STX>KS command and Appendices
E, I, and H for more information. Option dependant and not all symbol sets can be used
with all fonts.
Syntax:
<STX>ySxx
Where:
S
- Byte-size designation; see Appendix H:
S = Single byte symbol sets.
U = Double byte symbol sets.
xx
- Symbol set selection.
Sample:
<STX>ySPM
The sample above selects the PC-850 multilingual set.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
35
System-Level Command Functions
STX Z
Print Configuration Label
This command causes the printer to produce a Database Configuration Label. To capture
all printed information, use the labels as wide as the maximum print width (see
Appendix K) and at least four inches (102 mm) long.
Syntax:
<STX>Z
Printer response:
CONFIGURATION
TUE 09:09 AM 05FEB2008
PRINTER KEY:
4308-TB10-020312-001
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL PORT A:
BAUD RATE:
9600 BPS
APPLICATION VERSION:
PROTOCOL:
MCL Version: 1.20.02-126
BOOT LOADER:
PARITY:
83-2400-11D 11X04 01/31/2008
83-2269-11A 11.01 10/02/2007
UNLOCKED:
DATA BITS:
8
STOP BITS:
*NONE
1
FPGA:
*
SYSTEM INFORMATION
PRINT BUFFER SIZE:
100 in.
FLASH SIZE:
2 MB
RAM TEST:
PASS
OPTIONAL LANGUAGES:
FRANCIAS.DLN
ITALIANO.DLN
DEUTSCH.DLN
ESPANOL.DLN
SERIAL PORT B:
NOT INSTALLED
SERIAL PORT C:
NOT INSTALLED
SERIAL PORT D:
NOT INSTALLED
USB PORT:
NOT INSTALLED
PARALLEL PORT A:
PORT DIRECTION:
UNI-DIRECTIONAL
CONFIGURATION FILE:
.CUR LAN
BOTH
NONE
PARALLEL PORT A:
NOT INSTALLED:
Printed information will vary according to printer, model, firmware version, and options.
STX z
Pack Module
This command causes the printer to reclaim all storage space associated with all deleted
files on the specified module (see <STX>X and <STX>x).
Syntax:
<STX>zm
Where:
m
- The module identification character; see Appendix K.
Valid for I-Class and A-Class only, ignored by all others.
36
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
5
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Introduction
Issued in the same context as System-Level Commands, the Extended System-Level
Commands expand certain System-Level Commands to provide an extra degree of printer
control.
STX K
Memory Configuration
This command configures the available DRAM (including any installed optional DRAM) as
a method for managing printer memory. Memory can be assigned to specific entities or
functions in units of 4KB blocks. The allocation(s) set by this command, draw from the
same memory pool, affecting maximum print length and label throughput (see note
below). The printer executes the memory configuration specified by the command during
the next idle period following its receipt, and is stored in Flash memory then reinstated
upon a power-up or reset. If the total requested memory allocation exceeds the
configurable memory available, contains no fields, or for configurations not specified, the
command will be rejected and the printer will assume its previous configuration. Any of
the three fields are optional, and are separated by the colon. Brackets indicate optional
fields.
Syntax:
<STX>Kix[:jy][:kz]<CR>
Sample:
<STX>KM0020:S0015<CR>
The sample above allocates 20*4*1024 bytes for module space and
15*4*1024 bytes for the scalable cache.
Where,
i, j, k are M, S, or W; x, y, z are four-digit maximum numbers of 4K byte blocks or
inches/100 or (mm/10) as described below.
M
Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that assigns memory to
an Internal Module. If this field does not appear, then the Internal Module is not
affected. If no Internal Module exists, it will be created and formatted. Existing
Internal Modules will be erased, re-sized and formatted. The number that follows
the M is a decimal number (up to four digits) that specifies the size in 4KB blocks of
memory to assign to the Internal Module. A value of “0000” will delete the Internal
Module (see Appendix J for additional information).
S
Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that assigns the amount
of internal memory allocated to the smooth scalable font processor. This field is
optional; if it does not appear, the current amount of memory assigned to the
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
37
Extended System-Level Command Functions
smooth scalable font processor will remain unchanged. The allocation must be at
least 15 (60KB) to print scalable fonts, and at least 30 for double-byte fonts. The
number that follows the S is a decimal number (up to four digits) that specifies the
size in 4 KB blocks to assign to the smooth scalable font processor. Any value less
than the minimum requirement results in the amount assigned to be zero (0),
thereby disabling the printing of smooth scalable fonts. The recommended value is
0025 (100KB).
W
Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that sets the printable
label width. Setting a width smaller than the natural (maximum) width of the printer
effectively extends printable label length. This field is optional; if it does not appear,
the current printable label width is left unchanged. The number that follows the W is
a decimal number (up to four digits) that specifies the printable label width in either
100ths of an inch or in millimeters, depending on the current units setting of the
printer (imperial or metric). If the value specified exceeds the printable width of the
printer, the printable label width is set to the maximum. If the value specified is less
than the minimum value allowed (200) then the printable label width is set to the
minimum allowed value.
• Label printing requirements may be computed as bytes (label print length * width
allocation * print head resolution / 8). For maximum throughput, the memory
allocated should allow for a minimum of three times the computed requirement, or
the available label length (as determined by <STX>KQ command) should be three
times the label print length; and,
• These commands will result in a system reset for the EX2.
STX K}E
Empty Sensor Calibration (Non-Display Models only)
This command causes the printer to determine and save the calibration value for an
empty media sensor condition. This calibration function should be performed when no
material is installed in the media sensor. Depending upon the printer model, different
front panel LED flash sequences and printer responses (below) will indicate calibration
progress and outcome; see the corresponding printer operator manual for LED flash
sequences details.
38
Printer Response
Alternate
REMOVE STOCK[CR]
N/A
ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR]
N/A
PASSED CALIBRATION[CR]
FAILED CALIBRATION[CR]
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX K}M
Manual Media Calibration (Non-Display Models only)
This command causes the printer to save the sampled calibration values as an operator
places different portions of label stock within the media sensor. Depending upon the
printer model, different front panel LED flash sequences and printer responses (below)
will indicate calibration progress and outcome; see the corresponding printer operator
manual for LED flash sequences details. Sending <ESC> to the printer instead of <CR>
will terminate the process and leave the TOF Sensor values unchanged.
STX K}Q
Printer Response
Alternate
LOAD STOCK[CR]
ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR]
N/A
LOAD MARK[CR]
ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR]
LOAD GAP[CR]
REMOVE STOCK[CR]
ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR]
N/A
PASSED CALIBRATION[CR]
FAILED CALIBRATION[CR]
Quick Media Calibration (Non-Display Models only)
This command causes the printer to move media, sample, and then save sensor samples
as calibration values. This calibration function should be performed with media installed
in the printer. Depending upon the printer model, different front panel LED flash
sequences and printer responses (below) will indicate calibration progress and outcome;
see the corresponding printer operator manual for LED flash sequences details.
Printer Response
Alternate
FAILED CALIBRATION[CR]
ADJUST GAIN SETTING[CR]
N/A
PASSED CALIBRATION[CR]
FAILED CALIBRATION[CR]
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
39
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KaR
Read Data from RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – Generic Read/Write Interface)
This command instructs the RFID device to read data from the tag and then place that
data into a replaceable field. It is expected that the tag transponder will be within the
read / write distance of the RFID programming device; otherwise, “Void” will be printed
in the text or bar code label field.
Syntax:
<STX>KaRAaaabbbcdee<CR>
Where:
A
- Optional – for data in the ASCII format.
aaa
- The number of bytes to read.
bbb
- HF - Starting block number (000
maximum block
number, which is dependent upon the
transponder manufacturer).
UHF – Should be 000.
c
- Command 1. Reserved. Should be 0.
d
- Command 2. Reserved. Should be 0.
ee
- Field number in which to place the data (must be 01,
02, 03, etc.) matching the order of Label Formatting
command U.
The 00 value will send read data to the host with no
printing.
Sample:
<STX>L
1911A1802000010TEXT
U
X
<STX>KaR0000010001
<STX>G
The sample above creates a replaceable text field (01), recalls data
from the RFID tag block zero (reading only one block), and prints
the data in the location specified by the replaceable field. Since
there are two digits per each hex value, replaceable fields should be
twice as long than if using ASCII data (e.g., the character “A” would
be returned as “41”).
40
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KaW Write Data to RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – Generic Read/Write Interface)
This command instructs the RFID device to write data to the tag. It is expected that the
tag transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device;
otherwise, a warning will occur and a warning message (Read / Write Fail) will be
displayed.
Syntax:
Where:
<STX>KaWAaaabbbcdee…e<CR>
Aaaa
- Optional – for data in the ASCII format, followed by
the byte count (000-999).
bbb
maximum block
- HF – Starting block number (000
number, which is dependent upon the
transponder manufacturer).
UHF – Should be 000.
c
- Command 1. Reserved for Future (should be 0)
d
- Command 2. Reserved for Future (should be 0)
ee…e
- Data to be encoded on RFID tag (HF – the last used
block will be null-padded, if necessary).
UHF ASCII formats must be 8 or 12 characters; and,
UHF Hexadecimal formats must be 16 or 24
character pairs.
Sample:
<STX>KaW0000054455354[CR]
The sample above writes the data “TEST” at block zero.
STX Kb
Backfeed Time Delay
The backfeed time delay command controls the time a printed label is allowed to remain
“presented” before being retracted to the start of print position.
Syntax:
<STX>Kbnnn<CR>
Where:
nnn
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
- Seconds/10
41
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KC
Get Configuration
This command returns the configuration of the printer. The form of the returned data is
similar to that of a printed Configuration Label. This command should be parsed by
KEYWORDS, not by Character POSITIONS. Each line is terminated by a CR
(0x0d) & LF (0x0a).
Syntax:
<STX>KC<CR>
Printer response:
CONFIGURATION
TUE 02:01PM 01AUG2005
PRINTER KEY:
4308-TB10-010327-494
APPLICATION VERSION:
83-2284-06E
06.06 07/09/2001
BOOT LOADER:
83-2269-03D 03.04 10/30/2000
SYSTEM INFORMATION
PRINT BUFFER SIZE:
280 in.
FLASH SIZE:
4 MB
RAM TEST:
PASS
OPTIONAL LANGUAGES:
FRANCAIS
ITALIANO
DEUTSCH
ESPAÑOL
CONFIGURATION FILE:
NONE
MEDIA SETTINGS
MEDIA TYPE
THERMAL TRANSFER
SENSOR TYPE
GAP
LABEL LENGTH
04.00 in.
MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH
•30.00 in.
PAPER OUT DISTANCE
00.25 in.
LABEL WIDTH
4.16 in.
SENSOR CALIBRATION
PAPER SENSOR LEVEL
144
GAP SENSOR LEVEL
30
EMPTY SENSOR LEVEL
0
SENSOR GAIN
10
PRINT CONTROL
HEAT
10
PRINT SPEED
6.0in/sec
FEED SPEED
6.0in/sec
REVERSE SPEED
4.0in/sec
ROW OFFSET
00.00 in.
COLUMN OFFSET
00.00 in.
PRESENT DISTANCE
0.00 in.
CUSTOM ADJUSTMENTS:
DARKNESS
32
ROW ADJUST
64 DOTS
COLUMN ADJUST
0 DOTS
PRESENT ADJUST
64 DOTS
PRINTER OPTIONS
MODULES
A: NOT INSTALLED
B: NOT INSTALLED
D: FORMATTED
F: NOT INSTALLED
G: FORMATTED
X: FORMATTED
Y: 83-2296-01C
Z: NOT INSTALLED
PRESENT SENSOR
NOT INSTALLED
CUTTER
NOT INSTALLED
GPIO PORT:
NOT INSTALLED
SYSTEM SETTINGS
FACTORY SETTING FILE
NONE
INTERNAL MODULE
1024 KB
DEFAULT MODULE
D
SCALEABLE FONT CACHE
312 KB
SINGLE BYTE SYMBOLS
PC-850 MULTILINGUAL
DOUBLE BYTE SYMBOLS
UNICODE
ABSOLUTE COUNTER
3782 in.
27MAR2001
RESETTABLE COUNTER
205 in.
27MAR2001
FORMAT ATTRIBUTES
XOR
IMAGING MODE
MULTIPLE LABEL
PAUSE MODE
DISABLED
SELECT SECURITY
DISABLED
PEEL MODE
DISABLED
UNITS OF MEASURE
IMPERIAL
SOP EMULATION
DISABLED
BACK AFTER PRINT
DISABLED
MENU LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL PORT A:
BAUD RATE
9600 BPS
PROTOCOL
BOTH
PARITY
NONE
DATA BITS
8
STOP BITS
1
SERIAL PORT B:
NOT INSTALLED
PARALLEL PORT A:
PORT DIRECTION
UNI-DIRECTIONAL
PORT STATUS
DISABLED
PARALLEL PORT B:
PORT DIRECTION
BI-DIRECTIONAL
PORT STATUS
DISABLED
NIC ADAPTER:
DMXNET INACTIVE
HOST SETTINGS:
HOST TIMEOUT
10 SEC
CONTROL CODES
STANDARD CODES
FEEDBACK
CHARACTERS
DISABLED
ESC SEQUENCES
ENABLED
HEAT COMMAND
ENABLED
SPEED COMMANDS
ENABLED
DIAGNOSTICS
HEX DUMP MODE
DISABLED
PRINT TEST
RATE(min)
0
SENSOR READINGS
THR TRAN RIBM 24V
132 141 159 178
PS HD RANK
000 254 000
RIBBON SENSOR
LIMITS
RIBBON ADC LOW
105
RIBBON ADC HIGH
182
END OF LIST
The format of the displayed information will vary with printer, model, firmware version,
and equipped options.
42
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX Kc
Configuration Set
This command specifies the Power-up Configuration parameter values for the printer and
is equivalent to using other system commands followed by the <SOH>U. This command
is intended for easily configuring a custom setup, but NOT for dynamic
configuration changes. Configuration commands are examined for differences
relative to the current configuration and the command has no impact when no
differences exist. Display-equipped models will reset upon completion of a command
stream containing parameter value changes, while non-display models reset only for
certain functions, such as memory allocation. In any case, no commands should be sent
to the printer until this reset is complete. Other command highlights include the
following:
•
These parameter values are equivalent to changing the respective menu settings and
do not affect the factory default settings of the printer.
•
If separated by a semi-colon (;), multiple parameter values may be sent in a single
command stream; see sample below.
•
All values are stored in Flash memory and remain in effect until new values are
received or until factory defaults are restored.
•
If system commands are sent that override the Power-up Configuration value(s), the
Power-up Configuration value(s) will be restored the next time the printer is powered
ON or reset.
•
These parameters are the same as those found in the Setup Menu (non-display
models), or as those found in the Menu System (display-equipped models). The
respective functions are documented in the appropriate Operator’s or Maintenance
Manual. Not all commands are effective on all Class printers.
Illegal or out of range parameter values may have unpredictable results. In addition,
media sensing scaling values, TOF Bias, etc. may not be effective on other same-type
printers due to hardware tolerances.
Syntax:
<STX>Kcaa1val1[;aaIvalI][;aanvaln]<CR>
Where:
aa1, aaI, aan
- Are two letter parameter names.
val1, valI, valn
- Are parameter values, with ranges
appropriate for the associated parameter.
Sample:
<STX>KcPA120;CL600;STC<CR>
The sample above sets the Present Adjust to 120 dots, and the
Sensor Type to Continuous with a label length of six inches.
The following table summarizes (alphabetically by name) different Configuration Set
command parameters, value ranges, command equivalents and applicability. If no
command equivalent is given, or where clarification is required, descriptions immediately
follow the table.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
43
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Configuration Set Commands
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Alignment Length
AL
Backup After Print
BA
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
0 – 999
1/100 inch
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
EX2
N/A
Mark II
Non-Display
18
Display-Equipped
System Settings
EX2
N/A
Command
Equivalent
N/A
N/A
Backup Delay
BD
0 – 255
1/50 second
Display-Equipped
System Settings
N/A
Backup Label
BL
0, 3, 4
0 = Disabled,
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
N/A
alpha
character
Model specific
ranges; see
Appendix L.
Display-Equipped
Print Control
BS or bS
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Backup (Reverse) Speed
British Pound
Buzzer Enable
BP
BZ
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
pa
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
N/A
N/A
System Settings
N/A
EX2
A-Class
(continued)
44
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Column Adjust
[1]
Parameter
Pneumonic
CA
Column Adjust Fine
Tune
CF
Column Offset
CO
Comm Heat Commands
Comm Speed
Commands
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
xxx dots
Resolution specific;
see Appendix K,
and Column Adjust
Fine Tune
+ / – dots
0 – 9999
Resolution specific;
see Appendix K.
1/100 in.
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
1, 0
1 = Enabled,
0 = Disabled
CH
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
1, 0
1 = Enabled,
0 = Disabled
CS
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
Command
Equivalent
Display-Equipped
Print Control
N/A
EX2
N/A
Mark II
Non-Display
7
Display-Equipped
Print Control
N/A
N/A
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Print Control
Cnnnn
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Communications
EX2
N/A
Mark II
Non-Display
25
Display-Equipped
Communications
EX2
N/A
Mark II
Non-Display
26
N/A
N/A
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
45
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Comm TOF Commands
Continuous Label Length
Control Codes
Cut Behind
Cutter Equipped
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
Command
Equivalent
CT
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Display-Equipped
Communications
N/A
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
EX2
N/A
Mark II
Non-Display
12
Display-Equipped
Communications
CL
CC
CB
0 – 9999
S, 1, 2
1/100 in.
S = Standard,
1 = Alternate,
2 = Alternate-2
<STX>c
N/A
Mark II
Non-Display
11
EX2
N/A
<STX>KD
N/A
0–9
Queued label count
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
A/Y, E, N/D
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
A, E/Y, N
A = Auto,
E or Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
CE
<STX>V
EX2
N/A
(continued)
46
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Darkness
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
DK
1 – 64
N/A
D, G
Default Module
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
Display-Equipped
Print Control
N/A
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
System Settings
Module Letter
DM
A, B
Command
Equivalent
<STX>X
EX2
[2]
N/A
Delay Rate
(Test Labels)
DR
0 – 120
Seconds
Display-Equipped
Diagnostics
N/A
Disable Symbol Set
Selection
NS
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
EX2
N/A
N/A
AA – ZZ, printer
resident symbol set
System Settings
DS
2-Byte alpha
character
Display-Equipped
Double Byte Symbol Set
EX2
N/A
300/400/600 DPI
Display-Equipped
System Settings
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
DPI Emulation
DE
200, 300,
400, 600
Dots per inch
Empty Sensor Level
EV
0 – 255
N/A
<STX>y,
ySxx
N/A
N/A
EX2
N/A
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
47
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
Command
Equivalent
N/A
N/A
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
N/A
Display-Equipped
Communications
Display-Equipped
End Character
EN
D
N/A
EX2
End Of Print
EP
1, 2, 3, 4
1 = Low Pulse,
2 = High Pulse,
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
ESC Sequences
ES
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Fault Handling
Feed Speed
FH
SS or sS
L, D, R, B, 3
Alpha
character
See Table 5-2.
Model specific
ranges;
see Appendix L.
N/A
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
System Settings
EX2
N/A
Mark II
Non-Display
24
Display-Equipped
Print Control
N/A
Sa
(continued)
48
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Feedback Mode
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
FM
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
Display-Equipped
Communications
<STX>a
EX2
Font Emulation
Format Attributes
Gain Reflective Value
Gap / Mark Value
GPIO Equipped
FE
FA
GR
GM
GE
0, 1, 2
X, O, T
0 – 255
0 – 255
A, V, N, 2
N/A
0 = No Substitution
1 = Sub CG Times
SA0
2 = Sub User S50
Display-Equipped
X = XOR,
O = Opaque,
T = Transparent
Display-Equipped
System Settings
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
N/A
N/A
EX2
An
N/A
N/A
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
N/A
A = Applicator,
V = Verifier,
N = Disabled,
A = Applicator2
Command
Equivalent
N/A
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
EX2
N/A
Mark II
Non-Display
23
N/A
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
49
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
GPIO Error on Pause
GPIO Slew
Parameter
Pneumonic
GP
GS
Head Bias
HB
Head Cleaning
HC
Heat
Host Timeout
HE
HT
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
Command
Equivalent
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Display-Equipped
with a Type 2
Applicator
Interface Card
Printer Options
N/A
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
0–4
0 = Standard,
1 = Low Pulse,
2 = High Pulse,
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
L, R
L = Leftmost dot is
zero,
R = Rightmost dot is
zero
0 – 9999
Inches (or
centimeters)
multiplied by 1000
0 – 30
1 – 60
N/A
N/A
EX2
N/A
A-Class
System Settings
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
N/A
N/A
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Print Control
EX2
N/A
Mark II
Non-Display
21
Display-Equipped
Communications
Seconds
Hnn
N/A
EX2
N/A
(continued)
50
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Ignore Control Codes
Ignore Distances
Imaging Mode
Input Mode
Internal Module
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Display-Equipped
Communications
1, 0
1 = Enabled,
0 = Disabled
EX2
N/A
1, 0
1 = Enabled,
0 = Disabled
Non-Display
N/A
Display-Equipped
System Settings
EX2
N/A
Mark II
Non-Display
22
Display-Equipped
System Settings
EX2
N/A
Mark II
Non-Display
19
Display-Equipped
System Settings
Mark II
Non-Display
15
N/A
IC
IE
IL
EM
IM
M, S
0, 1, 3, 7, 9
100 – up to
max.
available; see
Appendix K
M = Multiple label,
S = Single label
0 = DPL,
1 = Line,
3 = PL-Z,
7 = PL-B,
9 = Auto
Kbytes
Command
Equivalent
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
51
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Label Alignment
LA
Label Rotation
Label Store
Label Width
Language Select
Legacy Emulation
Value /
Range
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
EX2
N/A
Mark II
Non-Display
17
Command
Equivalent
N, A, Y
See Table 5-3.
LR
Y, N
Y = Rotate 180
N = None
Display-Equipped
System Settings
N/A
LM
F, S
F = Fields,
S = States & Fields
Display-Equipped
System Settings
N/A
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
LW
LS
0075 – head
width; see
Appendix K
N/A
13
EX2
N/A
<STX>KW
N/A
Display-Equipped
System Settings
N, A, P, L
N = None,
A = Allegro,
P = Prodigy,
L = Prodigy Plus,
M = Prodigy Max
X = XL
Display-Equipped
System Settings
EX2
N/A
Mark II
Non-Display
20
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
0 – 255
N/A
Mark II
Non-Display
Language Name
LE
MV
1/100 inch
String
N, A, P, L, M
Mark Value
Units /
Interpretation
N/A
N/A
N/A
EX2
N/A
(continued)
52
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
Command
Equivalent
Maximum Length Ignore
SM
0, 1
0=
Normal processing,
1 = Ignore
Display-Equipped
Communications
N/A
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
Maximum Length
Media Type
ML
MT
Menu Mode
MM
Module Command
MCC
0 – 9999
D, T
U, A
1/100 inch
D = Direct,
T = Thermal Transfer
U = User,
A = Advanced
Z, G
Network Setup
NT
<STX>M
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
Mark II
Non-Display
1
EX2
N/A
<STX>KD
Display-Equipped
System Settings
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Display-Equipped
See Table 5-4.
B
EX2
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, I, m, N,
P, S, T, U, W,
w, X, Y, Z
Display-Equipped
See Table 5-5.
EX2
No Reprint
NR
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
EX2
N/A
N/A
Option Feedback
OF
D, Rx, S
See Table 5-6.
Display-Equipped
Communications
N/A
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
53
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Paper Empty
Paper Value
Parallel Direction
Parameter
Pneumonic
PO
PV
PP
Password Set
PW
Pause Mode
PM
Peel Mode
PE
Value /
Range
0 – 9999
0 – 255
xz
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
1/100 inch
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
N/A
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Communications
See Table 5-7.
Four characters
(or, if security is
enabled then eight
characters).
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Command
Equivalent
N/A
N/A
A – Z,
0–9
Y, N
Applicable
Printer Type
N/A
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
System Settings
Display-Equipped
System Settings
N/A
<STX>J
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
System Settings
N/A
EX2
N/A
(continued)
54
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Present Adjust
[1]
Parameter
Pneumonic
PA
Present Adjust Fine
Tune
PJ
Present Distance
PD
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
xxx dots
Model specific;
see Appendix K,
and Present Adjust
Fine Tune.
+ / – dots
0 – 400
Dots (model
specific),
see Appendix K.
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
Display-Equipped
Print Control
EX2
N/A
Mark II
Non-Display
8
Display-Equipped
Print Control
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Print Control
<STX>Kf
EX2
A/Y, E, N/D
Present Sensor
Equipped
PS
A, Y, N
Print Contrast
Printer Level
PC
PL
0 – 64
000000 –
FFFFFF
A = Auto,
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
N/A
N/A
1/100 inch
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled
Command
Equivalent
[3]
N/A
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
Mark II
Non-Display
3
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Print Control
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
System Settings
<STX>V
N/A
<STX>V,
<STX>KD
N/A
Hex Codes
N/A
EX2
N/A
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
55
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Print Speed
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
Alpha
character
Model specific
ranges; see
Appendix L.
Display-Equipped
Print Control
pS
EX2
N/A
Q, K
N/A
All
Configuration Label
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
EX2
N/A
Query Configuration
QQ
Reflective Paper Value
RV
0 – 255
Command
Equivalent
Pa
N/A
N/A
N/A
Retract Delay
RW
1 – 255
Specified value times
ten milliseconds
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
N/A
Rewinder Adjust
RR
-xx, +yy
Applied torque,
where -30 to +15 is
the valid range.
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
N/A
Rewinder Equipped
RM
A/Y, E, N/D
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
N/A
RFID Configuration
RI
M, A, D, S, L,
R, W, E, P, T,
N, U, V
See Table 5-8.
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
N/A
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
Ribbon Low Diameter
RL
100 – 200
1/100 in.
N/A
EX2
N/A
(continued)
56
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
Command
Equivalent
Ribbon Low Pause
RP
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
N/A
Ribbon Low Signal
RS
3, 4
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
Display-Equipped
Print Options
N/A
Ribbon Saver Enable
RE
A/Y, E, N/D
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
<STX>R
Display-Equipped
Print Control
xxxx dots
Model specific; see
Appendix K,
and Row Adjust Fine
Tune
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Row Adjust
[1]
Row Adjust Fine Tune
Row Offset
SOP Adjust
[1]
SOP Emulation
RA
RF
+ / – dots
Resolution specific;
see Appendix K.
N/A
Mark II
Non-Display
6
Display-Equipped
Printer Control
N/A
EX2
N/A
RO
0 – 9999
1/100 in.
Display-Equipped
Print Control
Rnnnn
SA
0 – 255
(128
nominal)
N/A,
see Row Adjust Fine
Tune
EX2
N/A
<STX>O
Display-Equipped
System Settings
A, L, P, D
A = Allegro,
L = Prodigy Plus,
P = Prodigy,
D = Disable
SE
N/A
EX2
N/A
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
57
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Save As Filename
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
SF
Alphanumeric
string
Up to 16 characters
100 – 8192
Scalable Font Cache
Kbytes
SC
0 – 128
4 Kbytes
(0 = disabled)
0 – 9999
Kbytes
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
Command
Equivalent
Display-Equipped
System Settings
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
System Settings
Mark II
Non-Display
14
EX2
N/A
<STX>KS
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Display-Equipped
Scalable Heap
SH
EX2
Scanner Configuration
SN
C, H, M,
D, B, V
See Table 5-11.
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
N/A
Security Lock
Sl
N, Y, T
See Table 5-9.
Display-Equipped
System Settings
N/A
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
Sensor Gain Value
SG
EX2
N/A
0 – 32
N/A
N/A
(continued)
58
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Sensor Type
Serial Port
Single Byte Symbol Set
Parameter
Pneumonic
ST
SP
AS
Value /
Range
G, C, R
xyz
2-Byte alpha
character
Units /
Interpretation
G = Gap (edge),
C = Continuous,
R = Reflective
See Table 5-12.
AA – ZZ, printer
resident symbol set
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
Mark II
Non-Display
2
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Communications
Mark II
Non-Display
9 & 10
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
System Settings
Command
Equivalent
<STX>e,
<STX>r,
<STX>c
<STX>KD
N/A
<STX>KD
<STX>y,
ySxx
EX2
N/A
Slew Speed
FS
Alpha
character
Model specific
ranges; see Appendix
L.
GPIO-Equipped
Print Control
<STX>KZSx
Software Switch
SV
Y, N
Y = Processed
N = Ignored
Display-Equipped
Communications
N/A
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
59
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Start of Print
Stop Location
TOF Precedence
Unit of Measure
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
Command
Equivalent
EQ
3, 4
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
N/A
EX2
N/A
SL
A, H, P,
C, T, N
See Table 5-10.
Mark II
Non-Display
16
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
TP
UM
M, I
M = Metric,
I = Imperial
N/A
Display-Equipped
N/A
N/A
EX2
Display-Equipped
System Settings
EX2
N/A
Mark II
Non-Display
5
<STX>m,
<STX>n
Display-Equipped
User Terminator
UT
ON
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer Options
<STX>KV
EX2
Verifier Equipped
VE
A/Y, E, N/D
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled
Display-Equipped
(continued)
60
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item (or
Number) Equivalent
Command
Equivalent
VT
A, B, C, D
Reserved for future
use
Display-Equipped
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Verifier Type
WiFi Setup
WE
A, C, F, I, L,
M, N, P, R, T,
V, X
Display-Equipped
See Table 5-13.
EX2
Display-Equipped
WiFi Security
WS
A, K, S,
L, P, U
See Table 5-14.
EX2
1. Commands are provided for backward compatibility on EX2. The KcQQQ command will respond with the new command equivalent; see
associated new commands.
2. The EX2 will accept display-equipped model module IDs (D & G) as command parameters for upward compatibility; however, query
commands will result in printer responses with module IDs that are Non-Display compatible, providing backward compatibility.
3. Present distance changes for EX2 will only be accepted if the Stop Location (SL) is set to “Host.”
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
61
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Overviews
(AL) Alignment Length – This command, critical for small labels when Label
Alignment is set to YES, allows a length (measured from leading edge to leading
edge of two successive labels) to be entered. The measured length must be provided
to the nearest hundredth of an inch. For very small labels, errors of 0.01” can result
in noticeable print variations on the labels between the media sensor and the print
head. The number of labels that can be fit between the Media Sensor and the print
head will magnify any error in label alignment length. Errors in measurement are
more favorable on the low side rather than the high side.
Non-Display models: The printer will verify the label position using the provided
Alignment Length before printing the first label after power-up.
(AS) Single Byte Symbol Set – This command allows for a default single-byte
symbol set. See <STX>y or ySxx for command details.
(BA) Backup After Print – This command determines the timing of the label back
up positioning when the present distance is set and the GPIO option or Present
Sensor option (including Peel and Present) is enabled. When enabled, the printer
immediately backs up the label after the applicator-issued start of print signal is
received or the label is removed, resulting in faster throughput. If disabled, the
printer will not initiate repositioning until the next label is ready to print (may help
prevent the curling of the label edge).
(BD) Backup Delay – This command sets a time delay for the retraction of a
presented label in one-fiftieth (1/50) of a second increments.
(BL) Backup Label – This command determines the timing of reverse label motion
when the I-Class GPIO option is installed and enabled; see Appendix J for signal
details.
(BP) British Pound – This command, when enabled, will automatically switch from
the Number symbol (#) found at 0x23 (default PC-850 Multilingual Symbol Set) to
the British Pound symbol (£) at 0x9C.
(BS or bS) Backup Speed – This command controls the rate of label movement
during backup positioning for start of print, cutting or present distance; see Appendix
C for available speed ranges.
62
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(BZ) Buzzer Enable – This command controls the audible signaling device that
acknowledges User Interface entries and, if enabled, sounds printer warning and
fault conditions.
(CA) Column Adjust – This command fine-tunes the Column Offset setting by
shifting both the horizontal start of print position and the Label Width termination
point to the right in dots (see Appendix K) to compensate for slight mechanical
differences sometimes evident when multiple printers share label formats. Note that
the EX2 accepts this command for backward compatibility only, limited in range (28228). The <STX>KcQQQ response will show the Column Adjust Fine Tune (CF)
equivalent value.
(CB) Cut Behind – This command allows the printer to queue a specified number of
small labels before a cut is performed to increase throughput.
(CC) Control Codes – This command, depending upon printer type, allows a
change to the prefix of the software commands interpreted by the printer:
Value
Units /
Interpretation
S
Standard Codes
Hex 01 = SOH command; Hex 02 = STX command; countby = ^; Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x0D = Carriage Return
1
Alternate Codes
Hex 5E = SOH command; Hex 7E = STX command; countby = @; Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x0D = Carriage Return
2
Alternate Codes 2
Hex 5E = SOH command; Hex 7E = STX command; countby = @; Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x7C = Carriage Return
Control Code Definition
(CE) Cutter Equipped – This command allows the printer to sense the cutter option.
‘A’ - automatically senses device presence; if undetected, no error is generated. ‘E’ enables the device, where its presence must be detected; otherwise, a fault is
generated. ‘N’ - disables device detection. One of these values is returned in response
to <STX>KcQQQ. Note that alternate values are accepted for backward compatibility as
follows: For display-equipped models ‘Y’ is equivalent to ‘A’; and, for non-display
models ‘Y’ is equivalent to ‘E’.
(CF) Column Adjust Fine Tune – This command fine-tunes the Column Offset
setting by shifting both the horizontal start of print position and the Label Width
termination point to the right in dots (see Appendix K) to compensate for slight
mechanical differences sometimes evident when multiple printers share label
formats.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
63
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(CH) Communicated Heat Commands – This command causes the printer to
ignore DPL Heat commands; instead, the Heat value is controlled via the menu
setting.
(CL) Continuous Label Length – See <STX>c for command details.
(CO) Column Offset – See Cnnnn for command details.
(CS) Communicated Speed Commands – This command causes the printer to
ignore DPL speed commands; instead, speed values are controlled via the menu
setting.
(CT) Communicated TOF Commands – This command causes the printer to
ignore DPL TOF (Gap, Continuous, and Reflective) commands; instead, the sensor
type is controlled via the menu setting.
(DE) DPI Emulation – This command allows printers with higher resolutions to
emulate lower print resolutions, as follows:
•
600 DPI can emulate 300 and 203 DPI resolutions; and,
•
400 DPI can emulate a 203 DPI resolution.
(DK) Darkness – This command adjusts the length of the print head strobe to finetune the HEAT setting.
(DM) Default Module – See <STX>X for command details.
(DR) Delay Rate – This command sets the number of minutes to delay between
multiple batch printings of Quick Test Labels.
(DS) Double Byte Symbol Set – See <STX>y or ySxx for command details.
64
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(EM) Input Mode – This command determines the data processing mode:
Value
Interpretation
Input Mode Interpretation
0
DPL
Character strings are parsed for standard DPL processing.
1
Line
No parsing occurs; instead, each carriage return (<CR>)
terminated data line is printed according to a stored template
(see Appendix S).
3
PL-Z
Character strings are parsed for PL-Z processing, applicable
only if the appropriate firmware is installed, as indicated by a
“Z” in the version string (except for H-Class and M-Class
Mark II which is standard).
7
PL-B
Character strings are parsed for PL-B processing, applicable
only if the appropriate firmware is installed, as indicated by a
“B” in the version string.
Character strings are automatically parsed and processed
according to the identified language.
9
Auto
A clean file is required, where extra characters at the
beginning may cause the language to be unrecognized.
(If not clean, the appropriate Input Mode must be
selected for proper printing.)
(EN) End Character – This command terminates a <STX>Kc string.
(EP) End of Print – This command defines the programmable signal output that
signifies the End of Print (EOP) process:
Value
Units
1
Low Pulse
Outputs a low pulse (approximately 30 milliseconds long)
following printing.
2
High Pulse
Outputs a high pulse (approximately 30 milliseconds long)
following printing.
3
Active Low
Outputs a logic low (zero) following printing.
4
Active High
Outputs a logic high (one) following printing.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
End of Print Interpretation
65
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(EQ) Start of Print – This command defines the type of programmable signal input
required to control the Start of Print (SOP) process:
Value
Units
Start of Print Interpretation
3
Active Low
SOP signal must go low for at least 50 milliseconds to initiate
printing.
4
Active High
SOP signal must go high for at least 50 milliseconds to
initiate printing.
(ES) ESC Sequences – This command allows data containing invalid ESC control
code sequences to be processed (helpful because some systems send a “banner” to
the printer). When set to ‘Disabled,’ ESC sequences are ignored and the data is
processed. Bitmapped font downloads are disabled in this mode.
(EV) Empty Sensor Level – This command sets threshold value for the ‘Empty’
media sensor parameter.
(FA) Format Attribute – See the “An” (in Label Formatting Command Functions)
command for details.
(FE) Font Emulation –This command allows font substitution for all Datamax
internal fonts, allowing a new default font to be defined without changing the host
DPL data streams. Selecting a default font that supports a desired character set
could match with third party software to print native characters without modifying
the PC drivers. In other words, match the PC font with the Printer Font then no
interpretation would be required by driver or printer. Depending on host drivers, the
user may have to disable Symbol Set commands and modify the Default Symbol set.
66
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(FH) Fault Handling – This command determines the level of user intervention and
the disposition of the label being printed when a fault condition (ribbon out, media
out, etc.) occurs.
Value
Units /
Interpretation
Interaction Level,
where:
0 = No Reprint;
1 = Standard;
and,
Selection / Definition
In No Reprint Mode (0), printing stops and a fault message
is displayed. After the problem is corrected, the FEED Key
must be pressed to clear the fault. The label in process is
not reprinted.
In Standard Mode (1), printing stops and a fault message
is displayed. After the problem is corrected, the FEED Key
must be pressed to clear the fault. The label in process is
reprinted.
In Void and Retry Mode (2), depending upon the RETRY
COUNT, one of the following actions when faulted:
• If the Retry Count has not been exceeded, ‘VOID’ is
printed on the label in process and reprinting occurs
automatically;
L
• If the Retry Count has been exceeded, printing stops
2 = Void and Retry
and a fault message is displayed. After the problem is
corrected, the FEED Key must be pressed to clear the
fault. The label in process is reprinted; or,
• If the CANCEL Key is pressed, the operator now has the
option of canceling the reprint. To allow reprinting, press
the ESCAPE Key; or, to cancel reprinting, press the
ENTER Key (and, the entire label batch will be cancelled
by pressing the ENTER Key again).
VOID will not be printed when insufficient text space
exists (see VOID DISTANCE, below) or if the fault
occurs after the label reaches its Present Distance
at, or above, the TOF.
Void Distance
(.10 - 2.00)
D
Sets the distance (.10 - 2.00) to backup the faulted label to
print ‘VOID’ on its trailing edge, which also indirectly
establishes the font size of the void message.
Increases throughput when bar codes reside near the
trailing edge of the label (in the direction of FEED).
• If unreadable, the fault will occur after the next
3
Delayed Scan Fault
label prints.
• The label immediately following a faulted label is
not scanned for errors.
• VOID AND RETRY and REPRINT are automatically
disabled; the job can only be cancelled.
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
67
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Value
Units /
Interpretation
Selection / Definition
R
Retry Count
(0 – 3)
Establishes the number of times a reprint will be attempted
when using the RFID or Scanner option; if the last label
printed in this count has been voided, a fault will be
declared.
B
Enable / Disable
Y, N
Retract from presented distance prior to feed-clear motion.
This option is intended for use with applicator equipment
that may require certain GPIO signals for proper operation.
Table 5-2: Fault Handling Command
Example: <STX>KcFHD112<CR>
The example above configures the printer to back up and print a one-inch “VOID”
message on a faulted label; if two successive faults occur during the printing of that
label, then the FEED Key must be pressed to clear the fault.
(FM) Feedback Mode – See <STX>a for command details.
(FS) Slew Speed – This command controls the rate of label movement between
printing areas when the GPIO port is used; see Appendix L for ranges.
(GE) GPIO Equipped – This command is used to interface the printer to external
controlling devices (see Appendix J):
Value
Units /
Interpretation
A
Applicator
N
Disabled
V
Verifier
GPIO Enable Definition
Enables the GPIO Port for a standard applicator mode, deasserting DRDY as soon as last label starts printing,
allowing FEED any time, and not de-asserting DRDY when
PAUSED.
Disables the GPIO Port.
Enables the GPIO Port for a bar code verifier.
Enables the GPIO Port for alternate mode timing and
functionality, corresponding to other applicator systems,
with the following major differences from standard mode:
2
Applicator2
• Data Ready (DRDY) is extended when printing the last
•
68
label, overlapping the End Of Print (EOP) signal by about
1 msec; and,
PAUSE or FAULT de-asserts the DRDY signal and inhibits
the FEED operation.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(GM) Gap / Mark Value – This command sets threshold value for the media
sensor’s ‘gap / mark’ parameter.
(GP) GPIO Pause on Error – This command enables or disables the printer from
sending a service required fault on GPIO output (Applicator Interface CCA, Type 2).
(GR) Gain Reflective Value – This command sets the sensitivity of the reflective
media sensor.
(GS) GPIO Slew – This command sets the GPIO slew function and control:
Value
Slew Interpretation
0
Standard (Active Low)
1
Low Pulse *
2
High Pulse *
3
Slews while low (Active Low)
4
Slews while high (Active High)
* Pulse must be at least 60 milliseconds in length; functions as if pressing the Feed Key,
clearing alarms and advancing media.
(HB) Head Bias – This command instructs the printer to switch the dot zero
position, as viewed from the label exit. When dot zero occupies the left-most location
on the print head then printing is left justified; and, when dot zero occupies the
right-most location, printing is right justified.
(HC) Head Cleaning – This command controls the print head cleaning routine. The
entered value specifies the inch (or centimeter) count to reach before prompting a
print head cleaning. If the number specified is exceeded three times, the printer will
fault until cleaning is initiated.
The number specified is multiplied by one thousand, and zero disables this function.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
69
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(HE) Heat – See Hnn for command details.
(HT) Host Timeout – This command controls the number of seconds a
communications port must be idle before the printer will process data from a
different port or use a different parsing method. The value is also used to “timeout”
an image / label format download (i.e., if, at any time, data flow stops before a
complete label format is received, the data will be ignored).
(IC) Ignore Control Codes – This command allows the user to remove control
codes (< 20 Hex) in the data field. The selected line terminator is processed. When
enabled, DPL Control Code (SOH, STX, CR, ESC, and ^) characters are removed
from the data string. (Note that some fonts do have printable characters in this
range and they will not be printed when enabled.)
(IE) Ignore Distances – This command, when enabled, prevents <STX>O
processing that will change the start of print position.
(IL) Imaging Mode – This command instructs the printer whether to pre-image the
label format:
Value
M
S
Units /
Interpretation
Multiple Label
Single Label
Imaging Mode Definition
The printer images multiple labels as memory permits,
achieving the fastest throughput; however, if timestamping, the time will reflect the moment the label is
imaged rather than when actually printed.
The printer images the next label only after the
previous label has been successfully printed. Single
processing provides time-stamps that are more
accurate, but it slows label throughput time.
(IM) Internal Module – This command sets the number of 1K blocks (or 4K blocks
for Non-Display models; see the <STX>KM command) allocated for Module D.
70
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(LA) Label Alignment – This command prevents labels with lengths that are less
than the distance between the print head and the Media Sensor from being wasted at
power-up. See the appropriate Operator’s Manual for specific information. Unless
otherwise noted, the following information pertains to all Non-Display models:
Value &
Mode
Media Type
N=
Disabled
6.5-inch and
greater (≥ 16.51
cm) die-cut,
notched, reflective,
continuous, and
multiple form
lengths.
Description / Operation
When disabled, Non-Display models begin printing at
the current location, unless equipped with RTC (Real
Time Clock); see note below.
The EX2 assumes the label position has not moved
while power was off and that no system changes have
occurred.
In auto mode, the printer will verify the label position
using the provided Alignment Length before printing
the first label after power-up.
A=
Auto
6.5-inch or less
(≤16.51 cm)
die-cut, notched,
and reflective
Press and hold the FEED Key four seconds so the
printer will measure the length of the label.
The EX2 will only measure the label length when new
label stock is loaded.
When enabled, the printer will verify the label position
using the provided Alignment Length before printing
the first label after power-up.
Y=
Enabled
Specify the Label Alignment Length using the
<STX>KcAL command, or the Setup Menu.
Table 5-3: Label Alignment Command
The Real Time Clock (RTC) option allows the position-state of the label to be stored,
thus eliminating the need for an alignment prior to the printing of the first label
(assuming the label position has not moved while AC power was removed). If the
label stock has been changed then a Forced Alignment (press and hold the FEED Key
4 seconds) is recommended.
(LE) Legacy Emulation – This command enables the <STX>O and <STX>f print
positioning commands to allow backward compatibility with label formats that were
designed for the Allegro® Prodigy®, and Prodigy Plus® (If the printer is DisplayEquipped, also Prodigy Max® emulation).
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
71
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(LR) Label Rotation – This command sets label rotation, allowing formats to be
flipped 180 degrees.
(LS) Language Select – This command selects the language for the menu system
messages and configuration label. Only languages that are resident will be available.
(LM) Label Store – This command selects the level of stored format recall to
include the label-formatting command fields, or the label-formatting command fields
and the printer state.
(LW) Label Width – This command sets the maximum limit for the printable width.
Objects extending beyond this limit will NOT print; see Appendix K. (For Non-Display
models also see the <STX>KW command.)
The EX2 requires this command prior to the start of the label format command
(<STX>L).
(MCC) Module Command – This command adjusts the size of Flash module on the
optional Expansion Card according to the table below (see Appendix K for
appropriate module details):
Value
Module Command Units / Interpretation
Zxx
Where xx =
Size: 1 – 7 Mbytes. This is the amount to be allocated to
Module Z; any remaining memory will be allocated to Module F.
Gxx
Where xx =
Size: 1 – 56, in 128 Kbytes blocks. This is the amount to be
allocated to Module G; any remaining memory will be allocated
to Module X.
Table 5-4: Module Command
(ML) Maximum (Label) Length – See <STX>M for command details.
72
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(MM) Menu Mode – This command sets the menu access level of the printer –
where User is a basic listing of menu settings and controls, and Advanced is a full
menu listing.
(MT) Media Type – This command selects the printing method: Direct Thermal for
use with heat sensitive media or Thermal Transfer for use with media requiring a
ribbon to create an image. (For Non-Display models also see the <STX>KD
command.)
(MV) Mark Value – This command sets threshold value for the reflective media
sensor’s ‘mark’ parameter.
(NT) Network Setup – This command configures the printer for an Ethernet
connection.
Value
Parameter
A
x
Interpretation
Is the transmission interval for
Gratuitous ARP, where:
Default Value*
0
x = The interval, 0 – 2048, in minutes
Is Network Bios Name, where:
B
y
y = Up to 16 alphanumeric characters,
no spaces
DMX_[and the last
3 octets (in
hexadecimal) of
the MACM (or
MACO) Address]
Transmits the printer’s Wired network
communication capability, where x:
C
x
0 = Advertises the DUPLEX CAPABILITY
set value.
0
1 = Advertises all possibilities for
DUPLEX CAPABILITY.
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
73
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Value
Parameter
D
a
Interpretation
Default Value*
Is Discovery (DHCP or Bootp), where a:
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Is the communication capability for the
Wired network, where x:
E
x
F
a
G
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
I
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
m
x
N
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
P
xxxx
S
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
T
a
U
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
w
a
0
1
2
3
4
= Auto-Negotiate
= 10Base-T, Half Duplex
= 10Base-T, Full Duplex
= 100Base-T, Half Duplex
= 100Base-T, Full Duplex
0
Is FTP enable, where a:
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Is the Gateway Address, where:
x = 0 to 9
Is the IP Address, where:
000.000.000.000
192.168.010.026
x = 0 to 9
Is MTU packet size, where:
x = a range, 512 – 65515, in bytes
Is the SNMP Trap Address, where:
x = 0 to 9
Is the destination Port Number, where:
x = 0 to 9
Is the Subnet Mask, where:
x = 0 to 9
1500
000.000.000.000
9100
255.255.255.000
Is SNMP enable, where a:
Y
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Is the WINS2 Address, where:
x = 0 to 9
000.000.000.000
Is WiFi enable, where a:
Y = Enable
N = Disable
N
(continued)
74
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Value
Parameter
W
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
X
a
Y
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Z
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Interpretation
Is the WINS1 Address, where:
x = 0 to 9
Default Value*
000.000.000.000
Is Telnet enable, where a:
N
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Is the DNS1 Address, where:
x = 0 to 9
Is the DNS2 Address, where:
x = 0 to 9
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
* Prior to the introduction of WiFi, 192.0.0.192 was the IP default value and the Subnet
Mask was 0.0.0.0.
Table 5-5: Network Setup
Each octet must be zero-filled to be properly interpreted (e.g., an IP Address of
10.12.0.243 must be sent to the printer as 010.012.000.243).
Example:
<STX>KcNTI010.012.000.243;NTS255.255.000.000;NTG010.012.254.254;NTDN;<CR>
The command string above is typical of a network setup string (where the values
meanings are shown in the following table). This configuration setup command string
may be included with any other Kc sub-commands.
Sub-commands and Values
Interpretation
NTI010.012.000.243
IP Address: 10.12.0.243
NTS255.255.000.000
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
NTG010.012.254.254
Gateway Address: 10.12.254.254
NTDN
DHCP is disabled
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
75
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(NR) No Reprint – This command controls the label reprint function following the
correction of a fault condition. Upon detection of a fault (ribbon out, paper out, etc.),
printing stops and a fault indicator is illuminated. After the problem is corrected, the
FEED Key must be pressed to clear the fault and resume normal operation. When
enabled, the label in process is not reprinted.
(NS) Disable Symbol Set Selection – This command prevents the <STX>y and y
commands from changing the default single-byte symbol set. When enabled, DPL
Symbol Set commands are ignored.
When enabled, the only way to change the current symbol set is with the <STX>KcAS
command.
(OF) Option Feedback Mode – This command configures the printer to output the
status of the RFID or Scanner option to the active port, as follows.
Value
Option Feedback Mode Units / Interpretation
D
D, Rx, S
=
Rx =
S
=
Disable
RFID Enable, where x is the response format:
A = ASCII
H = Hexadecimal
Scanner Enable
Table 5-6: Option Feedback Command
Not supported on the I-4208 printer.
Once enabled, the printer will report information about the results of the last label
printed. One response per label is returned to the host (this includes each voided and
retried label). The format and contents of the returned information is as follows:
76
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Response format: <A;B;C;D;E;F>[CR]
Where:
A
- Device type:
R = RFID
S = Scanner
B
- Resulting status:
C = entire label complete
F = faulted (failed) label
U = unknown
C
- The number of expected reads for bar codes or tags,
given in two characters.
D
- The number of good reads for bar codes or tags, given in
two characters.
E
- The printer’s internal Job Identifier and Sub Job
Identifier, given in four characters each.
F
- The data read, delimited with semicolons (;) if multiple
reads.
RFID response sample differences: Since RFID commands vary in operation, the
data returned also differs. Write commands return entire tag data; Write/Verify
commands return the data written; and, Read commands return data and length
requested in the specified format. (See Appendix S for a listing of commands.)
Write response example:
<R;C;00;00;0013:0001>[CR]
Write/Verify hexadecimal response example:
<R;C;01;01;0012:0001;446174616D61782077726974657320524649442062657374>
[CR]
Read hexadecimal response example:
<R;C;01;01;0013:0001;446174616D61782077726974657320524649442062657374>
[CR]
Write/Verify ASCII response example:
<R;C;01;01;0012:0001; Datamax writes RFID best >[CR]
Read ASCII response example:
<R;C;01;01;0013:0001; Datamax writes RFID best >[CR]
Scanner response samples:
A successfully read label example:
<S;C;03;03;0002:0001;DATA1;DATA2;DATA3>[CR]
A failed label, successfully retried:
<S;F;02;01;0002:0001;DATA1>[CR]
<S;C;02;02;0002:0001;DATA1;DATA2>[CR]
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
77
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(PA) Present Adjust – This command fine-tunes the Present Distance setting in
dots to compensate for slight mechanical differences sometimes evident if multiple
printers share label formats. The EX2 accepts this command for backward
compatibility only, limited in range (28-228). <STX>KcQQQ response shows the
Present Adjust Fine Tune (PJ) equivalent value.
(PC) Print Contrast – This command adjusts the relative print edge (gray)
component of the print quality, which allows fine-tuning for specific media/ribbon
mix.
(PD) Present Distance – This command sets the label stop position past the start
of print. When the next label format is received, the printer will automatically
backfeed to the start position. If the present distance is set to zero, the printer will
operate without reversing. (See Stop Location, below).
(PE) Peel Mode – This command, when enabled, specifies that a Feed operation be
prevented when the label is presented and not removed, or if the printer is to wait
for the GPIO start of print signal.
(PJ) Present Adjust Fine Tune – This command fine-tunes the Present Distance
setting in dots to compensate for slight mechanical differences sometimes evident if
multiple printers share label formats.
(PL) Printer Level – This command is used to upgrade the software feature level of
the printer.
(PM) Pause Mode – See <STX>J for command details.
78
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(PO) Paper Empty – This command sets the length of travel before an out of stock
condition is declared.
(PP) Parallel Direction – This command controls the parallel port communications
settings:
Value
Parallel Direction Units / Interpretation
x = Port ID: A or B
xz
z = Direction: U (unidirectional – one-way communication); or,
B (bidirectional – IEEE 1284 back-channel operation).
Table 5-7: Parallel Communications Configuration Command
(PS) Present Sensor Equipped – This command allows the printer to sense the
present sensor option. A (or Y) - automatically senses device presence; if
undetected, no error will be generated. E - enables the device, where its presence
must be detected; otherwise, a fault is generated. N or D - disables device detection.
See <STX>V for command details. (Note that the value range for Non-Display models
is only Y, or N. Also see the <STX>KD command.)
(pS) Print Speed – See P (in Label Formatting Command Functions) for command
details.
(PT) Tear Position – This command sets the label stopping location at the tear
plate on the printer’s cover.
Not recommended for use with non-display models, instead see Stop Location (SL).
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
79
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(PV) Paper Value – This command sets threshold value for the media sensor’s
‘paper’ parameter.
(PW) Password – This command modifies the numeric password required to access
the menu system when security is enabled. If security is enabled, enter the new
password followed by the old password (with no spaces) in this form: XXXXXXXX
(QQ) Configuration Query – This command requires a parameter of either K or Q.
K causes the printer to respond with the Printer Key, used for generating Upgrade
Codes. A parameter value of Q causes the printer to respond with the current
configuration settings. The <STX>Kc response command stream format is sent to the
host computer via the same port as the query containing all parameters controlled
by the <STX>Kc command, and may be used for restoring the printer’s configuration
or for configuring other printers.
(RA) Row Adjust – This command shifts the vertical start of print position (in
dots). Note that the EX2 accepts this command for backward compatibility only,
limited in range (28-228). <STX>KcQQQ response shows the Row Adjust Fine Tune
(RF) equivalent value.
(RE) Ribbon Saver Equipped – This command allows the printer to sense the
ribbon saver option. A (or Y) - automatically senses device presence; if undetected,
no error is generated. E - enables the device, where its presence must be detected;
otherwise, a fault is generated. N or D - disables device detection. See <STX>R for
command details.
(RF) Row Adjust Fine Tune – This command shifts the vertical start of print
position in dots (see Appendix K) upward or downward.
80
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(RI) RFID Configuration – This command configures the optional RFID interface module, as follows:
Value
Units / Interpretation
D = Disable
H = HF
Mn
where n:
RFID Configuration Definition / Function
Disables the RFID module. (“N” is also a valid disabler.)
Enables the RFID module for HF (Securakey).
U = UHF
Enables the RFID module for UHF Class 1 (Alien).
M = UHF
Enables the RFID module for UHF multi-protocol.
AIhh
where hh:
2-Chararacter Hex ID
ALn
and where n:
E = Enable,
D = Disable
DIhh
where hh:
2-Chararacter Hex ID
DLn
and where n:
E = Enable,
D = Disable
Shh
where hh:
2-Chararacter Hex ID
Sets the Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) set, representing the manufacturer’s
code. (HF only)
Lhh
where hh:
2-Chararacter Hex ID
Sets the Lock Code (Alien UHF only)
Rn
where n:
0–9
Wn
where n:
E = Enable,
D = Disable
Allows locking the tag after writing.
En
where n:
E = Enable,
D = Disable
Allows erasures of the tag on error (HF only)
Pxxx
where xxx:
3-digit value
Sets the tag encoding position: A value of 0.00 causes the print position to be
used; or, a value greater than 0 causes the presented position to be used.
(Subject to change.)
Sets the Application Family Identifier (AFI), (HF only)
Allows locking the AFI after writing (HF only)
Sets the Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID), (HF only)
Allows locking the DSFID after writing (HF only)
Sets the number of retries for RFID functions
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
81
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Value
Units / Interpretation
=
=
=
=
=
Tn
where n:
0
1
2
3
4
Nn
where n:
64 = 64-bit
96 = 96-bit
Sets the UHF tag data size (multi-protocol UHF only).
Un
where n:
0
1
2
3
6
7
8
Sets the UHF tag type (multi-protocol UHF only).
Vn
where n:
= a value from -4 to +4
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
*Unavailable for A-Class printers.
ISO 15693
Texas Instruments
Philips
ST Micro LRI 512
ST Micro LRI 64
RFID Configuration Definition / Function
EPC 0
EPC 0+ Matrics
EPC 0+ Impinj
EPC 1
UCODE EPC 1.19*
EM 4022/4222
Gen 2
Establishes the tag type (HF only).
Adjusts the power, in dBmn (multi-protocol UHF only).
Table 5-8: RFID Configuration Set Commands
Example: <STX>KcRIMH;RIA11E;RID22E;RIS04;RIR3;RIWE;RIEE;RIP000<CR>
The above example sets the printer to HF, protect after write AFI 11, protect after write DFSID 22, set EAS Bit (Mfg. Code
0x04), allow 3 tries for each read or write attempt, lock after writing, erase the tag if there is an error, and use a position of
0.00.
82
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(RL) Ribbon Low Diameter – This command sets the threshold for a low ribbon
indication, where nnnn is the diameter in hundredths of inches.
(RM) Rewinder Equipped – This command allows the printer to sense the powered
internal rewind option. A (or Y) - automatically senses device presence; if
undetected, no error is generated. E - enables the device, where its presence must
be detected; otherwise, a fault is generated. N or D - disables device detection.
(RO) Row Offset – See Rnnnn (in Label Formatting Command Functions) for
command details.
(RP) Ribbon Low Pause – This command (when enabled) pauses the printer when
a Ribbon Low Diameter warning is declared; the PAUSE Button must be pressed to
continue printing.
(RR) Rewinder Adjust – This command changes the torque applied by the
powered rewinder, in percentage points of the nominal force, to minimize TOF
registration drift (sometimes evident when using small or narrow media).
(RS) Ribbon Low Signal – This command sets the signal output type for the
Ribbon Low Diameter condition when using the optional GPIO (see Appendix J).
(RV) Reflective Paper Value – This command sets the threshold value for the
reflective media sensor’s paper parameter.
(RW) Retract Delay – This command sets a time delay for the retraction of a
presented label, where the time specified is multiplied by ten milliseconds.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
83
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(SA) SOP Adjust – This command sets the start of print (SOP) location, relative to
the top of form. See <STX>O for command details. The EX2 accepts this command for
backward compatibility only, limited in range (28-228).
(SC) Scalable Cache – This command sets the number of 1K blocks allocated for
the scaleable font engine. Available memory dependent upon model; see Appendix
K. (For non-display models see the <STX>KS command.)
(SE) SOP Emulation – This command enables the <STX>O and <STX>f print
positioning commands to allow backward compatibility with label formats designed
for other printers.
(SF) Save As Filename – This command, which may be sent separately or included
as the last command in an <STX>Kc command string, saves the effective printer
configuration to a file in Flash memory with a .dcm file extension.
(SG) Sensor Gain Value – This command sets the control of the voltage to the LED
emitter of the Media Sensor.
(SH) Scalable Heap – This command sets a working “scratch pad space” in DRAM
for scalable font construction.
(Sl) Security Lock – This command provides the ability to password-protect all
printer settings made through the User Interface, as follows:
Value
Security Function
Nxxxx
Where xxxx is the current password, this disables Menu protection.
Yxxxx
Where xxxx is a new password, this enables Menu protection and sets a new
password.
Txxxx
Where xxxx is a new password, this enables Menu protection, disables the
User Interface Test Button functions, and sets a new password.
Table 5-9: Security Lock Command
84
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(SL) Stop Location – This command sets the label stopping (and in certain cases
the starting) location, as follows:
Value
Stop Location
A
Automatically sets the stop location. Installed options will be ‘auto-sensed’ and
the appropriate stop position will automatically be set. Host commands are
ignored.
H
Sets stop position according to options installed. If no options are installed the
printer sets stop location to the next label’s start of print. Host commands will
override. The stop location (present distance) may be controlled dynamically
by the host using the <STX>f or <STX>Kf commands. This selection has the
same effect as <STX>KD Ignore Host Distance bit value 0.
P
Sets the stop location at approximately two millimeters behind the peel bar
edge, a nominal peel position. The Present Sensor status and this setting are
independent.
C
Sets the stop location to a nominal cut position. For die-cut media, the
position is just following the end of the label. The cutter status and this setting
are independent.
T
Sets the stop location at the tear bar.
N
Sets the stop location to the start of the next label, equivalent to setting the
<STX>KD Ignore Host Distance bit value 1.
Table 5-10: Stop Location Command
(SM) Maximum (Label) Length Ignore – This command controls recognition of
the <STX>M command.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
85
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(SN) Scanner Configuration – This command configures the linear scanner, as
follows:
Values
Scanner Configuration Range / Interpretation
Bar Code Type – Specifies the bar code, using two digits, followed by ‘Y’ (to
enable) or ‘N’ (to disable) the code, where:
B
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
CODE 39
IATA
CODABAR
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5
INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5
CODE 93
CODE 128
MSI/PLESSEY
EAN(13/8)
EAN(13/8)+2
EAN(13/8)+5
UPC(A/E)
UPC(A/E)+2
UPC(A/E)+5
To maximize throughput and decoding integrity, enable only those
symbologies that will be read.
Bar Code Count – Specifies the number of codes to be read, where:
00 – 99 (00 = Auto [variable] mode, counting those codes present)
C
Do not use Auto Mode with bitmapped codes or codes with certain
addendums; see Appendix F.
Min Readable Height – Sets the vertical distance of the code that must have
identical reads to pass, where:
H
1
2
3
4
5
0
=
=
=
=
=
=
1/16
2/16
3/16
1/4
1/2
Disabled (defaults to Redundancy Level, 2x)
The specified distance should not exceed 50% of the measured bar
code height.
Mode – Enables detection of the scanner by the printer, where:
M
A = Auto (automatically senses presence); Y is also a valid enabler.
E = Enabled (if not detected a fault is generated).
D = Disabled (the scanner is disabled); (N is also a valid disabler.)
(continued)
86
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Values
Scanner Configuration Range / Interpretation
Redundancy Level – An alternative data integrity method, where the selected
level sets the number of consecutive, identical decodes required to pass the
bar code. If differing values are read, the count is restarted, where:
V
0 = Auto Mode
1 = read code 1X
2 = read code 2X
3 = read code 3X
4 = read code 4X
5 = read code 5X
6 = read code 6X
7 = read code 8X
8 = read code 10X
9 = read code 12X
A = read code 15X
B = read code 20X
C = read code 25X
D = read code 30X
E = read code 35X
F = read code 40X
G = read code 45X
Depending upon the print speed, higher Redundancy Levels may
cause erroneous failures when scanning multiple or small bar codes.
Table 5-11: Scanner Configuration Set Command
Example: <STX>KcSNC00H4MAB12YV0<CR>
The example above sets the printer to sense the scanner automatically, to read a
variable number of UPC bar codes, and to pass only those codes where a ¼ inch
zone has identical reads.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
87
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(SP) Serial Port – This command configures the serial communication port(s) as
follows:
Value
xyz
Serial Port Range / Interpretation
Where:
x = Port Identifier:
A - Serial A
B - Serial B
y = Function:
P - Handshaking
Protocol
z = Setting
B - both
H - hardware
N - none
S – software
p - Parity
E - even
N - none
O – odd
D - Data Length
7 - eight bits
8 - seven bits
S - Stop Bits
1 - one bit
2 - two bits
xyzz
Where:
x = Port Identifier:
A - Serial A
y = Function:
B - Baud Rate
B - Serial B
zz = Setting:
12 - 1200
24 - 2400
48 - 4800
96 - 9600
19 - 19200
28 - 28800
38 - 38400
Table 5-12: Serial Port Configuration Set Command
For EX2 models the data length, parity, and stop bits are fixed at 8, N, and 1
respectively. And, for Applicator Interface Card-equipped models, this command is
also used to configure the GPIO Auxiliary port (ID always ‘B’).
Example: <STX>KcSPAPB;SPApN;SPAD8;SPAS1;SPAB19<CR>
The example above configures Serial Port A to use hardware and software
handshaking, an eight-bit word, with no parity and one stop bit at 19,200 bits per
second.
88
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(SS or sS) Feed Speed – This command controls the rate of label movement
between printing areas; see Appendix L.
(ST) Sensor Type – See <STX>e (edge) or <STX>r (reflective) for command details.
(For non-display models also see the <STX>KD command.)
(SV) Switch Settings – This command controls recognition of the software switch
setting command <STX>V.
(TB) TOF Bias – This command controls the low-level voltage difference level to
recognize a label ‘gap’ or ‘mark’.
(TD) TOF Delta – This command controls the low-level voltage difference level to
recognize a label ‘gap’ or ‘mark’.
(TG) TOF Gain – This command controls the voltage to the LED emitter of the
Media Sensor.
(TN) No Paper Min – This command sets the media sensor level for the Out of
Stock (OOS) condition.
(TP) TOF Precedence – This command instructs the firmware to stop printing at
the first top of form mark it detects. The default (‘No’) prints all of the data
(traversing the top of form as necessary) then slews to the next TOF.
(UM) Units of Measure – See <STX>m (metric) or <STX>n (imperial) for command
details.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
89
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(UT) User Terminator – This command allows word wrapping of long character
strings of commands to the next line in a file, for the purposes of readability only. In
the <STX>Kc string, the command UTON must fall somewhere before the first line
terminator. The last command needs to be END, followed by a line terminator (see
the <STX>KcEN command for details).
(VE) Verifier Equipped – This command enables the GPIO for a bar code verifier
(see Appendix J). A (or Y) - automatically senses device presence; if undetected, no
error is generated. E - enables the device, where its presence must be detected;
otherwise, a fault is generated. N or D - disables device detection.
(VT) Verifier Type – This command is reserved for future use.
(WE) WiFi Setup – This command configures the printer for a WiFi connection, as
follows:
Value
Parameter
A
y
WiFi Interpretation
Is the SSID (Access Point name),
where:
Default Value
MACR
y = Up to 31 characters, no spaces
C
x
Is the Channel number (Adhoc only,
country dependant), where:
1
x = 1 to 14
F
x
I
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
L
x
Is Enable DHCP Fixed Interval
Transmission, where x:
1 = Fixed
0 = Exponential
Is the IP Address*, where:
x = 0 to 9
Is the DHCP Acquire Time Limit, where:
x = 0 to 255 seconds
0
192.168.010.001
150
(continued)
90
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Value
Parameter
WiFi Interpretation
Default Value
Is the maximum transmission rate,
where x:
M
x
N
y
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
1 Mbps
2 Mbps
5.5 Mbps
11 Mbps
Is the client name, where:
y = Up to 31 characters, no spaces
2
N/A
Is the WEP Access Point Density, where
x:
P
x
R
y
0
0 = Low
1= Medium
2 = High
Is the Region, where:
y = Two-character code; see Appendix T.
US
Is the Mode, where x:
T
x
V
x
X
a
0 = Infrastructure
1 = Adhoc
2 = Unique (SSID = MAC address; and,
WiFi type = Adhoc)
Is the DHCP Retransmit Interval, where:
x = 1 to 64 seconds
2
15
Is MAC Cloning, where a:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
* Each octet must be zero-filled to be properly interpreted (e.g., an IP Address of
10.12.0.243 must be sent to the printer as 010.012.000.243).
Table 5-13 WiFi Setup
Example 1:
<STX>KcNTDN;NTwN;WEI010.012.000.248;WEAEngWAN1;NTI010.012.000.245;NTS25
5.255.000.000;NTG010.012.254.254<CR>
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
91
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(WS) WiFi Security – This command configures WiFi security.
Value
Parameter
WiFi Interpretation
Default Value
Is the WEP Key, where x:
xy
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
WEP
WEP
WEP
WEP
Key
Key
Key
Key
1
2
3
4
1
(See Note 1)
And where y:
Is the Key, up to 26 characters with no spaces.
Is the Security Authentication, where x:
A
x
0 = Auto
1 = Open
2 = Shared
0
Is the WEP Default Key, where x:
K
x
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
WEP
WEP
WEP
WEP
Key
Key
Key
Key
1
2
3
4
1
Is the Security setting, where x:
S
x
L
y
P
y
U
y
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Disabled
WEP 64 Bit
WEP 128 Bit
WPA PSK
WPA LEAP
WPA LEAP 64
WPA LEAP 128
WPA PSK+TKIP 64
WPA PSK+TKIP 128
0
Is the LEAP Password, where y:
See Note 2
Is up to 32 characters.
Is the WPA Passphrase (Preshared Key), where
y:
Is 8 to 63 characters with no spaces; or, 64 hex
characters.
Is the LEAP User ID, where y:
See Note 3
See Note 4
Is up to 32 characters.
1. Default values for WEP Keys is all zeros (whether 10 digit or 26 digits).
2. The LEAP password is 1 to 32 characters and must match the LEAP password assigned
to the LEAP user on the LEAP server. The password cannot contain spaces.
3. The WPA passphrase must match the passphrase on the Access Point.
4. The User ID cannot contain spaces.
Table 5-14 WiFi Security
92
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KD
Database Configuration (Non-Display Models only)
This command, stored in Flash memory for future power-ups, controls the printer’s
environment and operates as a pseudo DIP switch. The <STX>Kc command is
recommended for use over <STX>KD.
Syntax:
<STX>KDwxyz<CR>
Where:
w, x, y, and z are binary values with respective bit settings as
defined in the following table. (Bit 0 is least significant.)
Sample:
<STX>[email protected]@@<CR>
The sample above configures 9600 baud, 8-bit words, no parity,
with direct thermal printing, gap sensing, standard control
characters, and a cutter.
• Ignore Host Distance (see below) disregards <STX>O and <STX>f commands (in case
host software sends values that may be inappropriate). Use the <STX>KD command or
the Setup Menu to enable this feature.
• This command will result in a system reset for the EX2.
<STX>KD
Parameter
Bit
Number
0–2
w
3
4&5
6
7
0
1
2
3
x
4
5
6
7
0&1
2
y
3–5
6
7
0&1
2
z
3–5
6
7
[1]
Selects the values of
Function
Value(s)
0 = 9600, 1 = 600, 2 = 2400,
3 = 19200, 4 = 4800, 5 = 38400,
6 = 1200, 7 = 9600 Test Mode
0 = 8 bits, no parity;
Word Length and Parity
1 = 7 bits, even parity
Unused
Set to 0
Always 1
Set to 1
Always 0
Set to 0
Print Method
0 = direct thermal, 1 = thermal transfer
Present Sensor
0 = not equipped, 1 = equipped
Control Character[1]
0 = standard, 1 = Alternate characters
Cutter
0 = disabled, 1 = enabled
0 = disabled,
Ignore Host Distance
1 = enabled (see note above)
0 = disabled,
Alt-2 Control Codes[1]
1 = Alternate-2 characters
Always 1
Set to 1
Always 0
Set to 0
Sensor Type
0 = gap, 1 = reflective, 2 = continuous
Linerless
0 = not equipped, 1 = equipped
Unused
Set to 0
Always 1
Set to 1
Always 0
Set to 0
Reserved
Set to 0
Reserved
Set to 0
Unused
Set to 0
Always 1
Set to 1
Always 0
Set to 0
the control characters; see Control Codes.
BAUD Rate / Set Test Mode
Table 5-15: Database Configuration Command
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
93
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX Kd
Set File as Factory Default
This command selects the specified file name as the “factory default” configuration. After
execution, subsequent “Select Factory Default” commands will configure the printer to
this file’s configuration using one of the following methods:
•
<STX>KF command;
•
Power-up the printer while pressing the PAUSE and CANCEL Keys; or,
•
Via the menu system SYSTEM SETTINGS / SET FACTORY DEFAULTS entry.
Syntax:
<STX>KdName<CR>
Where:
Name
- The name, up to 16 characters, of the file.
<CR>
- 0x0d terminates the name.
Sample:
<STX>KdPlant1<CR>
The sample above selects the configuration file Plant1 as the
default factory configuration.
STX KE
Character Encoding
This command is provided primarily as a means for users of 7-bit communication and to
embed control characters and extended ASCII characters in their data streams. Any
character in the DPL data stream may be substituted with a delimited two-character
ASCII hexadecimal numeric equivalent. The command allows the delimiting character to
be selected, and the encoding to be enabled or disabled. When character encoding is
enabled, the printer will decode any ASCII hexadecimal numeric pairs following the
delimiter as single-byte values. Character encoding is used where control characters
cannot be transmitted or where control characters within data may prematurely
terminate a label format record. Although the delimiter may be changed at any time
(except within a label format definition), there cannot be more than one defined
delimiter, and character encoding must be disabled with <STX>KEN prior to re-enabling
regardless of any change in the delimiter.
Syntax:
<STX>KEex<CR>
Where:
e
- Y – character encoding enabled
N – character encoding disabled
x
- Delimiter: one ASCII character (Do not include when e = N)
Sample:
94
<STX>KEN
<STX>KEY\
<STX>L<CR>
1u0000001200120[)>\1E\01\1D\...\04\<CR>
E<CR>
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
The sample above disables, and then enables character encoding
with the backslash (\) as the delimiter. A UPS MaxiCode will be
formatted using a data string interpreted as follows: [)>RS01GS...
E
OT<CR> then formatting is terminated.
Character Encoding Syntax: This syntax requires at least two hexadecimal ASCII
digits (0-9, A-F) delimited by the character specified in the <STX>KE command. The
number of hexadecimal digits between the delimiter pair must be even; see notes below.
Syntax:
xaa[bbcc…nn]x
Where:
x
- One byte delimiter, 0 to ff16, leading and trailing.
aa
- 2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each
character – 0-9, A-F
bb
- 2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each
character – 0-9, A-F (optional)
cc
- 2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each
character – 0-9, A-F (optional)
nn
- 2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each byte –
0-9, A-F (optional)
• A delimiter pair with no ASCII hexadecimal pairs between (e.g., \\) will be
interpreted as one byte whose value is that of the delimiting character, allowing the
assigned delimiter to be interpreted as itself rather than as the delimiter.
• A delimited string that contains either a non-valid hexadecimal character (e.g., FX) or
an odd number of bytes will be treated as an illegal string and, therefore, not
correctly decoded.
Character Encoding Examples: In the following partial datastreams it is assumed that
character encoding is enabled and that the selected delimiter, a backslash (\), has been
transmitted to the printer (i.e., <STX>KEY\). In each example, the printer has not
received an unpaired delimiter prior the example.
Partial Sample Data Stream
Interpretation
AB\\CE
5 bytes AB\CE with values 4116, 4216, 5C16, 4316, 4416
\ABCDEF\
3 bytes with values AB16, CD16, and EF16
1A\1A\1A
5 bytes 1A<SUB>1A with values 3116, 4116, 1A16,
3116, 4116. <SUB> represents a single-byte ASCII
control character with value 1A16
Alternate Control Codes with an Alternate Line Terminator: Character Encoding
can also be used with the Alternate Control Character set. Alternate Control Characters
are enabled, depending upon the model, via a Setup Menu or the <STX>KD / <STX>Kc
commands; see Control Codes.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
95
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KF
Select Factory Defaults
This command restores the configuration of the printer to the factory default settings.
These settings may be Datamax default values or the values previously specified by a
configuration file (see <STX>Kd).
Syntax:
<STX>KFn<CR>
Where:
n
- 2 = Returns the factory default settings (and, if saved,
restoring the Factory Setting File).
- 3 = Returns the factory default settings, and clears
Calibration and Custom Adjustments.
Calibration will be required.
STX Kf
Set Present Distance
This command specifies an additional amount to advance the label after printing. This
command has the same effect as the <STX>f command, but specifies a distance to
advance relative to the start of print (<STX>O command) of the next label.
Non-Display Models: The printer Option Control must be set (via the menu) to HOST for
this command to have effect.
Display-Equipped Models: SOP Emulation selection has no effect on this command.
Syntax:
<STX>Kfnnnn<CR>
Where:
nnnn - A four-digit present distance in inches/100 or mm/10.
Sample:
<STX>Kf0100
The sample above represents a one-inch label advance unless in
metric mode (see <STX>m).
96
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KH
Dot Check (H-Class & M-Class Mark II only)
This command specifies dot check operations for the printhead elements.
Syntax:
<STX>KHx<CR>
Where:
x
- Specifies the operation, where:
P = Performs dot check;
A = Returns the most recent dot check and dot
resistance results; and,
B = Returns the most recent dot check failed dot
results.
Sample:
<STX>KHP<CR>
The sample above performs dot check with DOTCHECK and a
progress bar displayed.
Sample:
<STX>KHA<CR>
The sample above returns results from the last dot check for
every element and its resistance up to 1350 ohms [with out of
range (bad or suspect) values indicates as ******], the number
of dots tested, the total number of bad or suspect dots detected
and, the minimum, maximum, and average resistance
and variance:
DOTCHECK RESULTS
DOTS TESTED GOOD 830 OF 832
DOT OHMS
0 1148
1 1148
2 1140
.
.
.
142 1199
143 *****
144 *****
145 1050
.
.
.
830 1116
831 1116
832 1116
TOTAL BAD DOTS:
2
MIN MAX AVG VAR
921 1640 1125 719
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
97
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Sample:
<STX>KHB<CR>
The sample above returns results from the last dot check for
the number of elements tested, the number of the bad or
suspect dot(s), the total number of bad or suspect dots, and the
minimum, maximum, and average resistance and variance:
DOTCHECK RESULTS
DOTS TESTED GOOD 830 OF 832
BAD DOT LIST
143
144
TOTAL BAD DOTS:
MIN
921
STX KJ
MAX
1640
2
AVG VAR
1125 719
Assign Communication Port (MCL Command)
This command assigns a communication port for specific use. When activating MCL, all
ports are assigned to MCL; this command allows changes to that assignment.
Syntax:
<STX>KJpf<CR>
Where:
p
- Port ID: P = Parallel
S = Serial (A)
U = USB
N = Ethernet
L = Wireless
A = Serial (B)
f
- Flag:
Sample:
1 = DPL
0 = MCL
<STX>KJN1
The sample above forces the Ethernet port to bypass MCL and
go directly to DPL.
98
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KI
GPIO Input
This command configures the GPIO input channels of the Applicator Interface Card; see
Appendix J for details.
Syntax:
<STX>KIffnspwww<CR>
Where:
ff
- 2 character function name abbreviation (e.g., PS [Print
Start], I1 [User Input 1], etc).
n
- Pin number, where 1 – 8 is the valid range.
s
- Signal type, where: L = Level; P = Positive Pulse; and N
= Negative Pulse
p
- Polarity, where: 0 = Active Low; and 1 = Active High
www
- 3 character filter pulse width, in milliseconds.
STX Kn
NIC Reset
This command resets the NIC to factory defaults.
Syntax:
<STX>Knx
Where:
x
- Specifies the action, where:
F = Returns the NIC to the factory default settings; or,
H = Reports settings to host (wireless, only).
Default Values
Wired Ethernet*
Default Values
Wireless Ethernet
IP
192.168.010.026
192.168.010.001
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.000
255.255.255.000
Gateway
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
Address
* Prior to introduction of the Wireless Ethernet, 192.0.0.192
was the IP default value and the Subnet Mask was 0.0.0.0.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
99
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KO
GPIO Output
This command configures the GPIO outputs of the Applicator Interface Card; see
Appendix J for details.
100
Syntax:
<STX>KOffnsptd0pw0td1pw1<CR>
Where:
ff
-
2 character function name abbreviation (e.g., LC [Label
Complete], LM [Label Movement], etc).
n
-
Pin number, where 1 – 8 is the valid range.
s
-
Signal type, where: L = Level; P = Positive Pulse; and N
= Negative Pulse
p
-
Polarity, where: 0 = Active Low; and 1 = Active High
td0
-
3 character delay time from function condition “true” to
output signal.
pw0
-
3 character pulse width corresponding to the function
condition becoming “true”. (Ignored for level-type
signals.)
td0
-
3 character delay time from function condition “false” to
output signal.
pw0
-
3 character pulse width corresponding to the function
condition becoming “false”. (Ignored for level-type
signals.)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX Kp
Module Protection
This command controls memory module protection. When “protected”, a module will
ignore format, downloads and delete commands. This command can be useful to add
data to Datamax reserved modules (see Appendix K for a listing of the memory
modules). There are two module types: RAM (volatile) and Flash (non-volatile).
•
RAM - When protected, if power is cycled or if the printer is reset, the module state
resets to unprotected.
•
Flash - When protected, the module can be temporarily unprotected; however, if
power is cycled or if the printer is reset, the module state is initialized to protected.
Syntax:
<STX>Kpmf
Where:
m
- Module ID – Range A to Z (See Appendix K).
f
- Flag specifying Enable or Disable protection, where:
0 = disable protection; and,
1 = enable protection
Sample:
<STX>KpY0
The sample above disables protection for Module Y; graphics may
now be downloaded to the module and, on subsequent resets,
these graphics will be protected.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
101
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KQ
Query Memory Configuration
This command causes the printer to transmit, in a model-dependent format, its memory
configuration (i.e., total amount installed, amount available for configuration, and
amount currently assigned to specific functions or entities) to the host device.
Syntax:
Non-Display model
response format:
Where:
<STX>KQ<CR>
INTERNAL MEMORY<CR>
VER: aa-cdd.ee mm/dd/yy<CR>
INSTALLED: iiii<CR>
AVAILABLE: vvvv<CR>
MODULE: X:xxxx<CR>
SCALABLE: ssss<CR>
LABEL MEM: LLLL<CR>
LABEL SIZE: wwww:gggg:oo<CR>
<CR>
- ASCII Carriage Return (0x0D) delimiter.
aa-cdd.ee mm/dd/yy - ASCII string sequence that represents
the firmware version number string.
102
iiii
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM
memory.
vvvv
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM
available for configuration.
X:
- ASCII character identifying a DRAM
module followed by an ASCII colon (:). If
no Internal Module is present, this field
and its associated legend will not appear.
xxxx
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM
allocated as an Internal Module.
ssss
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM
assigned to the smooth scalable font
processor cache.
LLLL
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM
assigned to label print buffer.
wwww
- Current maximum printable label width
(in 100ths of an inch or millimeters).
gggg
- Current printable length (in 100ths of an
inch or millimeters), 200 min. / 640 max.
oo
- Current label dimension unit’s
designation: “IN” for inches or “MM” for
millimeters.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Display-Equipped
model response
format:
Product: I4208 – 01.01 05/21/1999
Installed RAM: 8 MB
Label Width: 4.09 IN
Print Buffer Size: 272 IN
Allocation RAM: 6389 KB
Internal Files: 512 KB
Font Cache: 232 KB
Where:
Product
- Printer model, type, and firmware version.
Installed RAM
- Total amount of RAM.
Label Width
- Size in inches/millimeters of the print
head.
Print Buffer Size
- Total number of inches/millimeters of Print
Dot Buffers available. (This is not the
maximum size of a label, which is limited
to 99.99 inches.)
Allocation RAM
- Amount of RAM that can be configured for
the Internal Files, Font Cache and the
remainder going to the Print Buffer Size.
Internal Files
- Size of the Internal Module used to store
downloaded fonts, graphics and label
formats.
Font Cache
- Size of the Font Buffer used to temporarily
store characters. Increasing this buffer
will increase performance if labels have a
large variety of font sizes and characters.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
103
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX Kq
Query Memory Configuration
This command causes the printer to transmit its internal DRAM memory configuration to
the host device. The transmitted data provides information regarding the total amount
of internal DRAM installed, the amount available for configuration, and the amount
currently assigned to specific functions or entities.
Syntax:
<STX>Kq<CR>
Response format:
Memory Configuration<CR>
Product: aaaacdd.ee mm/dd/yy<CR>
Installed RAM: iiiiMB<CR>
Label Width: vvvvoo<CR>
Print Buffer Size: :xxxxoo<CR>
Allocation RAM: ssssKB<CR>
Internal Files LLLLKB<CR>
Font Cache wwww:KB<CR>
Where:
<CR>
- ASCII Carriage Return (0x0D) record
delimiter.
aaaacdd.ee mm/dd/yy - ASCII string sequence that represents the
firmware version number string.
104
iiii
- The number of megabytes of installed
internal DRAM memory.
vvvv
- The length of the Label Width.
xxxx
- The length of the Print Buffer.
ssss
- The number of kilobytes of internal
memory assigned to the label Print Buffer.
LLLL
- The number of kilobytes assigned to the
internal memory module.
wwww
- The number of kilobytes assigned to the
Scalable Cache.
oo
- Current label dimension unit’s
designation. “IN” for inches and “MM” for
millimeters.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KR
Reset Memory Configuration
This command resets the printer’s DRAM configuration to the default settings; see
<STX>KM.
Syntax:
<STX>KR<CR>
This command will result in a system reset for the EX2.
STX Kr
Resettable Counter Reset
This command resets the internal counters. Follow this command with an <SOH>U
command to retain the reset or the counters will revert to the previous values after
cycling power.
Syntax:
STX KS
<STX>Kr<CR>
Memory Configuration, Scalable Font Cache
(Non-Display Models only)
See the <STX>K command.
This command will result in a system reset for the EX2.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
105
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KtA
Write Application Family Identifier (AFI) to Tag
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command writes the AFI data to the tag.
Syntax:
<STX>KtAabcc
Where:
a
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
b
- Lock the Application Family Identifier (AFI) after writing:
0 = No Protection
1 = Write Protect
cc
- Two character AFI value representing one byte.
Sample:
<STX>KtA91C3[CR]
The sample above writes 0xC3 AFI byte, locking value, retrying
nine times if necessary.
STX KtD
Write Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID) to Tag
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command writes the DSFID data to the tag.
Syntax:
<STX>KtDabcc
Where:
a
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
b
- Lock the Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID) after
writing:
0 = No Protection
1 = Write Protect
cc
- Two character DFSID value representing one byte.
Sample:
<STX>KtD91C3[CR]
The sample above writes 0xC3 DSFID byte, locking value, retrying
nine times if necessary.
106
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KtE
Write Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) Bit
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command writes the EAS bit for Philips ISO tags.
Syntax:
<STX>KtEabcc
Where:
a
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
b
- Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) option:
0 = Set EAS
1 = Reset EAS
2 = Test EAS
cc
- Two character Manufacturer’s Code, representing one
byte.
Sample:
<STX>KtE9004[CR]
The sample above writes the EAS bit for Philips (0x04), retrying
nine times if necessary.
STX KtH
Read and Feedback Tag Information to Host
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command returns the tag info to host.
This command only works when the Data Flag for the tag is 0x0F (i.e., when the tag
contains DSFID, AFI, VICC and IC data).
Syntax:
<STX>KtH
Sample Feedback:
DATA FLAG: 0x0F
TAG ID: E004010000751412
DSFID: 0xE3
AFI: 0x01
NUM BLK: 0x1B
BLK SIZ: 0x03
IC REF: 0x01
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
107
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KtR
Read Data from RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command instructs the RFID device to read data from the tag and then put that
data into a replaceable field. It is expected that the tag transponder will be within the
read / write distance of the RFID programming device; otherwise, “Void” will be printed
in the text or bar code label field(s).
Syntax:
<STX>KtRUn1…n16Haaabbbcdee<CR>
Where:
Un1…n16 - (Optional) Where n1…n16 is the Unique Identifier (UID)
in hexadecimal format. Must be sixteen characters
long.
H
- (Optional) Hexadecimal data – “H” may be added
directly after “R” to return a two character hex value of
the data. Since there are two digits per hex value,
replaceable fields should be twice as long than if using
ASCII data (e.g., the character “A” would be returned
as “41”).
aaa
- Starting block number (000
maximum block
number). Transponder dependent.
bbb
- The number of blocks to read (001
number). Transponder dependent.
c
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
d
- Reserved. Should be 0.
ee
- Field number in which to place the data (must be 01,
02, 03, etc.) matching the order of Label Formatting
command, U.
maximum block
A 00 value will send tag data to the host with no printing.
Sample:
<STX>L
1911A1802000010TEXT
U
X
<STX>KtRUE00700ABCDEF1234H0000015001
<STX>G
The sample above creates a replaceable text field (01), recalls
data from the RFID tag block zero (reading only one block, which
is attempted nine times), and prints the data in the location
specified by replaceable field.
When using addressed commands and the tag with the specified UID cannot be found, a
standard RFID read/write fault will be issued.
108
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KtU
Read Unique Serial Number from RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command instructs the RFID device to read the unique serial number data from the
tag and then place that data into a replaceable field. It is expected that the tag
transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device;
otherwise, “Void” will be printed in the text or bar code label field(s).
This is a sixteen character alphanumeric value; the replaceable field must have an
adequate length.
Syntax:
<STX>KtUabcc<CR>
Where:
a
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
b
- Reserved. Should be 0.
cc
- Field number in which to place the data (must be 01,
02, 03, etc.) matching the order of Label Formatting
command, U.
A 00 value will send the ID to the host with no printing.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
109
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KtW
Write Data to RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command instructs the RFID device to write data to the tag. It is expected that the
tag transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device;
otherwise, a warning will occur and a warning message (Read / Write Fail) will be
displayed.
Syntax:
<STX>KtWUn1…n16Bncncncaaabcdee…e<CR>
Where:
Un1…n16
- (Optional) Where n1…n16 is the Unique Identifier
(UID) in hexadecimal format, sixteen characters in
length.
Bncncnc
- (Optional) Where ncncnc is the data byte count, to
allow non-printable characters (i.e., characters with
hex values less than 0x20) to be encoded.
aaa
maximum block
- Starting block number (000
number). Transponder dependent.
b
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
c
- Lock block after writing:
0 = No Protection
1 = Write Protect
d
- Reserved. Should be 0.
ee…e
- Data to be encoded on RFID tag.
Sample 1:
<STX>KtWB004000900<0x00><0x01><0x02><0x03>[CR]
Sample 1, above, programs the hex values 0x00, 0x01, 0x02,
0x03 in block zero.
Sample 2:
<STX>KtWUE00700ABCDEF1234B004000510TEST[CR]
Sample 2, above, programs the data “TEST” to the tag with UID
“E00700ABCDEF1234” at block zero then write-protects block zero
(attempting to write five additional times if necessary). When
write protecting (locking) with UID, the separate lock command
will also use the addressed mode and the supplied UID.
When using addressed commands and the tag with the specified UID cannot be found, a
standard RFID read/write fault will be issued.
110
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KuB
Read Data from Gen2 Tag Section
This command reads a specific block address of a Gen2 tag.
Syntax:
<STX>KuBaaabbb
Where:
aaa
- Block address number, where: 000 is kill/access
section; 001 is EPC section; 002 is Tag ID; and, 003 is
user memory.
bbb
- Data offset in word length.
Sample:
<STX>KuB001002
The sample above reads the block address 1 at offset word 2,
which is location of the EPC data.
STX KuF
Send RFID Device Firmware Version
This command instructs the RFID device to return the firmware version.
Syntax:
<STX>KuF<CR>
Printer response:
DEVICE VERSION: XXX.XXX.XXX[CR]
STX KuJ
Write Data to Gen 2 Tag Section
This command writes a specific block address of a Gen2 tag.
Syntax:
<STX>KuJaaabbb<data>
Where:
aaa
- Block address number, where: 000 is kill/access
section; 001 is EPC section; 002 is Tag ID; or, 003 is
user memory.
bbb
- Data offset in word length
<data>
- Hexadecimal data (must be length of multiples of 4)
Sample:
<STX>KuJ001002112233445566778899AABBCC
The sample above writes data “112233445566778899AABBCC” to
block address 1 at offset word 2, which is the EPC data.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
111
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KuR
Read Data from RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – UHF Interface – Hexadecimal Data Only)
This command instructs the RFID device to read data from the tag and then place that
data into a replaceable field. It is expected that the tag transponder is within the read /
write distance of the RFID programming device; otherwise, “Void” will be printed in the
text or bar code label field(s).
Syntax:
<STX>KuRaa<CR>
Where:
aa
- Field number in which to place the data (must be 01,
02, 03, etc.) matching the order of Label Formatting
command, U.
A 00 value will send the ID to the host with no
printing.
Sample:
<STX>L
D11
1911A1801000100 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
U
1A31050002000200 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
U
X
<STX>KuR01
<STX>Kur02
<STX>G
The sample above creates a replaceable text field (01) and bar
code field (02) and then recalls the data from the tag and places it
into the specified fields.
Data should be at least 16 or 24 characters in length.
112
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KuW Write Data to RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – UHF Interface – Hexadecimal Data Only)
This command instructs the RFID device to write data to the tag. It is expected that the
tag transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device;
otherwise, a warning will occur and a warning message (Read / Write Fail) will be
displayed.
Syntax:
<STX>KuWabcc…c<CR>
Where:
a
- The number of attempts to locate, erase and program
the tag (1 – 9).
b
- Reserved. Should be 0.
cc…c
- Data to be encoded in the ASCII format. Must be
sixteen characters in length. The valid characters are
0-9, A-F.
Must be 16 or 24 characters long.
Sample:
<STX>KuW10ABCDEF0102030405[CR]
The sample above programs the data
<0xAB><0xCD><0xEF><0x01><0x02><0x03><0x04><0x05> to the
tag, attempting to write one additional time if necessary.
STX KV
Verifier Enable/Disable
This command allows a verifier to be enabled and disabled.
Syntax:
<STX>KVa<CR>
Where:
a
STX KW
- Y = verifier enable
N = verifier disable
Memory Configuration, Printable Label Width
See the <STX>K command for details.
This command will result in a system reset for the EX2.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
113
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX Kx
Delete Configuration File
This command deletes a configuration file.
Syntax:
<STX>KxmName<CR>
Where:
m
- Valid Module ID – Range A to Z.
Name
- The name, up to 16 characters, of the configuration
file.
<CR>
- 0x0d terminates the name.
Sample:
<STX>KxYPlant1
The sample above deletes the configuration file Plant1 from
Module Y. (Remember to prefix this command with the Module
(Un)Protect Command <STX>Kp.)
STX KZ
Immediately Set Parameter
This command immediately sets the specified parameter.
Syntax:
<STX>KZax<CR>
Where:
a
- Valid parameter identifier, as follows:
F = Feed Speed
P = Print Speed
S = Slew Speed
H = Heat Setting
x
- Speed Parameter Range – A to e (see Appendix L).
-orxx
Sample:
- Heat Parameter Range – A two-digit value (00-30);
see the ‘H’ Label Formatting Command.
<STX>KZH22
The sample above causes the file currently being executed to
assume a Heat Value of 22.
114
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
6
Label Formatting Command Functions
Introduction
The <STX>L command switches the printer from the System-Level Processor to the Label
Formatting Processor. All commands following the <STX>L are interpreted as label
formatting commands, and can be used to override default parameter values. Selectable
parameter value defaults may be also reassigned via the Setup Menu, as defined in the
corresponding Operator’s Manual. Label formats that contain no commands overriding
printer default values will assume those defaults.
:
Set Cut by Amount
This command allows a predetermined number of labels to be printed before a cut is
initiated. This feature is useful when it is necessary to print an uncut strip of labels.
Between 1 and 9999 labels may be printed before a cut is made. The amount must be
smaller than the quantity of labels printed.
Syntax:
:nnnn
Where:
nnnn
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
:0005<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
Q0021<CR>
E<CR>
- Is a four digit decimal number indicating the number
of labels to be printed before a cut is performed.
The sample above instructs the printer to make a cut after 5, 10,
and 20 labels have been printed. Label 21 will be cut at the start
of a subsequent label format (batch) unless a default (cut by
amount) greater than one has been entered.
The cutter must be enabled with all mechanism interlocks closed for operation.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
115
Label Formatting Command Functions
A
Set Format Attribute
This command specifies the type of format operation and remains in effect until another
format command is specified or another label format has begun (<STX>L). Each label
format defaults to Attribute 2 (Transparent Mode).
Syntax:
An
Where:
n
Sample:
<STX>L
A3
141100001000100DATAMAX<CR>
141100001100110DATAMAX<CR>
E
- Is attribute mode 1, 2, 3, or 5; see table below. The
default is 1.
The sample above sets the printer to Opaque Mode and produces
one label.
n
Attribute
1
XOR
Mode
2
Transparent
Mode
3
Opaque
Mode
Interacting text is obliterated by the text
formatted last. Each character cell is treated
as opaque. This mode is effective only in
rotation 1. See Record Structure Types.
Inverse
Mode
This mode allows inverse (white on black)
printing (e.g., a proportionally sized border
and background are printed similar to
photographic negative). If text or image fields
overlap in this mode, the effect will be similar
to the XOR mode.
5
Description
Example
In this mode, the region where text strings,
images or bar codes intersect will not be
printed. (An odd number of overlapping
objects will print.)
This is the default mode; the intersecting
regions of text strings, images, and bar codes
will print, allowing the user to print fields on
top of one another.
Table 6-1: Format Attributes
116
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
B
Bar Code Magnification
This command provides a mechanism to specify bar codes greater than 36 dots (0 - 9, A
- Z in the field record). The value is reset to 1 at the start of every label and stays
active for the entire label or set to a new value.
Syntax:
Bnn
Where:
nn
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
D11
B01
1a9305000100030ABCD<CR>
B03
1a3105000700030ABCD<CR>
Q0001
E
- Is a two digit decimal number indicating the
magnification value.
The sample above instructs the printer to print two bar codes,
each 9 dots by 3 dots.
C
Set Column Offset Amount
This command allows horizontal adjustment of the point where printing begins. The
printer is instructed to print label formats nnnn units to the right of the position that the
format specifies. This feature is useful when a single format is to be printed on labels
containing preprinted information.
Syntax:
Cnnnn
Where:
nnnn
Sample:
<STX>L
C0050
141100001000100DATAMAX<CR>
- Is a four-digit number for the column offset,
inches/100 or mm/10. The default is 0.
The sample above shifts all format data 0.5 inches to the right,
unless the printer is in metric mode, (see Label Formatting
Command ‘m’).
If using preprinted labels where the placement of the preprint data varies from label to
label, the printed information may overlap the preprinted data.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
117
Label Formatting Command Functions
c
Set Cut by Amount
This command is the same as the ‘:’ command except only a two-digit value can be
entered. This command allows a predetermined number of labels to be printed before a
cut is initiated. 1 to 99 labels may be printed before a cut is made.
Syntax:
cnn
Where:
nn
Sample
<STX>L<CR>
c07<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
Q0021<CR>
E
- Is a two-digit number indicating the number of labels
to be printed before a cut is performed. The default is
one.
The sample above instructs the printer to make cuts after labels
7, 14, and 21 have been printed. See Label Formatting Command
‘:’.
The cutter must be enabled and all mechanism interlocks closed for the cut operation.
D
Set Dot Size Width and Height
This command is used to change the size of a printed dot, hence the print resolution –
dots per inch (DPI) of the print head. By changing the height of a dot, the maximum
length of a label can be increased or decreased. For the element sizes see Appendix K.
Syntax:
Dwh
Where:
w
- Is Dot Width multiplier 1 or 2.
h
- Is Dot Height multiplier 1, 2, or 3.
D11 is the default value for 300, 400 and 600 DPI printer models, while D22 is the
default value for all 203 DPI printer models.
118
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
E
Terminate Label Formatting Mode and Print Label
This command causes the printer, when the processing Label Formatting commands, to
terminate the Label Formatting Mode then generate, print, and feed a label. The label
generated will be based on whatever data has been received to that point, even if no
printable data has been received. (Other termination commands are ‘X’ and ‘s’.)
Commands sent to the printer after the Terminate Label command must be of the
Immediate, System-Level, or Font Download type.
Syntax:
E
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
121100000000000Testing<CR>
E<CR>
The sample above will print one label.
e
Recall Printer Configuration
This command recalls a previously stored printer configuration. It is highly
recommended that only one Recall Printer Configuration command be used per label,
and that it be used at the beginning of the label; otherwise, unpredictable results will
occur. (Printer configurations may be stored using the Extended System-Level
Commands or via the printer’s menu system.)
Syntax:
eName<CR>
Where:
Name
- The name, up to 16 characters, of the configuration
file.
<CR>
- 0x0d terminates the name.
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
ePlant1<CR>
1A2210001000000Testing<CR>
E<CR>
The sample above recalls the stored printer configuration, Plant1.
F
Advanced Format Attributes
These commends extend the text presentation capabilities for Scalable Fonts. The
format attribute allows a set of label format records to select Bolding, Italicizing and
Underlining. Additional commands allow the specification of line rotation and font
changes within a label field. See ‘Advanced Format Attributes’ (Section 8) for details.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
119
Label Formatting Command Functions
f
Set Present Speed (Non-Display Models only)
This command controls the rate at which the present distance is positioned, allowing the
media movement to be slowed during ‘presentation’ (the distance traveled after printing
is completed to the label stop position). This command is used only within the context of
a label format. The speed assigned is retained until another label format is received or
until power is removed; if a subsequent format does not contain a present speed
command then the present speed reverts to the feed speed.
Syntax:
fa
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>LD11H30PGSG
fA
191100200830165Fixed Data Field 1
E
<STX>L
191100200830165Fixed Data Field 1
E
- Is a single alpha character representing a speed,
limited by the feed speed range; see Appendix L. The
default is the feed speed.
The sample above prints two labels; the first label has present
speed of 1 inch per second, while the second reverts to the feed
speed of 4 inches per second.
G
Place Data in Global Register
The ‘G’ command saves the print data of a print format record in a global register
(temporary storage). This data may be retrieved and copied to another record in the
same label format using the special Label Formatting Command: <STX>S. Global
registers are named in the order received, beginning with Register A, ending at Register
P, and incrementing with each instance of the G command use.
Syntax:
G
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
121100000000000Testing<CR>
G<CR>
1A2210001000000<STX>SA<CR>
E<CR>
The sample above stores, retrieves, and prints the data in global
register A. One label is printed with “Testing” in two locations.
120
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
H
Enter Heat Setting
This command changes the “on time” of elements of the print head. The default setting
is 10 (except in the case of printers with a menu, where the default setting can be
changed through the keypad). An increase or decrease in this value results in a change
of heat applied by the print head to the media, lightening or darkening the print contrast
accordingly. This is helpful when using different media types, each requiring a different
amount of heat to properly image the media. The host device can send this command
value to correct the heat setting per the application.
Syntax:
Hnn
Where:
nn
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
H15<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
E
- Is a two-digit heat value (00-30).
The sample above sets the printer for a heat value of 15 and
prints one label.
Non-Display models – the “Darkness Potentiometer,” while providing subtle changes, is
intended to be used to match print contrast levels following print head replacements.
J
Justification
This command changes the printing justification.
Syntax:
Ja
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
1911A1801001000TEST1
JR
1911A1801000100TEST2
JC
1911A1802000200TEST3
E
- Is a single-digit alpha character:
L = left justified (default)
R = right justified
C = center justified
The sample above prints “TEST1” one inch up and one inch over
going right, “TEST2” one inch up and one inch over going left, and
“TEST3” two inches up and over.
Display-Equipped Models – This command is only valid for use with scalable fonts.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
121
Label Formatting Command Functions
M
Select Mirror Mode
This command instructs the printer to “mirror” all subsequent print field records,
producing fields that are transposed visually.
Syntax:
M
Sample:
<STX>L
161100003200010 NOT MIRRORED<CR>
M<CR>
161100003000400 MIRRORED<CR>
E
Printed Result:
m
Set Metric Mode
This command sets the printer to measure in metric. When this command is sent, all
measurements will be interpreted as metric values, (e.g., a column offset of 0010 will be
interpreted as 1.0 mm).
Syntax:
m
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
m
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
E
The sample above prints the text (SAMPLE LABEL) starting at
location coordinates 10.0 mm, 10.0 mm.
n
Set Inch (Imperial) Mode
This command sets the printer to measure in inches. When this command is sent, all
measurements will change to inches. Default mode, and is menu selectable.
Syntax:
n
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
n
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
E
The sample above prints the text (SAMPLE LABEL) starting at
location coordinates 1.0 inch, 1.0 inch.
122
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
P
Set Print Speed
This command sets a print speed for a label or batch of labels.
Syntax:
Pa
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>L
PC
141100001000100LABEL1<CR>
E
<STX>L
141100001000100LABEL2<CR>
E
- Is a single character representing a speed; see
Appendix L for valid ranges.
The sample above prints two labels, the first at a speed of 2
inches per second (51 mm per second) and the second at the
default setting.
p
Set Backfeed Speed
This command, typically used in conjunction with the Cut or Peel and Present operations,
controls the rate at which the labels will reverse to align to the next start of print
position. The setting remains in effect until another backfeed speed command is
received or until the printer is reset.
Syntax:
pa
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>L
pF
- Is a single alpha character representing a speed; see
Appendix L for valid ranges.
The sample above sets the printer to a backup speed of 3.5 IPS.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
123
Label Formatting Command Functions
Q
Set Quantity of Labels to Print
This command sets the number of the label copies to be printed. A one to five digit value
is allowed, if the command is delimited by a carriage return <CR>. This permits host
applications to generate label quantity commands without the need to pad leading zeros.
(A four-digit command value does not need to be <CR> terminated.)
Syntax:
Qnnnnn
Where:
nnnnn
Sample:
<STX>L
121100000000000Testing<CR>
Q0020<CR>
E<CR>
- Is a one to five-digit delimited value setting for the
number of labels to be printed. The default value is
one.
The sample above will print a batch of 20 identical labels.
Specifying 9999 as the four-digit quantity results in continuous printing.
R
Set Row Offset Amount
This command allows vertical adjustment of the point where printing begins. The printer
is instructed to print label formats nnnn units above the position that the format
specifies. This feature is useful when a single format is to be printed on labels containing
preprinted information.
Syntax:
Rnnnn
Where:
nnnn
Sample:
<STX>L
R0037<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
E
- Is a four-digit number (0000-9999) for the row offset,
in inches/100 or millimeters/10. The default is 0.
The sample above prints a label with a row offset amount of .37
inches, unless in metric mode.
• If using preprinted labels where the placement of the preprint data varies from label
to label, the printed information may overlap the preprinted data.
• If printing near the TOF is important (i.e., on very small labels or in very tight
formats), it may be necessary to use the ROW ADJUST setting to shift the vertical
start of print position in the negative direction.
124
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
r
Recall Stored Label Format
This command is used to retrieve label formats stored on a memory module.
Syntax:
rnn...n
Where:
nn…n
- Is a label name, up to 16 characters in length.
The samples below explain different ways to recall and print a label
format. (To view a memory module’s directory of label formats use
the <STX>W command.)
S
String Sent:
Printer Interpretation:
Sample 1:
<STX>L<CR>
rTEST<CR>
Q0002<CR>
E<CR>
Begin label format
Retrieve format named TEST
Quantity requested = 2
Terminate formatting and print
Sample 2:
<STX>L<CR>
rTEST<CR>
X<CR>
<STX>G<CR>
Begin label format
Retrieve format named test
Terminate formatting
Print
Sample 3:
<STX>L<CR>
D11<CR>
PO<CR>
SO<CR>
rTEST<CR>
E<CR>
Begin label format
Dot size = 1x1
Print speed O
Feed speed O
Retrieve format named test
Terminate formatting and print
Set Feed Speed
This command controls the rate at which the label is moved through non-printed areas.
The setting remains unchanged unless another feed speed command is received or until
the printer is reset.
Syntax:
Sa
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>L
SE
141100001000100LABEL1<CR>
E
<STX>L
1411000010001000LABEL2<CR>
E
- Is a single alpha character representing a speed; see
Appendix L for valid ranges.
The sample above sets a 3 IPS feed speed and prints two labels,
with the same feed speed for both.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
125
Label Formatting Command Functions
s
Store Label Format in Module
This command stores a label format to a specified module as a .dlb file. Supplying the
module name will store the label to that module; otherwise, using C will cause the label
format to be stored in the selected default module (see <STX>X). In addition, this
command terminates the Label Formatting Command.
Syntax:
sann…n
Where:
a
- Is the module designator representing a single
character module name; see Appendix K.
nn…n
- Represents the name of the label (maximum 16
characters).
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
D11<CR>
191100501000000123456789012<CR>
1911005020000001234567<CR>
191100500000000Sample<CR>
1X1100000000000B250250002002<CR>
Q0001<CR>
sATEST<CR>
The sample above stores a format in Memory Module A and
names it ‘TEST’. (To recall a label format from the module use
the ‘r’ command.)
T
Set Field Data Line Terminator
This command, intended for use with record types that accept binary data (e.g.,
PDF417), allows special binary control codes (e.g., a carriage return) to be embedded in
the printed data by setting an alternate data line terminator. It remains valid only for
the next format record, then the terminator defaults back to the carriage return.
Syntax:
Tnn
Where:
nn
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
T00<CR>
191100200000000TEST<NULL>
141100001000100TERMIATOR<CR>
Q0001<CR>
E<CR>
- Is an ASCII two-character representation of a HEX
code to be used for the end of data terminator.
The sample above sets the printer to use a NULL terminator
(ASCII NULL: HEX 00) for the data line termination code. The
terminator is immediately restored to a carriage return <CR>, as
seen in the format record containing the text ‘TERMINATOR’.
126
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
U
Mark Previous Field as a String Replacement Field
This command controls the way replacement data is formatted. Specifying a field as a
string replacement for dynamic fields, and not for static fields, will optimize label
throughput. See the <STX>U command.
Syntax:
U
Sample:
<STX>L
D11
121100001000000123456789012<CR>
U<CR>
1211000020000001234567<CR>
U<CR>
161100000000000Sample<CR>
1X1100000000000B250250002002<CR>
Q0001
E
<STX>U01ABCDEFGHIJKL<CR>
<STX>U028901234<CR>
<STX>G
The sample above sets up the label format for register loading and
prints two labels. The first two of the four format records have
been designated as replacement fields. The second label is
generated with System-Level field-replacement commands and
prints the last label.
The length of the original string sets the data string length of any replacement; both
must be equal. The data being used when created must be valid for the font type being
selected.
X
Terminate Label Formatting Mode
This command causes the printer, when in label formatting mode, to immediately switch
to the system command mode and generate a label format based on the data received
at that point. However, unlike the ‘E’ command, it will not print a label. (Other
termination commands are the ‘E’ and ‘s’.)
Syntax:
X
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE<CR>
X<CR>
The sample above will result in a label format, but no label will be
printed.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
127
Label Formatting Command Functions
y
Select Font Symbol Set
This command, like the <STX>y, selects the scalable font symbol set. The selected
symbol set remains active until another symbol set is selected; see the <STX>y
command for details.
Syntax:
ySxx
Where:
S
- Byte-size designation; see Appendix H:
S = Single byte symbol sets; and,
U = Double byte symbol sets.
xx
- Symbol set selection.
Sample:
<STX>L
ySSW<CR>
The sample above selects the Swedish symbol set for use in
format records using scalable fonts.
z
Zero (Ø) Conversion to “0”
This command removes the slash zero in fonts 0 to 8, and in the human readable field
(if any) of the bar codes A to Z. The command applies only to format records containing
those fonts and bar codes, and is effective only for the label format in which it appears.
Syntax:
z
Sample:
<STX>L
z
121100000000000Test0000<CR>
E
None of the smooth fonts (i.e., Font 9) use the slash zero convention, and this
command will have no effect on scalable fonts.
128
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
+ (>)(()
Make Last Field Entered Increment
This command, useful in printing sequenced labels, causes the printer to automatically
increment a field on the labels in a batch. The numeric data in the field will increment by
the value assigned after the plus sign (+) each time a label is produced [or the greater
than symbol [>] can be substituted to make the field increment alphabetically, or the
left parenthesis [(] can be substituted to make the field increment hexadecimal data
(valid hexadecimal data is 0-9 or A-F, usually in pairs)]. This command is effective only
on the label format record that it follows, and is intended to be used with the Q, <STX>E,
or <STX>G commands.
Syntax:
*pii
Where:
*
- Is + for numeric increment, > for alphanumeric
increment, or (for hexadecimal increment.
p
- Is the fill character for the left-hand character of the
field.
ii
- Is the amount by which to increment the field.
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
13220000000000012345<CR>
+01<CR>
Q0003<CR>
E<CR>
The sample above will generate a single field label format that
prints the initial label with a value of 12345, and then increments
that number by one for the next two labels.
Embedding
Numeric strings for incrementing may also be embedded between alphabetic characters
(e.g., when systems require alphanumeric bar codes with alphabetic prefixes or
suffixes).
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
161100000100010AB0001CD<CR>
+ 100<CR>
Q0003<CR>
E<CR>
The sample above will print three labels, incrementing 0001 by 1
on each label with AB and CD remaining untouched: AB0001CD,
AB0002CD, AB0003CD. Note that the increment value has one
leading blank and two trailing zeros, while the blank is a pad
character and the trailing zeroes are placeholders that leave CD
unchanged.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
129
Label Formatting Command Functions
– (<)())
Make Last Field Entered Decrement
This command, useful in printing sequenced labels, causes the printer to automatically
decrement a field on the labels in a batch. The numeric data in the field will decrement
by the value assigned after the minus (-) sign each time a label is produced [or the less
than character [<] can be substituted to make the field decrement alphabetically, or the
right parenthesis [)] can be substituted to make the field decrement hexadecimal data
(valid hexadecimal data is 0-9 or A-F, usually in pairs)]. This command is effective only
on the label format record that it follows, and is intended to be used with the Q, <STX>E
or <STX>G commands.
Syntax:
*pii
Where:
*
- Is – for numeric decrement, < for alphanumeric
decrement, or) for hexadecimal decrement.
p
- Is the fill character for the leftmost character of the
field.
ii
- Is the amount by which to decrement the field.
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
132200000000000123AB<CR>
<01<CR>
Q0003<CR>
E<CR>
The sample above will generate a single field label format that
prints the initial label with a value of 123AB, and then decrements
that number by one for the next two labels.
Embedding
Numeric strings for decrementing may also be embedded between alphabetic characters
(e.g., when systems require alphanumeric bar codes with alphabetic prefixes or
suffixes).
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
1611000001000101000CD<CR>
- 100<CR>
Q0003<CR>
E<CR>
The sample above will print three labels: 1000CD, 999CD, and
998CD. Note that the pad character is a placeholder for digits
removed from the left side in the subtraction process. When a
fixed pitch font is used, the justification of the rightmost character
is sustained regardless of the number of digits replaced by the pad
character on the left side.
130
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
^
Set Count by Amount
This command allows applications using the increment / decrement field command to
print more than one label with the same field value before the field data is updated. The
default is 1.
Syntax:
^nn
Where:
^
- May be 0x55 or 0x40; see Control Codes.
nn
- Is a two-digit value that specifies the number of
labels to be generated before incrementing (or
decrementing) the field value.
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
13220000000000012345<CR>
-01<CR>
^02<CR>
Q0006<CR>
E<CR>
The sample above prints two labels containing the same field
value before decrementing the field. Six labels are printed.
This command can only be issued once per label format. In addition, when alternate
Control Codes are enabled, the ^ character must be replaced by the @ character
(hexadecimal 0x40). See Control Codes.
Special Label Formatting Command Functions
Two Special Label Formatting Commands, the <STX>S and the <STX>T, are entered directly
into the data field of label format records. Do not confuse them with System-Level
Commands because the same control character is used. If alternate control codes are
enabled the <STX> becomes ‘~’ (hexadecimal 0x7E); see Control Codes.
Label Formatting Character
Command Description
<STX>S
Recall global data and place in field
<STX>T
Print time and date
Table 6-2: Special Label Formatting Commands
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
131
Label Formatting Command Functions
STX S
Recall Global Data and Place in Field
This command, when in the format record data field, places data from a specified global
register into the data field. See the G command.
Syntax:
<STX>Sn
Where:
n
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
121100000000000DMX<CR>
G<CR>
1A2210001000000<STX>SA<CR>
E<CR>
- Specifies the global register (A − P) that contains the
data to place into the data field.
The sample above places the string “DMX” into the next available
global register (A), and then line 4 is effectively replaced by the
data from global register A.
STX T
Print Time and Date
This command, using string characters and markers, allows time and date data to be
selected and retrieved from the printer’s internal clock. In addition, the <STX>T may be
preceded by data to be printed/encoded, and/or the string may now be terminated by
an <STX> command and then followed by more data terminated by a <CR>. The string
characters/markers are not printed; instead, the printed label will show the
corresponding print value.
Syntax:
<STX>Tstring<CR>
Where:
string
String
Characters
A
- Is any set of characters, A - Z and a – h; see the
table below.
Week Day (Mon = 1, Sun = 7)
String
Markers
VW
24-hour time format
BCD
Day Name
XY
12-hour time format
EF
Month Number
Za
Minutes
GH...O
Month Name
gh
Seconds
PQ
Day
bc
AM or PM
RSTU
Year
def
Julian Date
Print Values
Print Values
Table 6-3: Time and Date String Characters and Markers
When using substitution, you must ensure the converted string produces valid
characters for the selected bar code / font.
132
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
Sample 1:
<STX>L<CR>
121100001000100<STX>TBCD GHI PQ, TU<CR>
E<CR>
Sample 1 prints SUN DEC 21, 98.
Sample 2:
<STX>L<CR>
191100100100010<STX>TEF/PQ<CR>
E<CR>
Sample 2 prints 12/21.
Sample 3:
<STX>L<CR>
191100100100010ABC <STX>TEF/PQ<STX> DEF<CR>
E<CR>
Sample 3 prints ABC 12/21 DEF, and illustrates a method of
embedding the time string, where the string must be terminated
by <STX>.
The samples above assume a current printer date of December 21, 1998.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
133
Label Formatting Command Functions
134
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
7
Font Loading Command Functions
Introduction
The commands used for font loading are usually generated by font creation software;
however, the assigned font ID number command must be sent to the printer before the font
file. All Font Loading Commands begin with <ESC> (ASCII control character 27 [decimal]).
The downloaded font will be stored in the default module (refer to the <STX>X command) as
file type .dbm. The commands in the table below are listed in their order of appearance, top
to bottom, during font downloading. The <SOH>D command must be sent prior to
downloading a font.
Command
Description
*c###D
Assign Font ID Number
)s#Wnn…n
Font Descriptor
*c#E
Character Code
(s#W
Character Download Data
Table 7-1: Font Loading Commands
*c###D
Assign Font ID Number
This command is the first command required for downloading a font to either RAM or
Flash Memory modules. ESC represents the ASCII control character 27.
Syntax:
<ESC>*c###D
Where:
###
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
- Is the font ID numbers 100-999 (000 – 099 are
reserved for resident fonts).
135
Font Loading Commands
)s###W
Font Descriptor
This command (typically first data in a font file) contains all of the information about the
font contained in the file. Different font generation software will create different length
header information, but the initial 64 bytes will remain consistent with the PCL-4 (HP
LaserJet II) format.
Syntax:
<ESC>)s###Wddd…d
Where:
###
- Is the number of bytes of font descriptor data from 1
to 3 ASCII decimal digits.
dd…d
- Is the descriptor.
*c###E
Character Code
This code is the ASCII decimal value corresponding to the next downloaded character.
Syntax:
<ESC>*c###E
Where:
###
(s#W
- Is the ASCII value of the character, three digits
maximum, 0 to 999.
Character Download Data
This command contains all of the information for one downloaded character.
136
Syntax:
<ESC>(s###Wnn…n
Where:
###
- Is the number of bytes of bitmapped data, three
digits maximum, from 1 to 999.
nn…n
- Is the bitmapped data.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
8
Generating Label Formats
Introduction
This section explains the use of the different fields in a print format record.
Format Record Commands
Received label format data (see example below) is processed by the printer sequentially,
left to right and top to bottom.
String Sent
<STX>L<CR>
D11<CR>
121100000050005Home Position<CR>
191100602000200ROTATION 1<CR>
291100602000200ROTATION 2<CR>
391100602000200ROTATION 3<CR>
491100602000200ROTATION 4<CR>
1A3104003000260123456<CR>
4a6210002500140123456<CR>
1X1100000000000B400400003003<CR>
1X1100002000000L400001<CR>
1X1100000000200L001400<CR>
121100004100010Printhead Location<CR>
Q0001<CR>
E<CR>
Interpretation
Begin label format
Set dot size
Format text
Format text
Format text
Format text
Format text
Format bar code with text
Format bar code
Format box
Format line
Format line
Format text
Label quantity
End formatting, begin printing
Table 8-1: Sample Label Format
The sample above assumes that ‘inch’ mode (<STX>n) is selected.
Printhead Location
(Print
Direction)
Home Position
Figure 8-1: Formatted Sample Label
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
137
Generating Label Formats
The first line in the sample format (Table 8-1) is the System-Level Command directing
the printer to begin label formatting. (Other System-Level Commands may precede the
<STX>L for printer setup.) Lines 2, 14, and 15 are Label Formatting Commands. Line 15
is the exit and print command. The remaining lines (3-13) are print format records,
explained in this section.
A record is a data string that contains the information to be printed on the label(s).
Records are the building blocks of label formats. Every record must end with a
termination character (usually a carriage return, <CR>). Omitting termination
characters will result in the concatenation of records. Omitting the carriage return that
precedes the termination character E, which is necessary to complete the label
formatting and begin printing, will cause the printer to continue interpreting all
subsequent data as label print format records.
Generating Records
Every record is made of three parts: (1) a header that is 15 bytes in length, (2) the data
to be printed, and (3) a termination character (e.g., <CR>) marking the end of the field.
The header is used to select the appearance of the data when printed by choosing
rotation, font type, size, and position options. Every header contains similar information,
but different types of records may use this information in different ways. The six record
types are:
1. Internal Bitmapped Font
2. Smooth Font (Simulated)
3. Scalable Font
4. Bar code
5. Images
6. Graphics
The Structure of a Record
The basic structure of the record is described below. For details regarding the various
interpretations of the six types see Record Structure Types.
The third line of the label format example in Table 8-1 consists of the following:
121100000050005HOME POSITION<CR>
This string comprises a complete record, shown below, divided into its three basic
component parts.
Header
Data String
Termination Character
121100000050005
HOME POSITION
<CR>
Table 8-2: Record Structure Components
138
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Generating Label Formats
The record (with spaces added for readability) conforms to the following fixed field
format. Identifying lower case letters have been placed below field values for reference
in the following sections:
1 2 1 1
000
0005
0005
HOME POSITION
<CR>
a b c d
eee
ffff
gggg
[hhhh iiii] jj…j
Termination character
Location
Within
Record
Record Type
Internal
Bitmapped
Font
Smooth
Font
Scalable
Font
Bar
Code
Images
Graphics
a
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
1
b
Font ID
9
9
Bar Code
Y
X
c
Width
Multiplier
Width
Multiplier
Width
Multiplier
Wide
Bar
Width
Multiplier
1
d
Height
Multiplier
Height
Multiplier
Height
Multiplier
Narrow
Bar
Height
Multiplier
1
eee
000
Font Size/
ID
ID
Bar Code
Height
000
000
ffff
Row
Position
Row
Position
Row
Position
Row
Position
Row
Position
Row
Position
gggg
Column
Position
Column
Position
Column
Position
Column
Position
Column
Position
Column
Position
hhhh
N/A
N/A
Font Height
N/A
N/A
N/A
iiii
N/A
N/A
Font Width
N/A
N/A
N/A
jj…j
Data
String
Data
String
Data
String
Data
String
Image
Name
Graphics
Specifier
Table 8-3: Record Type Structure
In Table 8-3, the record structure is shown for each of the record types. The left-most
column shows the locations of all characters in the record, and corresponds to the
example above the table. Each record structure interprets the characters of the record
in its own way, though some of the interpretations of the characters are identical across
all record types. For example, the characters ffff are interpreted as Row Position in all
record types. While c is a Width Multiplier for Internal Bitmapped Font, Smooth Font,
Scalable Font, and Image record types, it has other interpretations for Bar Code and
Graphics record types.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
139
Generating Label Formats
The Header Fields
Each of the fields in the record header is generally described below. Please reference the
detailed descriptions under Record Structure Types for variations. The field name titles
of the following paragraphs are preceded with a reference letter from Table 8-3. All
characters sent to the printer within the header fields are ASCII, alphanumeric.
a: Rotation
The first field of a header is a single ASCII character that selects the clockwise
degree of rotation for the data to be printed on a label, where:
1 = 0º; 2 = 90º; 3 = 180º; and, 4 = 270º.
Figure 8-1 shows the direction and amount of rotation, relative to the print direction,
where the bottom left corner is the pivot point.
b: Fonts, Bar Codes, Graphics, and Images
The second field (b) determines how the rest of the fields are interpreted, as shown
in the table below.
•
Values 0 through 9 select human-readable fonts. 0 through 8 will select standard
Datamax fonts; value 9 selects the CG Triumvirate smooth scalable font
(internal) or scalable fonts. When 9 is used to select a scalable font, the font size
(font I.D. number) is chosen by entering a value in the height field eee.
•
Values A through z select bar codes. Values A through T (uppercase) will print bar
codes with human-readable interpretations. Values a through z (lowercase) will
print bar codes only.
•
Value W requires two additional characters to specify the Bar Code/Font ID.
•
A font field value X selects a drawing object (line, box, circle or polygon), and
field value Y is used to print an image stored in a module.
b Font Field Value
Interpretation
0-9
Font
A-T
Bar code with human readable text.
a-z
Bar code without human readable text.
Wxx
Bar code/Font expansion
X
Line, box, polygon, circle
Y
Image
Table 8-4: Font Field Interpretations
140
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Generating Label Formats
c: Width Multiplier
Values 1-9, A-Z, and a-z represent multiplication factors from 1 – 61, respectively.
For human-readable fonts, the width multiplier represents the number of times the
selected font dot tables are multiplied and has no effect on the character height. For
bar codes, this character specifies the wide bar width or ratio at a resolution that is
dependent upon the printer model. See Appendix F for default values.
d: Height Multiplier
The height multiplier has the same range and function as the width multiplier (c), but
vertical. When used in the context of bar codes, this field is the ratio denominator, or
the small bar (module) width. Values 1-9, A-Z, and a-z will give a narrow bar width
of one dot (dot size = 1/printhead resolution) to dots. The narrow bar width
resolution and range are dependent upon the print head resolution; see Appendix K.
A “dot multiplier” command can also be used to change the printed dot size (see
Label Formatting Command ‘D’ and Appendix F).
eee: Bar Code Height (Font Size/Selection)
This field has interpretations dependent upon the value of the font b field, as shown
below.
b Font Field Value
eee Field Range
eee Field Interpretation
0-8
000
Not used – Internal bitmapped font
9
000-999, A04-A72,
S00-S9z, U00-U9z, u00-u9z
Font height; Font selection
A-T
000-999
Bar code height (with human readable)
a-z
000-999
Bar code height
Wxx
000-999
Bar code height (with human readable)
X,Y
000
Not used
Table 8-5: Bar Code Height Field Interpretations
ffff: Row Position
The lower left corner of a label is considered the “home position” (see Figure 8-1).
The row position field is a vertical coordinate that determines how far above the
home position the data is to be printed. Field data is interpreted in hundredths of an
inch or tenths of millimeters.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
141
Generating Label Formats
gggg: Column Position
This field is a horizontal coordinate that determines how far to the right of “home
position” the data will be printed. Appendix G lists the maximum values of the gggg
field.
hhhh: Optional Scalable Font Height
The height of a scalable font can be specified in two ways: points or dots. To specify
the height in points the first character of the field is a ‘P’ followed by the number of
points, 004 to 999. To specify the size in dots, all four characters must be numeric.
This field must be specified for scalable fonts. (See note below Optional Scalable Font
Width.)
iiii: Optional Scalable Font Width
The width of a scalable font can be specified in two ways, points or dots. To specify
the width in points, the first character of the field is a ‘P’ followed by the number of
points, 004 to 999 points. To specify the size in dots, all four characters must be
numeric. This field must be specified for scalable fonts. See note below.
To ensure that the data stream is portable to other Datamax printers, specify the
font size in points. If the font is specified in dots, it will output differently on printers
with different DPI/MMPI resolutions. There are 72.307 points per 1 inch (2.847
mm).
jj…j: Data Field
The final field contains the data that will actually be printed on the label. A string of
data can be up to 255 characters in length (except when using the PDF417 bar code,
which may be up to 3000 characters long), ending with a carriage return. Characters
placed in the data field will be printed as long as they fall within the physical range of
the print head. Consult Appendix K for a listing by printer.
Record Structure Types
Each of the six record types has its own field structure and is described in the following
section. The record types allow quick reference to the field types and their valid data
inputs for the field. There are similar, but unique, record structures for each: internal,
bitmapped fonts, internal smooth fonts, downloaded bitmapped fonts, scalable fonts, bar
codes, images, and graphics. The field location identifiers in the tables that follow are
the same as those in Table 8-3.
142
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Generating Label Formats
1: Internal Bitmapped Fonts
This record type is used for internal bitmapped fonts (see Appendix C, Tables C-1
through C-5).
When a 0 through 8 is entered in field b, then the height field eee is not used. The
bitmapped fonts include 8 different fonts (see Appendix C). The character mapping
for these fonts is shown in Appendix A, or a subset thereof.
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
a
1, 2, 3 and 4
Rotation
b
0 to 8 (see Appendix C).
Font
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Width Multiplier
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Height Multiplier
000
N/A
ffff
0000 to 9999
Row
gggg
0000 to 9999 Dependent upon printer. See Appendix K.
jj…j
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters, followed by
a termination character.
eee
Column
Data
Table 8-6: Internal Bitmapped Font Record Structure
2: Smooth Font, Font Modules, and Downloaded Bitmapped Fonts
This record type is used for internal smooth fonts (CG Triumvirate – see Table C-6)
or a bitmapped font downloaded to a memory module (see Font Loading
Commands).
When a 9 is entered in field b, then the height field eee determines the font. The
internal smooth font has up to 13 font sizes (see Appendix C). Values 100 through
999 select individual fonts stored on DRAM, or Flash memory. These include
downloaded bitmapped fonts (see Table 8-5). Use eee values of 096 – 099 for Kanji
fonts, if equipped (see Appendix I). The character mapping is shown in Appendix A.
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
a
1, 2, 3 and 4
Rotation
b
9
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Width Multiplier
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Height Multiplier
Fixed Value
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
143
Generating Label Formats
Field
eee
Valid Inputs
Meaning
000 to 999 (000 to 099 Reserved), A04 to A72, x04 – x72,
Where x is an upper case letter; see Appendix H.
ffff
0000 to 9999
gggg
0000 to 9999 Dependent upon printer. See Appendix K.
jj…j
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed by a
termination character.
Font / Size
Row
Column
Data
Table 8-7: Smooth Font Record Structure
3: Scalable Fonts
The Smooth Scalable Font Technology is licensed from AGFA. Both Intellifont (.CDI)
and TrueType (.TTF) Scalable Font file formats are supported. The eee field
identifies the scalable font, and data type – normal (binary) or Hex ASCII.
Uppercase S or U – binary, lowercase u – Hex ASCII (see Appendix H). Values S00
to S9z, and U00 to U9z (u00 to u9z), select a scalable font. S00 and S01 are used
for the standard internal (resident) fonts on display-equipped models, while S01 is
used for the standard internal (resident) font on non-display models.
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
a
1, 2, 3 and 4
b
9
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Width Multiplier
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Height Multiplier
S00 to Szz, U00-Uzz, u00-uzz
Font Data Type
eee
Rotation
Fixed Value
ffff
0000 to 9999
Row
gggg
Dependent upon printer. See Appendix K.
hhhh
P004-P999, 0016-4163*
Character Height;
points, dots
iiii
P004-P999, 0014-4163*
Character Width;
points, dots
jj…j
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed by a
termination character.
Column
Data
*Character sizes are resolution dependent, as indicated in the following table.
Table 8-8: Scalable Font Record Structure
144
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Generating Label Formats
Character size (dots)
Print head
Resolution (DPI)
Width
Height
203
16-2817
16-2817
300
14-4163
16-4163
400
22-5550
22-5550
600
33-8325
33-8325
Table 8-9: Scalable Character Size Ranges
A scalable font cache must be allocated to print. Minimum cache size is 15. The
double byte fonts require five units of additional cache.
4: Bar Codes
Valid inputs for the bar code field b are letters: uppercase letters will print a humanreadable text below the bar code; lowercase letters will only print the bar code. For
example, entering a ‘p’ in the b field selects the Postnet bar code. Because the
Postnet font does not provide human-readable data, the uppercase P is not valid.
Other bar codes without a human-readable counterpart include u (MaxiCode) and z
(PDF417) – for additional model-specific restrictions see Appendix F.
For module-based bar codes, field d is the narrow bar width in dots (bar code module
size). For consistent results in all rotations for bar codes of this type, field d and field
c must have the same value. For ratio-based bar codes field c is the wide bar width in
dots (the numerator); field d is the narrow bar width in dots (the denominator). See
Appendix G for specific bar code information and variations in record format field
usage.
The eee height field represents the bar code (symbol) height. The valid range (001 to
999) translates to bar heights ranging from .01 inch (.254 mm) to 9.99 inches (253.7
mm). For bar codes that require additional specified parameters, use the jj…j data
field as the location for these parameters. See the specific bar code for details in
Appendix G.
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
1, 2, 3 and 4
Rotation
A to Z and a to z (except P, u, v, z), or Wna where n is 1 to
9 and a is A to S and a to s. No n is an implied 1.
Bar Code
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Wide Bar
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Narrow Bar
a
b [bb]
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
145
Generating Label Formats
Field
eee
Valid Inputs
Meaning
001 to 999
Symbol Height
ffff
0000 to 9999
Row
gggg
See Appendix K.
jj…j
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed
by a termination character.
Column
Data
Table 8-10: Bar Code Record Structure
Placing 0 (zero) in both c and d will result in the default bar code ratio or module
size. Placing 000 (zero) in the symbol height field will result in the default bar code
height; see Appendix F for defaults.
5: Images
An image record is used to print an image that is stored in a memory module.
Images can be printed only in Rotation 1; see <STX>I.
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
a
1
Fixed Value
b
Y
Image
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Width Multiplier
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Height Multiplier
eee
000
Fixed Value
ffff
0000 to 9999
Row
gggg
See Appendix K.
jj…j
ASCII string, up to 16 characters followed by a termination
character.
Column
Image Name
Table 8-11: Image Fields
6: Graphics
Using graphics, the printer can produce lines, boxes, polygons, and circles. This
function is selected by entering an X in field b. The values entered in the data field
determine the sizes and shapes of the objects to be drawn. Forms can be created
using shaded boxes, complex logos, or even a simple diagonal line without the need
to download a graphics file to the printer. Generate each kind of graphic as described
below.
146
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Generating Label Formats
Lines and Boxes
Lines and boxes are drawn by values that determine column and row starting
position, length, width, and wall thickness of the line or box (see Appendix K).
Depending on the printer’s mode, all measurements are interpreted as inches/100
or millimeters/10 (see <STX>m). The data field jj…j is used to describe the line or
box dimensions.
Segment
Valid Inputs
Meaning
a
1
Fixed value
b
X
Line / Box
c
1
Fixed Value
d
1
Fixed Value
eee
000
Fixed Value
ffff
0000 to 9999
gggg
0000-9999; see Appendix K.
jj…j
Lhhhvvv
lhhhhvvvv
Bhhhvvvbbbsss
bhhhhvvvvbbbbssss
Row
Column
Line*
Line**
Box***
Box****
Table 8-12: Line and Box Parameters
Line*:
Lhhhvvv
Where:
L
hhh
vvv
Line**:
= “L” and specifies line drawing;
= horizontal width of line; and,
= vertical height of line.
lhhhhvvvv
Where:
l
hhhh
vvvv
Box***:
= “l” and specifies line drawing;
= horizontal width of line; and,
= vertical height of line.
Bhhhvvvbbbsss
Where:
Box****:
Where:
B
hhh
vvv
bbb
sss
=
=
=
=
=
“B” and specifies box drawing;
horizontal width of box;
vertical height of box;
thickness of bottom and top box edges; and,
thickness of box sides.
bhhhhvvvvbbbbssss
b
hhhh
vvvv
bbbb
ssss
=
=
=
=
=
“b” and specifies box drawing;
horizontal width of box;
vertical height of box;
thickness of bottom and top box edges; and,
thickness of box sides.
Boxes are hollow, while lines can be understood as filled-in boxes.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
147
Generating Label Formats
Polygons
Polygons are created by defining the positions of the corners, specifying a
number of data points that represent the vertices of the object, which can range
from a simple line (two points), or a triangle (three points), to any free-form
outline. Polygons may be filled with a variety of different patterns. All row/column
specifiers are interpreted as inches/100 or millimeters/10 depending on the
printer mode, (see <STX>m).
Record structure for a polygon (spaces added for readability):
1 X 11 ppp rrrr cccc P ppp bbbb rrrr cccc rrrr cccc … <CR>
Where:
1
Rotation (must be 1)
ppp
Fixed Value (001)
X
Graphic field ID
bbbb
Fixed Value (0001)
1
Multiplier (must be 1)
rrrr
Row of point 2
1
Multiplier (must be 1)
cccc
Column of point 2
ppp
Fill pattern #
rrrr
Row of point 3
rrrr
Row of point 1
cccc
Column of point 3
cccc
Column of point 1
P
Polygon ID (Fixed Value)
…
<CR>
Additional points
Termination character
Table 8-13: Polygon Record Structure
The points must be specified in the order to be drawn; the last point specified is
automatically connected to the first point to close the polygon. If only two points
are specified, a single line will be drawn. See Label Formatting Command A.
Circles
A circle is created by defining by its center point and radius. Circles can be filled
with a variety of different patterns (see Table 8-15). Row, column, and radius are
interpreted as inches (100) or millimeters (10) depending on printer mode.
Record structure for a circle (spaces have been added for readability):
1 X 11 fff rrrr cccc C ppp bbbb rrrr <CR>
Where:
148
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Generating Label Formats
1
Rotation (must be 1)
cccc
Column of the center point
X
Graphic field
C
Circle ID (Fixed Value)
1
Multiplier (must be 1)
ppp
Fixed Value (001)
1
Multiplier (must be 1)
bbbb
Fixed Value (0001)
fff
Fill pattern number
rrrr
Radius of the circle
rrrr
Row of the center point
<CR>
Termination character
Table 8-14: Circle Record Structure
Fill Patterns
Pattern Number
Description
0
No Pattern
1
Solid Black
2
6% Black
3
12% Black
4
25% Black
5
38% Black
6
50% Black
7
Diamonds
8
Circles
9
Right Diagonal Lines
10
Left Diagonal Lines
11
Grid
Example
Table 8-15: Fill Patterns
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
149
Generating Label Formats
Examples (with spaces added for readability):
1: Triangle
The record:
1 X 11 000 0010 0010 P 001 0001 0040 0025 0010 0040<CR>
Produces a triangle with no fill pattern:
(row 0040, column 0025)
(row 0010, column 0010)
(row 0010, column 0040)
2: Rectangle with Fill
The record:
1 X 11 004 0010 0010 P 001 0001 0050 0010 0050 0200 0010 0200<CR>
Produces a rectangle filled with pattern 4 (25% Black):
(row 0010, column 0010)
(row 0050, column 0200)
3: Circle
The record:
1 X 11 000 0100 0100 C 001 0001 0025<CR>
Produces a circle centered at row 0100, column 0100 with a radius of 0025 and
no fill pattern:
4: Circle with Fill
The record:
1 X 11 009 0100 0100 C 001 0001 0025<CR>
Produces a circle centered at row 0100, column 0100 with a radius of 0025 and
filled with pattern 9 (right diagonal lines):
150
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Generating Label Formats
Advanced Format Attributes
Two different advanced formatting attributes extend the text presentation capabilities.
The first format attribute allows a set of label format records to make a state change
that modifies the font attributes of any following DPL text records. The second format
attribute provides a means of inserting text and font formatting commands directly into
the DPL data stream via a command delimiter structure. All label formats begin by
default with attributes disabled.
The table below represents the current list of font attributes available to the user. Note
that these commands are delimited by the \<xxx> sequence (where xxx is from the list
below).
Command
Units
Purpose
FB
+/-
Turns on or off font boldfacing.
FI
+/-
Turns on or off font italicization.
FU
+/-
Turns on or off underlining of string.
FPn
Points
Specifies the vertical point size of the
following text relative to the base line.
FSn
Points
Specifies the horizontal point size of the
following text relative to the base line.
Notes
minus ‘-’ is disable; or,
plus ‘+’ is enable
FR[+/-]n
Degrees
Specifies the rotation of the base line,
relative to the original print direction of the
record.
If a + or – precedes the
numeric value, then the
direction is relative to the
current print direction.
Table 8-16: Advanced Format Attributes
These commands are only valid for “scalable” fonts, such as Internal Font 9, S00, S01,
or downloaded TrueType scalable fonts. (Some models have limited standard font sets
and capabilities; see the notes below for applicability of commands and consult the
appropriate Operator’s Manual for available standard and optional font sets.)
For example, the first format attribute command can be illustrated as follows. The text
below and the resulting label (Figure 1) are examples of a current DPL format:
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
151
Generating Label Formats
<STX>L
D11
1911S0102600040P018P018Old
1911S0102000040P018P018Old
1911S0101400040P018P018Old
1911S0100800040P018P018Old
1911S0100200040P018P018Old
E
DPL
DPL
DPL
DPL
DPL
World
World
World
World
World
Figure 1
If the DPL format is modified as follows, the resulting label (Figure 2) is printed:
<STX>L
D11
FA+
FB+
1911S0102600040P018P018New
FU+I+
1911S0102000040P018P018New
FI-U+B1911S0101400040P018P018New
FU-B+
1911S0100800040P018P018New
FB+I+U+
1911S0100200040P018P018New
FB-U-IE
DPL World
DPL World
DPL World
DPL World
DPL World
Figure 2
Note that if all format commands after the first FB+ were deleted the entire label would
have been printed with bold scalable fonts. This is what is meant by a state change.
Once invoked, that command is in affect until turned off or the label format is
terminated with the “E” “s” or the “X” command.
The second format attribute command is inserted into the text data stream and
delimited by the angle brackets “<>“ This structure takes the form of \<command>. An
example of this command is as follows:
152
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Generating Label Formats
<STX>L
D11
A2
FA+
1911S0105000020P018P018DPL allows \<FP36FS36>FONT\<FS10FP10> sizes
\<FS8FP12>in the string
1911S0103500100P018P018\<FR80>D\<FR-5>P\<FR-5>L\<FR-5> \<FR-5>l\<FR5>e\<FR->t\<FR-5>s\<FR-5> \<FR-5>y\<FR-5>o\<FR-5>u\<FR-5> \<FR-5>w\<FR5>r\<FR-5>i\<FR-5>t\<FR-5>e\<FR-5> \<FR-5>i\<FR-5>n\<FR-5> \<FR-5>c\<FR5>i\<FR-5>r\<FR-5>c\<FR-5>l\<FR-5>e\<FR-5>s\<FR-5> \<FR-5>t\<FR-5>o\<FR5>o\<FR-5>!
1911S0102400040P018P018\<FR+45>DPL allows \<FB+>Rotations\<FB-FR-90> in
the string
1911S0102000040P018P018DPL allows \<FB+>BOLD\<FB-> in the string
FU+
1911S0101400040P018P012DPL allows \<FI+>ITALICS\<FI-> in the string
FI+U1911S0101000040P018P012DPL allows \<FB+I+>COMBINATIONS\<FB-I-> in the
string
FB+I1911S0100600040P018P018DPL allows \<FB+>BOLD\<FB-> in the string
FU+I+
1911S0100200040P018P018DPL allows \<FB+>BOLD\<FB-> in the string
FB-U-IE
Figure 3 is an example of the output from this DPL command
stream. The user has the ability to change the point and set
size of the font within the DPL command record. In addition,
the angle of the baseline may be specified relative to the
current orientation of the record. (For example, the command
\<FR+45> will rotate the baseline forty five degrees in the
positive direction from the default print direction.)
Refer to Section 8 for more information regarding the DPL
record format for a scalable font text string.
Figure 3
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
153
Generating Label Formats
154
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix A
ASCII Control Chart
Ctrl @
Ctrl A
Ctrl B
Ctrl C
Ctrl D
Ctrl E
Ctrl F
Ctrl G
Ctrl H
Ctrl I
Ctrl J
Ctrl K
Ctrl L
Ctrl M
Ctrl N
Ctrl O
Ctrl P
Ctrl Q
Ctrl R
Ctrl S
Ctrl T
Ctrl U
Ctrl V
Ctrl W
Ctrl X
Ctrl Y
Ctrl Z
Ctrl [
Ctrl \
Ctrl ]
Ctrl ^
Ctrl _
Char
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
NUL
SOH
STX
EXT
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
!
“
#
$
%
&
Ô
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
155
Appendix A – ASCII Control Chart
Char
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
î
ì
Ä
Å
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
ÿ
Ö
Ü
ø
£
Ø
x
ƒ
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
á
í
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
°
¿
®
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
1/2
1/4
¡
¯
²
³
´
Á
Â
À
©
¹
»
¢
¥
Char
ã
Ã
ð
Ð
Ê
Ë
È
Í
Î
Ï
Ì
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
Ó
ß
Ô
Ò
õ
Õ
µ
þ
Þ
Ú
Û
Ù
ý
Ý
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
±
3/4
÷
¸
º
¨
·
Table A-1: ASCII Chart
• For hardware handshake XON/XOFF commands:
o XON
o XOFF
=Ctrl Q (DC1)
=Ctrl S (DC3)
• The Euro currency character ( ) has been added to the table above at 255 (FF) as a
Datamax standard for resident bitmapped fonts 0,1,2,3,4,5,6, and 9 (CG Triumvirate).
156
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix B
Sample Programs
‘C’ Language Program
The following sample ‘C’ program is included for reference. Figure B-1 shows the output
generated by this program.
/
DMX SERIES Sample C program
/
# include <stdio.h>
main ()
{
char pcs = “590”;
char desc = “10K OHM 1/4 WATT”;
fputs (“DMX Printer Test Program\n”, stdout);
fputs (“\x02L\n”, stdaux);
fputs (“H07\n” stdaux);
fputs (“D11\n”, stdaux);
/ STX L – Enter Label
Formatting /
/ Enter Heat Setting of 7 /
/ Set Width and Height Dot
Size /
fprintf (stdaux, “191108010000025%s\n”,desc);/
/
Select smooth Font
fprintf (stdaux, “1a6210000000050%sPCS\n”, pcs);/ Select Bar code
/
type ‘a’
fputs (“E\n”, stdaux);
/ End Label format mode and
print /
}
10K OHM 1/4 WATT
Figure B-1: Sample Label
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
157
Appendix B – Sample Programs
ASCII text file
The following ASCII text file will also generate the label shown in Figure B-1.
^BL
H07
D11
19110080100002510K OHM 1/4 WATT<CR>
1a6210000000050590PCS<CR>
E<CR>
VB Application Generating DPL
The following sample is a Visual Basic program that displays a database record on the
screen. A user can scroll through the records and then print a selected one. Five bar
codes are printed along with data fields and headings.
‘Printer DPL Controls
Dim CharSet As String‘<STX> byte
Const StartLabel = “L”
Const EndLabel = “E”
Const PrintDensity = “D11”
‘Printer DPL Data to position dynamic information on label
Const OrderTxt = “191100704150010”‘font 9, 24 pt
Const OrderBC = “1a6205004200120”
Const CustomerTxt = “191100603600010”
Const
Const
Const
Const
Item1NO = “191100403250010”
Item1BC = “1a6204002870010”
Item1Txt = “191100402690010”
Item1Qty = “191100603070260”
‘DPL Fixed Items on label
Const Itm1 = “191100303400010Item #”
Const Qty1 = “191100303400250Quantity”
Const Boxsize = “B065035002002”
Const BoxPos1 = “1X1100003050240”
Const Image1 = “1Y3300004750010SLANT1”
Dim Fixed As String
‘Item Variables
Dim Item1 As String
Dim PrintLabel As String
Dim OrderData As String
‘Print label by clicking print button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdPrint_Click()
158
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix B – Sample Programs
‘Concatenate all the dynamic data fields with the constant header
strings, terminated with <cr> Chr$(13)
OrderData = OrderTxt & txtOrderNo.Text & Chr$(13) & OrderBC &
txtOrderNo.Text & Chr$(13) & CustomerTxt & txtCustomer.Text
Item1 = Item1NO & txtItem1.Text & Chr$(13) & Item1BC &
txtItem1.Text & Chr$(13) & Item1Txt & txtItem1Desc.Text & Chr$(13)
& Item1Qty & txtItem1Qty.Text
‘Concatinate entire label format and send out serial port
PrintLabel = CharSet & MaxLength & Chr$(13) & CharSet &
StartLabel & Chr$(13) & PrintDensity & Chr$(13) & Image1 & Chr$(13)
& OrderData & Chr$(13) & Item1 & Chr$(13) & Fixed & Chr$(13) &
EndLabel
Comm1.Output = PrintLabelEnd Sub
‘Display the record form on the screen
Private Sub Form_Load()
Fixed = Itm1 & Chr$(13) & Chr$(13) & Qty1 & Chr$(13) & Chr$(13)
& BoxPos1 & Boxsize & Chr$(13)
CharSet = Chr$(126) ‘Alternate <stx> character ~
MComm.PortOpen = 1‘Open the serial port
End Sub
‘Exit the program by clicking Exit button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdExit_Click()
Comm1.PortOpen = 0‘Close down the serial port
End
End Sub
VB Application interfacing via Windows Driver
Create a form similar to the one shown here.
VERSION 5.00
Begin VB.Form Form1
Caption
=
ClientHeight
=
ClientLeft
=
ClientTop
=
ClientWidth
=
LinkTopic
=
MaxButton
=
MinButton
=
ScaleHeight
=
ScaleWidth
=
“Datamax Test Print”
1065
60
345
2325
“Form1”
0
‘False
0
‘False
1065
2325
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
159
Appendix B – Sample Programs
StartUpPosition =
3 ‘Windows Default
Begin VB.ComboBox cmboFonts
Height
=
315
Left
=
90
TabIndex
=
2
Text
=
“Font List”
Top
=
45
Width
=
2130
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdExit
Caption
=
“Quit”
Height
=
465
Left
=
1350
TabIndex
=
1
Top
=
495
Width
=
825
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdPrint
Caption
=
“Print”
Height
=
465
Left
=
90
TabIndex
=
0
Top
=
495
Width
=
870
End
End
Attribute VB_Name = “Form1”
Attribute VB_GlobalNameSpace = False
Attribute VB_Creatable = False
Attribute VB_PredeclaredId = True
Attribute VB_Exposed = False
‘Print label by clicking print button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdPrint_Click()
‘font name as seen in application font list box
‘if not found, driver will inform GDI to generate an
‘image that will be downloaded
Printer.FontName = cmboFonts.Text
‘1,440 twips equals one inch
Printer.Height = 6480
‘4.5 inches in twips
Printer.Width = 5760
‘4 inches in twips
Printer.CurrentX = 1440
‘1 inch (column position)
Printer.CurrentY = 2160
‘2 inches (row position)
Printer.Print “0123456789”
Printer.EndDoc
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
Dim X As Printer
Dim I As Integer ‘Used for the font list
‘ search for printer queue name / driver name
For Each X In Printers
If X.DeviceName = “Datamax I-4206” Then ‘printer found
‘ Set printer as system default.
Set Printer = X
For I = 0 To Printer.FontCount - 1 ‘ Determine number of fonts.
160
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix B – Sample Programs
cmboFonts.AddItem Printer.Fonts(I)
‘ Put each font into list
box.
Next I
Exit For
End If
Next
End Sub
‘Exit the program and shut down the serial port
‘by clicking Exit button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdExit_Click()
End
End Sub
When the program is run, the combo box should be populated with the available fonts as shown
below.
VB Application to Send Raw Data via Printer Driver
This is a sample Visual Basic program that checks for any printer driver attached to
“LPT1”. If one is installed then a DPL file can be printed via the print driver. **Note that
this does not have to be a Datamax DPL print driver. DPL is created by the application
and sent to LPT1.
To begin, a global variable called SelPrinter must be defined as a string. Then use the
following code to create a .frm file.
VERSION 5.00
Object = “{F9043C88-F6F2-101A-A3C9-08002B2F49FB}#1.2#0”; “comdlg32.ocx”
Begin VB.Form Form1
Caption
=
“Form1”
ClientHeight
=
1290
ClientLeft
=
165
ClientTop
=
735
ClientWidth
=
3750
LinkTopic
=
“Form1”
MaxButton
=
0
‘False
MinButton
=
0
‘False
ScaleHeight
=
1290
ScaleWidth
=
3750
StartUpPosition =
3 ‘Windows Default
Begin MSComDlg.CommonDialog CommonDialog1
Left
=
1635
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
161
Appendix B – Sample Programs
Top
=
765
_ExtentX
=
847
_ExtentY
=
847
_Version
=
393216
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdClose
Cancel
=
-1 ‘True
Caption
=
“Close”
Height
=
372
Left
=
2400
TabIndex
=
3
Top
=
735
Width
=
972
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdStoreImage
Caption
=
“Print”
Default
=
-1 ‘True
Height
=
372
Left
=
240
TabIndex
=
2
Top
=
735
Width
=
972
End
Begin VB.TextBox txtFile
Height
=
288
Left
=
120
TabIndex
=
1
Top
=
360
Width
=
3492
End
Begin VB.Label Label1
Caption
=
“File Name”
Height
=
255
Left
=
120
TabIndex
=
0
Top
=
135
Width
=
1455
End
Begin VB.Menu File
Caption
=
“&File”
Begin VB.Menu open
Caption
=
“&Open”
End
Begin VB.Menu exit
Caption
=
“&Exit”
Shortcut
=
^Q
End
End
End
Attribute VB_Name = “Form1”
Attribute VB_GlobalNameSpace = False
Attribute VB_Creatable = False
Attribute VB_PredeclaredId = True
Attribute VB_Exposed = False
Option Explicit
‘**********************************
#If Win32 Then
162
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix B – Sample Programs
Private Type DOC_INFO_1
pDocName As String
pOutputFile As String
pDatatype As String
End Type
#End If ‘WIN32 Types
‘**********************************
‘** Function Declarations:
#If Win32 Then
Private Declare Function OpenPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” Alias “OpenPrinterA”
(ByVal pPrinterName As String, phPrinter As Long, ByVal pDefault As Long) ‘
Third param changed to long
Private Declare Function StartDocPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” Alias
“StartDocPrinterA” (ByVal hPrinter As Long, ByVal Level As Long, pDocInfo As
DOC_INFO_1)
Private Declare Function StartPagePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter
As Long)
Private Declare Function WritePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter As
Long, pBuf As Any, ByVal cdBuf As Long, pcWritten As Long)
Private Declare Function EndDocPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter As
Long)
Private Declare Function EndPagePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter
As Long)
Private Declare Function ClosePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter As
Long)
#End If ‘WIN32
Dim ch As String * 1, f1 As Integer, loadfile As String
Private Sub cmdOpenFile_Click()
On Error GoTo ErrHandler
‘ Set Filters
CommonDialog1.Filter = “All Files (*.*)|*.*”
‘Specify Default Filter
CommonDialog1.FilterIndex = 1
‘Display Open dialog box
CommonDialog1.ShowOpen
loadfile = CommonDialog1.FileName
Label2.Caption = loadfile
Exit Sub
ErrHandler:
Exit Sub
End Sub
Private Sub cmdStoreImage_Click()
Dim hPrinter&
Dim jobid&
Dim res&
Dim written&
Dim printdata$
Dim docinfo As DOC_INFO_1
loadfile = Form1.txtFile.Text
If loadfile = ““ Then
MsgBox “You must Open a file to send”, vbExclamation
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
163
Appendix B – Sample Programs
Exit Sub
End If
‘ Open file.
f1 = FreeFile
Open loadfile For Binary As f1
‘ Open printer for printing
res& = OpenPrinter(SelPrinter, hPrinter, 0)
If res = 0 Then
MsgBox “Unable to open the printer”
Exit Sub
End If
docinfo.pDocName = “MyDoc”
docinfo.pOutputFile = vbNullString
docinfo.pDatatype = vbNullString
jobid = StartDocPrinter(hPrinter, 1, docinfo)
Call StartPagePrinter(hPrinter)
Call WritePrinter(hPrinter, ByVal printdata$, Len(printdata$), written)
While Not EOF(1)
Get #f1, , ch
printdata$ = ch
Call WritePrinter(hPrinter, ByVal printdata$, Len(printdata$),
written)
Wend
Call EndPagePrinter(hPrinter)
Call EndDocPrinter(hPrinter)
Call ClosePrinter(hPrinter) ‘ Close when done
‘ Close file
Close #1
MsgBox “File sent to print spooler.”, vbExclamation
End Sub
Private Sub cmdClose_Click()
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub exit_Click()
End
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
Dim X As Printer
‘ search for printer queue name / driver name
For Each X In Printers
If X.Port = “LPT1:” Then ‘printer found
‘ Set printer as system default.
SelPrinter = X.DeviceName
Exit For
End If
Next
End Sub
Private Sub lpt2_Click()
End Sub
164
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix B – Sample Programs
Private Sub open_Click()
CommonDialog1.ShowOpen
loadfile = CommonDialog1.FileName
txtFile.Text = loadfile
End Sub
Private Sub Printer_Click()
CommonDialog1.ShowPrinter
End Sub
This will create the form pictured below:
It may be necessary to remove and reinsert the common dialog control due to Windows®
registry issues.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
165
Appendix B – Sample Programs
166
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix C
Available Fonts – Sizes, References, and Samples
All character bitmapped fonts available on the printers are described in this section. Each
font has a name (Font ID) associated with it for use in programming. Use the Font Number
(in the left column of Table C-1) in field b of the Format Record header to cause the printer
to use the corresponding font.
Fonts 0 through 8 use the slash zero (Ø) conventions for distinguishing between the zero
and the alphabetic O. The slash can be removed with the label formatting command z.
These fonts are non-proportional (monospaced). Therefore, all of the characters take up the
same amount of space when printed. This is helpful when using variable data in a fixed
area. The sizes of these fonts are shown on the following pages.
The CG Triumvirate font number 9 is a proportional font. Each character will take up a
different amount of space when printed. For example, the letter W will be wider than the
letter I.
Font
Number
Valid ASCII Characters (decimal)
0
32-127, 255
1
32-168, 171, 172, 225, 255
2
32-168, 171, 172, 225, 255
3
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157,
165, 168, 225, 255
4
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157,
165, 168, 225, 255
5
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157,
165, 168, 225, 255
6
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157,
165, 168, 225, 255
7
32-126
8
32, 48-57, 60, 62, 67, 69, 78, 83, 84, 88, 90
9
Dependent upon selected symbol set; see Appendix H.
Use with Record
Structure Type
Internal
Bitmapped
Fonts
Scalable Font
Table C-1: Valid Human-Readable Font (Internal) ASCII Characters
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
167
Appendix C – Available Fonts
Font sizes are dependent upon the print head resolution of the printer used. The tables
below contain a listing of the font sizes by resolution with dimensions given in dots.
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Height
Width
Spacing
Point Size
7
13
18
27
36
52
64
32
28
5
7
10
14
18
18
32
15
15
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
5
5
2.5
4.6
6.4
9.6
12.8
18.4
22.7
11.3
9.9
Table C-2: Font Sizes @ 203 DPI Resolution
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Height
Width
Spacing
Point Size
10
19
27
40
53
77
95
47
41
7
10
15
21
27
27
47
22
22
1
3
3
3
4
4
6
7
7
2.4
4.6
6.5
9.6
12.7
18.5
22.8
11.3
9.8
Table C-3: Font Sizes @ 300 DPI Resolution
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Height
Width
Spacing
Point Size
14
26
36
54
72
104
128
64
56
10
14
20
28
36
36
64
30
30
2
4
4
4
6
6
8
10
10
2.5
4.6
6.4
9.6
12.8
18.4
22.7
11.3
9.9
Table C-4: Font Sizes @ 406 DPI Resolution
168
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix C – Available Fonts
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Height
Width
Spacing
Point Size
20
38
54
80
106
154
190
94
82
14
20
30
42
54
54
94
44
44
2
6
6
6
8
8
12
14
14
2.4
4.6
6.5
9.6
12.7
18.5
22.8
11.3
9.8
Table C-5: Font Sizes @ 600 DPI Resolution
Internal Smooth Font 9 (Smooth Font) Point Size Specifiers
Label format records with font code 9 (in Format Record header field b) can specify any of
the font sizes in the leftmost column of the table below. The corresponding specification in
either column labeled Ann or 0nn is used in the font size/selection (eee height) field to
select the desired font size. Optional font sets may contain subsets of those described here.
For an optional font set that generates these fonts via scalable font technology, the
character mapping for this font is the selected scalable symbol set (see Appendix E).
In the sample format below, a 300 DPI printer will use 4-point smooth font to produce a
printed label with the words “four point font”. Sample format:
<STX>L<CR>
1911A0400100010four point font<CR>
E<CR>
Point Size
Smooth Font 9 Font Size Specification Syntax
Ann
203 DPI
[1]
300, 400, & 600 DPI
[2]
0nn
4
A04
5
A05
000 [3]
6
A06
A06
001
8
A08
A08
002
10
A10
A10
003
12
A12
A12
004
14
A14
A14
005
18
A18
A18
006
24
A24
A24
007
30
A30
A30
008
36
A36
A36
009
48
A48
A48
010
72
A72
[1]
All fonts greater than A36 are created from multiples of smaller fonts, 2x or 3x, as available.
[2]
All fonts greater than A24 are created from multiples of smaller fonts, 2x or 3x, as available.
[3]
Available at 300 DPI and greater print resolutions only.
Table C-6: Internal Bitmapped (Smooth Font) 9 Size Chart
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
169
Appendix C – Available Fonts
Internal Bitmapped and Smooth Font Samples
The identifying number is used in the Format Record header field b to cause the printer to
use the corresponding font.
The Euro currency character (
) has been added to Fonts 0 – 6.
0: Identifies a 96-character alphanumeric font, uppercase and lowercase.
1: Identifies a 145-character uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric font that includes
desenders and ascenders.
2: Identifies a 138-character alphanumeric upper and lowercase font.
3: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.
4: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.
170
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix C – Available Fonts
5: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric upper case font.
6: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.
7: Identifies a font that prints OCR-A, size I.
8: Identifies a font that prints OCR-B, size III.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
171
Appendix C – Available Fonts
9: Identifies the Internal CG Triumvirate font. Point sizes are selected by the number in the
Format Record header eee height field; see Table C-6.
172
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix D
Reset Codes
The most common transmitted error codes are:
Uppercase “R”
This code is sent every time the printer is turned ON, signaling a hardware reset.
Uppercase “T”
This code signals a software reset. A software reset is made by sending the command
sequence to the printer or by performing a reset using the front panel keys.
Lowercase “v”
There is an input buffer overflow situation, caused when an overflow of data is sent to
the printer.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
173
Appendix D – Reset Codes
174
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix E
Single Byte Symbol Sets
The following tables include some of the sixty-six standard symbol sets. Not all of these
symbol sets can be used with every font. Symbol sets containing the Euro currency
character are W1, WE, WG, WL, WT, WR, and PM; see Appendix I, and the <STX>y
command.
The following sets were produced using a Windows®-based PC-compatible with a United
States keyboard properties layout. Results may vary if printing this document using a
different input locale.
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
0
1
2
(DN) ISO 60: Danish / Norwegian Symbol Set
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
0
1
2
3
4
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
“
–
(
ª
‘
¶
“
±
)
º
‘
§
µ
×
«
æ
ˆ
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
Æ
k
æ
,
<
L
Ø
l
ø
=
M
Å
m
å
.
>
N
^
n
¯
/
?
O
_
o
▒
(DT) DeskTop Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
†
‰
‡
•
©
®
o
™
¢
–
—
=
°
′
″
»
Æ
¨
‚
ð
˜
„
Ð
ˇ
‘
ij
˘
¼
¡
IJ
fi
¬
/
fl
¦
÷
…
‘
³
¥
ø
˛
¤
ƒ
þ
l
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
”
(
8
H
X
h
x
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
þ
n
½
¿
¾
Pt
t
°
t
·
¹
ℓ
œ
¯
²
£
Œ
,
Ø
'
ß
Þ
175
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
176
0
1
2
3
(E1) ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
¨
©
ª
°
À
Ð
à
ð
¸
¸
¹
È
Ø
è
ø
É
Ù
é
ù
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
½
Í
Ý
í
ý
®
¾
Î
Þ
î
þ
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
0
1
2
3
4
(E2) ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 Set
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
˘
Ł
ł
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
·
“
Í
Ý
í
ý
Z
º
Á
Â
Ð
Ó
á
â
ó
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
Ö
ö
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
¨
¸
°
¹
É
Š
š
Ø
B
C
D
E
F
Ë
Ú
é
Ü
ë
ú
ü
z
Î
ß
î
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
0
1
2
3
4
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø
©
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
½
Í
®
¾
Î
í
I
î
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
0
1
2
3
4
(FR) ISO 69: French Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
à
P
µ
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
£
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
º
k
é
,
<
L
ç
l
ù
=
M
§
m
è
.
>
N
^
n
¨
/
?
O
_
o
▒
0
1
2
3
(GR) ISO 21: German Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
!
“
#
$
%
&
-
.
/
0
§
P
‘
p
1
A
Q
a
q
2
B
R
b
r
3
C
S
c
s
4
D
T
d
t
5
E
U
e
u
6
F
V
f
v
=
M
Ü
m
ü
>
N
^
n
ß
?
O
_
o
▒
0
1
2
3
4
0
§
P
ù
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
£
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
º
À
à
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
(E5) ISO 8859/5 Latin 5 Set
5
6
7
8
9
A
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
(
)
*
+
8
H
X
h
x
9
I
Y
i
y
:
J
Z
j
z
;
K
Ä
k
ä
̗
<
L
Ö
l
ö
(IT) ISO 15: Italian Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
+
;
K
º
k
à
,
<
L
ç
l
ò
=
M
é
m
è
.
>
N
^
n
ì
/
?
O
_
o
▒
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
̓
7
G
W
g
w
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
177
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
1
2
3
4
(LG) Legal Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
P
°
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
0
1
2
3
4
0
@
P
`
p
Ä
ê
†
∞
¿
–
‡
!
1
A
Q
a
q
Å
ë
º
±
¡
—
`
Ò
“
2
B
R
b
r
Ç
í
¢
≤
¬
“
‚
Ú
#
3
C
S
c
s
É
ì
£
≥
√
“
„
Û
$
4
D
T
d
t
Ñ
î
§
¥
f
‘
‰
Ù
0
1
2
3
0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
0
@
☺
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
178
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
░
└
╨
a
≡
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
▒
┴
╤
ß
±
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
(MC) Macintosh Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
%
5
E
U
e
u
Ö
ï
•
µ
≈
‘
Â
⎢
&
6
F
V
f
v
Ü
ñ
¶
∂
Δ
÷
Ê
ˆ
‘
7
G
W
g
w
á
ó
ß
Σ
«
◊
Á
˜
(
8
H
X
h
x
à
ò
®
∏
»
ÿ
Ë
¯
)
9
I
Y
i
y
â
ô
©
π
…
Ÿ
È
˘
A
B
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
§
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
ä
ö
™
∫
/
Í
˙
(PC) PC-8 Code Page 437 Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
♥
♦
♣
×
!!
¶
“
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
▓
┬
╥
└
≥
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
│
├
╙
π
≤
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
ñ
┤
─
╘
∑
⌠
C
D
E
F
,
L
®
l
¶
=
M
]
m
†
.
¢
N
©
n
™
/
?
O
_
o
▒
B
C
D
E
F
+
;
K
[
k
{
ã
õ
´
ª
À
¤
Î
º
,
<
L
\
l
|
å
ú
¨
°
Ã
=
M
]
m
}
ç
ù
/
?
O
_
o
<
>
Ï
¸
Ì
¨
.
>
N
^
n
~
é
û
Æ
æ
Œ
fi
Ó
˛
B
C
♂
D
♀
E
♫
F
∟
,
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¼
╝
╠
▄
↔
s
t
=
M
]
m
}
ì
¥
¡
╜
═
▌
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
Pt
«
╛
╬
▐
∞
ф
є
■
/
?
O
_
o
⌂
Å
ƒ
»
┐
╧
▀
∩
§
♠
-
↨
↑
↓
→
←
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ò
Ñ
╡
┼
╒
σ
⌡
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
û
ª
╢
╞
╓
µ
÷
‘
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
°
╖
╟
╫
Τ
≈
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
ÿ
¿
╕
╚
╪
ф
○
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
⌐
╣
╔
┘
Θ
▪
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
¬
║
╩
┌
Ω
▪
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
¢
½
╗
╦
█
δ
√
=
n
≠
Ω
Õ
2
è
ü
Ø
Ø
œ
fl
Ô
ˇ
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
0
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
C0
D0
E0
F0
2
C
♂
D
♀
E
♫
F
∟
,
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
ʼn
╝
╠
▄
↔
s
t
=
M
]
m
}
ì
Ø
¡
╜
═
▌
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
Ŀ
³
╛
╬
▐
δ
√
∞
ф
є
■
/
?
O
_
o
⌂
Å
ŀ
¤
┐
╧
▀
∩
B
C
♂
D
♀
E
♫
F
∟
,
<
L
\
l
|
î
↔
s
t
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
×
«
/
?
O
_
o
⌂
♥
♦
♣
♠
×
!!
¶
§
▬
↨
↑
↓
→
←
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ò
Ñ
╡
┼
╒
σ
⌡
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
û
õ
╢
╞
╓
µ
÷
‘
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
Õ
╖
╟
╫
Τ
≈
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
ÿ
¿
╕
╚
╪
ф
○
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
ã
╣
╔
┘
Θ
▪
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
Ã
║
╩
┌
Ω
▪
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
ø
ℓ
╗
╦
█
(PE) PC-852 Latin 2 Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
░
└
╨
a
≡
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
▒
┴
╤
ß
±
“
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
▓
┬
╥
└
≥
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
│
├
╙
π
≤
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
ñ
┤
─
╘
∑
⌠
0
1
2
3
4
♥
♦
♣
♠
×
!!
¶
§
▬
↨
↑
↓
→
←
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
“
2
B
R
b
r
é
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
ç
(
8
H
X
h
x
ł
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
Ü
í
▒
ó
▓
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
│
ž
┤
Á
Ž
Â
╣
║
╗
╝
┴
Ð
ß
“
┬
├
Ë
─
┼
╩
┌
╦
█
╠
▄
═
ý
Ý
ͅ
̌
˘
╔
┘
Ú
¨
2
3
4
„
‚
“
☺
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
1
☺
00
10
(PD) PC-8 D/N, Code Page 437N Symbol Set
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
░
└
ð
Ó
╸
0
1
00
10
20
§
Í
Š
÷
Î
š
̧
°
(PI) PI Font Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
“
‘
‘
A
B
C
D
℠
<
®
©
«
§
h
ℒ
ℓ
∥
□
〈
〉
™
Δ
>
∇
40
::
Δ
60
℘
℘
┌
└
╭
╰
┼
├
─
┃┃
U
I
╓
╙
70
┐
┘
╯
╯
┬
┤
┴
│
⊔
⊓
╖
╜
̇
f
∑
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
╬
»
┓
¤
▀
´
´
¯
̌
2
Ł
30
50
˘
Ô
╚
n
■
E
F
»
¶
‹
›
◊
u
▒
179
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
0
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
1
☺
00
10
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
░
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
▒
(PM) PC-850 Multilingual Symbol Set (Default Symbol Set)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
♂
♀
¤
©
¨
«
l
“
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
▓
!!
¶
§
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
│
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
ñ
┤
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ò
Ñ
▂
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
û
ª
‘
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
°
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
ÿ
¿
Á
Â
À
©
Ã
╣
║
ĺ
╔

þ
¸
╚
Î
┘
Ù
“
D0
└
ð
┴
Ð
┬
Ê
├
Ë
─
È
┼
ı
ã
E0
F0
Ó
-
ß
±
Ô
=
Ò
¾
õ
¶
Õ
§
μ
÷
2
3
♥
″
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
▓
┬
╥
└
≥
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
│
├
╙
π
≤
0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
180
1
☺
!!
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
░
└
╨
a
≡
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
▒
┴
╤
ß
±
Þ
º
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
®
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
σ
⌡
µ
÷
Τ
≈
ф
○
Θ
▪
F
s
t
/
?
O
_
o
⌂
Å
ƒ
»
¨
=
M
]
m
}
ì
Ø
¡
·
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
╗
╝
¢
¥
╩
╦
╠
═
┐
Û
.
█
Ú
¹
▄
ý
³
╎
Ý
²
╬
Ì
C
D
s
t
‚
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¡
╝
╠
▄
=
M
]
m
}
ì
¥
¡
╜
═
▌
·
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
Pt
«
╛
╬
▐
∞
ф
є
■
/
?
O
_
o
⌂
Å
ƒ
»
┐
╧
▀
∩
(PT) PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
©
¨
«
l
◘
—
¶
§
$
%
&
‘
(
)
*
+
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
ö
ò
û
ù
ÿ
Ö
Ü
¢
⌐
ñ
Ñ
ª
°
¬
½
¼
┤
╡
╢
╖
╕
╣
║
╗
─
┼
╞
╟
╚
╔
╩
╦
█
╘
╒
╓
╫
╪
┘
┌
∑
⌠
E
‚
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¼
┑
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
ø
½
D
Ω
▪
δ
√
n
2
×
«
¯
▪
E
┐
¤
▀
´
F
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
(R8) Roman-8 Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
â
Å
Á
Þ
À
Ý
ê
î
Ã
þ
Â
ý
ô
Ø
ã
·
È
º
û
Æ
Ð
µ
Ê
Ç
á
å
ð
¶
Ë
ç
é
Í
Í
¾
Î
Ñ
ó
ø
Ì
—
Ï
ñ
ú
æ
Ó
¼
΄
¡
à
Ä
Ò
½
`
¿
è
ì
Õ
ª
ˆ
ò
Ö
õ
°
“
£
ù
Ü
Š
«
˜
¥
ä
É
š
Û
ƒ
ö
ß
Ÿ
±
£
¢
ü
Ô
ÿ
n
Ù
§
ë
Ï
Ú
»
0
1
2
3
(SP) ISO 17: Spanish Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
§
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
£
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
¡
k
º
,
<
L
Ñ
l
ñ
=
M
¿
m
ç
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
▒
B
C
D
E
F
+
;
K
Ä
k
ä
,
<
L
Ö
l
ö
=
M
Å
m
å
.
>
N
Ü
n
ü
/
?
O
_
o
▒
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
´
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
¤
0
1
2
3
(SW) ISO 11: Swedish Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
É
P
é
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
¤
4
D
T
d
t
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
181
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
182
0
1
2
3
4
(TS) PS Text Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
0
@
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
¡
`
¢
†
´
£
‡
ˆ
/
·
˜
¥
ƒ
¶
˘
§
•
·
¤
,
¨
‘
„
“
“
°
«
»
¸
‹
…
›
‰
“
fi
˛
fl
¿
ˇ
Ł
ł
Ø
ø
Œ
œ
º
ß
C
D
E
F
¯
A
B
C
D
E
F
—
Æ
æ
ª
⎢
(UK) ISO 4: United Kingdom Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
0
1
2
3
0
@
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
£
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
0
1
2
3
4
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
⎯
/
?
O
_
o
▒
(US) ISO 6: ASCII Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
·
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
0
1
2
3
0
@
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
(VI) Ventura International Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
C
D
E
F
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
↵
Þ
™
¤
ò
Ö
õ
º
›
£
ù
Ü
Š
«
¥
ä
É
š
•
⊔
Ú
§
ë
ï
Ú
»
■
Û
ƒ
ö
ß
Ÿ
□
‹
(VU) Ventura US Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
↵
→
⊔
■
□
$
4
D
T
d
t
„
‰
â
Å
Á
Œ
À
“
ê
î
Ã
œ
Â
“
ô
Ø
ã
¶
È
º
û
Æ
Ê
Ç
á
å
†
‡
0
1
2
3
4
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
„
‰
B
%
5
E
U
e
u
Ë
ç
é
í
Í
—
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
Î
Ñ
ó
ø
Ì
–
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
Ï
ñ
ú
æ
Ó
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
©
¡
à
Ä
Ò
(
8
H
X
h
x
©
“
“
º
¶
†
)
9
I
Y
i
y
®
¿
è
ì
Õ
ª
)
9
I
Y
i
y
®
*
:
J
Z
j
z
*
:
J
Z
j
z
™
§
‡
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
—
–
•
¢
ü
Ô
ÿ
…
¢
…
183
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
184
1
2
3
!
1
A
Q
a
q
°
À
Ð
à
ð
‘
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
“
2
B
R
b
r
‚
‘
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
#
3
C
S
c
s
ƒ
“
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
0
1
2
3
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
‚
‘
˘
˛
Â
#
3
C
S
c
s
0
@
P
`
p
€
0
@
P
`
p
€
º
‘
ˇ
±
Á
Ð
“
Ł
ł
Ó
á
â
ó
(W1) Windows 3.1 Latin 1 Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
$
4
D
T
d
t
„
“
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
%
5
E
U
e
u
…
•
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ
&
6
F
V
f
v
†
–
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
‘
7
G
W
g
w
‡
—
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
(
8
H
X
h
x
ˆ
˜
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø
)
9
I
Y
i
y
‰
™
©
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Š
š
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
(WE) Windows 3.1 Latin 2 Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
$
4
D
T
d
t
„
“
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
%
5
E
U
e
u
…
•
µ
&
6
F
V
f
v
†
–
¦
¶
Ö
ö
‘
7
G
W
g
w
‡
—
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
(
8
H
X
h
x
¨
¸
)
9
I
Y
i
y
‰
™
©
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Š
š
É
B
C
D
E
F
+
;
K
[
k
{
‹
›
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
,
<
L
\
l
|
Œ
œ
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
▒
½
Í
Ý
í
ý
®
¾
Î
Þ
î
þ
Ÿ
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
B
C
D
E
F
+
;
K
[
k
{
‹
›
«
»
Ë
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
/
?
O
_
o
▒
¬
“
Í
Ý
í
ý
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ž
ž
®
Ú
é
Ü
ë
ú
ü
Î
ß
î
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
0
1
2
3
0
@
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
°
À
Ð
à
ð
`
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
’
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø
©
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
(WO) Windows 3.0 Latin 1 Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
@
P
`
p
€
°
À
à
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
‘
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
2
3
˜
#
3
C
S
c
s
ƒ
“
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
2
B
R
b
r
,
‘
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
B
C
D
E
F
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
˜
/
?
O
_
o
▒
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
½
Í
Ý
í
ý
®
¾
Î
Þ
î
þ
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
(WT) Windows 3.1 Latin 5 Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
$
4
D
T
d
t
„
“
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
%
5
E
U
e
u
…
•
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ
&
6
F
V
f
v
†
–
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
‘
7
G
W
g
w
‡
—
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
(
8
H
X
h
x
ˆ
˜
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø
)
9
I
Y
i
y
‰
™
©
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Š
š
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
B
C
D
E
F
+
;
K
[
k
{
‹
›
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
‚
<
L
\
l
|
Œ
œ
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
▒
½
Í
®
¾
Î
í
l
î
Ÿ
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
185
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
186
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix F
Bar Code Summary Data
Bar code fonts have alpha names (left column, below). Uppercase alpha names will print bar codes with human-readable
interpretations, if supported. Lowercase alpha names will print bar codes only. Place the ID in field b of the Format Record
header to cause the printer to encode the data field using the associated bar code symbology; see Appendix G for details. See
Table F-2 for default values. The column labeled “Linear Scanner Supported” provides an indication that printers equipped with
a Linear Scanner are capable of recognizing the associated symbology.
Bar Code Characteristics
Bar
Code ID
Symbology
Valid ASCII Characters, decimal value
representation
Length
Checksum
Varies
No
32, 36, 37, 42, 43, 45-57, 65-90
A/a
Code 39
B/b
UPC-A
11
Yes
48-57 Numeric only. Option V used in the 6th &
7th position
C/c
UPC-E
6
Yes
48-57 Numeric only
D/d
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I2 of 5)
Varies
No
48-57 Numeric only
E/e
Code 128
Varies
M-103
F/f
EAN-13
12
Yes
48-57 Numeric only. Option V used in 7th & 8th
position
G/g
EAN-8
7
Yes
48-57 Numeric only
H/h
HBIC
Varies
M-43
Codabar
Varies
No
I/i
Linear
Scanner
Supported
32-127
32, 36-39, 42, 43, 45-57, 65-90
36, 43, 45-58, 65-68
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
187
Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data
Bar
Code ID
Symbology
J/j
Interleaved 2 of 5 w/ a modulo 10
checksum
K/k
Plessey
L/l
Interleaved 2 of 5 w/ modulo 10
checksum & bearer bars
Valid ASCII Characters, decimal value
representation
Length
Checksum
Varies
M-10
48-57 Numeric only
Up to 14
M-10
48-57 Numeric only. Option + is last character
for 2nd M-11 chksum
13
M-10
48-57 Numeric only
Linear
Scanner
Supported
M/m
2 digit UPC addendum
2
Yes
48-57 Numeric only
[1]
N/n
5 digit UPC addendum
5
Yes
48-57 Numeric only
[1]
O/o
Code 93
Varies
No
35-38, 42-58, 65-90, 97-122
p
Postnet
Varies
Yes
48-57 Numeric only
Q/q
UCC/EAN 128
19
Yes
48-57 Numeric only
R/r
UCC/EAN 128 K-Mart non-EDI
18
Yes
48-57 Numeric only
S/s
UCC/EAN 128 Random Weight
34 +
Yes
48-57 Numeric only
T/t
Telepen
Varies
Yes
Alphanumeric
84
Yes
Alphanumeric
Specified
Yes
Alphanumeric
1
No
A, B, C, D
Varies
Yes
All
Specified
Yes
All
Varies
Yes
All 8-bit values
U
UPS MaxiCode
u
UPS MaxiCode w/ Byte Count
v
FIM
z
PDF417
Z
PDF417 w/ Byte Count
W1c
DataMatrix
(continued)
188
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data
Bar
Code ID
Checksum
Specified
Yes
All 8-bit values
DataMatrix w/ Byte Count
W1d
QR Code – Auto format
Varies
Yes
Alphanumeric
W1D
QR Code – Manual format
Varies
Yes
Single-byte or Kanji double-byte
W1f
Aztec
Varies
Yes
All 8-bit values
W1F
Aztec w/ Byte Count
Specified
Yes
All 8-bit values
USD-8 (Code 11)
Varies
Yes
45, 48-57
W1I
EAN 128 w/auto subset switching [2]
Varies
Yes
32-127
W1J
Code 128 w/auto subset switching
Varies
Yes
32-127
W1k
RSS (six types) [2]
Varies
Yes
Numeric / Alphanumeric (type dependant)
Australia Post 4-State Bar Code
Varies
Yes
Numeric / Alphanumeric (type dependant)
W1p
USPS 4CB
Varies
No
48-57 Numeric only
W1R
UCC/EAN Code 128 K-MART NON EDI
18
Yes
48-57 Numeric only
W1t
TCIF Linked Bar Code 3 of 9 (TLC39)
Varies
Yes
Alphanumeric
W1z
MicroPDF417
Varies
Yes
All 8-bit values
W1Z
MicroPDF417 w/ Byte Count
Specified
Yes
All 8-bit values
W1M / m
[2]
Valid ASCII Characters, decimal value
representation
Length
W1C
W1G / g
[1]
Symbology
Linear
Scanner
Supported
Readable when using ‘Barcode Count’ method (see <STX>KcSN for details).
Available for display-equipped and EX2 models only.
Table F-1: Bar Code Characteristics
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
189
Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data
Bar Code Default Widths and Heights
Bar Code Default Data
203 DPI Resolutions
300 DPI Resolutions
400 DPI Resolutions
600 DPI Resolutions
Font
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
A
.40
6:2
.40
9:4
.40
12:4
.40
18:6
B
.80
3
.80
4
.80
6
.80
9
C
.80
3
.80
4
.80
6
.80
9
D
.40
5:2
.40
9:4
.40
10:4
.40
15:6
E
.40
2
.40
4
.40
4
.40
6
F
.80
3
.80
4
.80
6
.80
9
G
.80
3
.80
4
.80
6
.80
9
H
.40
6:2
.40
9:4
.40
12:4
.40
18:6
I
.40
6:3
.40
9:4
.40
12:6
.40
18:6
J
.40
5:2
.40
9:4
.40
10:4
.40
15:6
K
.40
5:2
.40
9:4
.40
10:4
.40
15:6
L
1.30
5:2
1.30
9:4
1.30
10:4
1.30
15:6
M
.90
3
.90
4
.90
6
.90
9
N
.80
3
.80
4
.80
6
.80
9
O
.40
6:3
.40
8:4
.40
12:6
.40
18:9
p
.08
N/A
.08
N/A
.08
N/A
.08
N/A
Q
1.40
2
1.40
4
1.40
4
1.40
6
R
1.40
2
1.40
4
1.40
4
1.40
6
S
1.40
2
1.40
3
1.40
4
1.40
6
T
.80
1
.80
1
.80
2
.80
3
U/u
1.00
N/A
1.00
N/A
1.00
N/A
1.00
N/A
v
.5
1
.5
1
.5
2
.5
3
(continued)
190
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data
203 DPI Resolutions
300 DPI Resolutions
400 DPI Resolutions
600 DPI Resolutions
Font
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
z
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Z/z
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
W1C/W1c
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
W1D/W1d
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
W1F/W1f
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
W1I
.40
2
.40
4
.40
4
.40
6
W1J
.40
2
.40
4
.40
4
.40
6
W1k
N/A
2
N/A
3
N/A
4
N/A
6
W1M/W1m
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
W1p
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
W1G/W1g
.5
5:2
.5
7:3
.5
9:4
.5
14:6
W1R
1.40
2
1.40
4
1.40
4
1.40
6
W1T
.40
6:2
.40
9:4
.40
12:4
.40
18:6
W1Z/W1z
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Table F-2: Bar Code Default Data
Some bar codes will be sensitive to Label Command ‘D’; see Label Formatting Commands for details.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
191
Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data
192
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G
Bar Code Details
Unless otherwise noted all bar codes depicted here were produced using the ratio/module
values of 00 and height fields of 000 to cause the printer to produce symbols using default
bar widths and height fields. See Appendix F for the default values.
A:
Code 3 of 9
Valid Characters: 0-9, A-Z, - . * $ / + % and the space character.
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The following example prints a 3 of 9 bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1A00000001501000123456789<CR>
121100000000100Barcode A<CR>
E
B:
UPC-A
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 12 digits. If the user provides 11 digits, the printer will compute the checksum.
If the user provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected
checksum. If it does not match, the printer will print out all zeros and the expected
checksum. See Appendix O.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width).
The following example prints a UPC-A bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1B000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode B<CR>
E
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
193
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
C:
UPC-E
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: Seven digits. If the user provides six digits, the printer will compute the
checksum. If the user provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the
expected checksum. If it does not match, the printer will print out all zeros and the
expected checksum.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width).
The following example prints a UPC-E bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1C0000000150100012345<CR>
121100000000100Barcode C<CR>
E
D:
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)
Valid Characters: 0-9
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a wide to narrow bar
ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1D000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode D<CR>
E
E:
Code 128
Valid Characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set.
Variable Length
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width, 3 times the
narrow bar width, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
194
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A, B, and C. The printer can be selected to
start on any code subset and switch to another within the data stream. The default code
subset is B; otherwise, the first character (A, B, C) of the data field determines the
subset. Subset switching is only performed in response to code switch command. These
commands are placed in the data to be encoded at appropriate locations; see Table G-1.
The use a B as the first character is recommended to prevent an A or C from changing
the subset.
Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the control and special characters. To select Code 128 Subset A, place an ASCII A
(DEC 65, HEX 41) before the data to be encoded.
Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the lowercase alphabetic and special characters. To select Code 128 Subset B, place
an ASCII B (DEC 66, HEX 42) before the data to be encoded. If no start character is sent
for the Code 128 font, Code 128 Subset B will be selected by default.
Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive, as well as
special characters. Code 128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric
data. To select Code 128 Subset C, place an ASCII C (DEC 67, HEX 43) before the data
to be encoded. Subset C can only encode an even number of numeric characters. When
the data to be encoded includes an odd number of numeric characters, the last character
causes the printer to automatically generate a ‘switch to subset B’ and encode the last
character appropriately in subset B.
Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are
considered special characters. To access these values, a two-character reference table is
built into the printer (see below).
For example, to encode FNC2 into a Code 128 Subset A bar code, send the ASCII “&”
(DEC 38, HEX 26) followed by the ASCII “B” (DEC 66, HEX 41).
Sample: ATEST&B123
ASCII
Encoded: TEST<FNC2>123
2 CHAR
CODE A
CODE B
CODE C
96
&A
FNC3
FNC3
-NA-
97
&B
FNC2
FNC2
-NA-
98
&C
SHIFT
SHIFT
-NA-
99
&D
CODEC
CODEC
-NA-
100
&E
CODEB
FNC4
CODEB
101
&F
FNC4
CODEA
CODEA
102
&G
FNC1
FNC1
FNC1
Table G-1: Special Character Handling
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
195
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Control Codes: By sending these control codes, control characters can be encoded into
a Code 128 Subset A bar code (e.g., ABC{DE will be encoded as ABC<ESC>DE):
Control Code in the Bar Code Data Stream
Encoded Control Character Result
`
NUL
a through z
1 - 26
{
ESC
|
FS
}
GS
~
RS
ASCII 127
US
The following example prints a Code 128 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1E000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode E<CR>
E
F:
EAN-13
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 13 digits. If the user provides 12 digits, the printer will compute the checksum.
If the user provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected
checksum. If it does not match, the printer will print all zeros and the expected
checksum. See Appendix O.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width).
The following example prints an EAN-13 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1F0000000150100012345678901<CR>
121100000000100Barcode F<CR>
E
196
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
G:
EAN-8
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 8 digits. If the user provides 7 digits, the printer will compute the checksum. If
the user provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected
checksum. If it does not match, the printer will print all zeros and the expected
checksum.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width).
The following example prints an EAN-8 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1G00000001501000123456<CR>
121100000000100Barcode G<CR>
E
H:
Health Industry Bar Code (HBIC)
Valid Characters: 0-9, A-Z, -$ /. %
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The host must supply leading “+”’s
The following example prints a HBIC bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1H0000000150050+0123456789<CR>
121100000000100Barcode H<CR>
E
I:
Codabar
Valid Characters: 0-9, A-D, -, ., $, :, /, + (comma is not valid)
Variable Length but requires at least three characters.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
Valid Codabar symbols require start and stop characters (A–D). These characters should
be placed in the data field along with other data to be included in the symbol.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
197
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
The following example prints a Codabar bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1I63040001501000A1234567890D<CR>
121100000000100Barcode I<CR>
E
J:
Barcode I
Interleaved 2 of 5 (with a Modulo 10 Checksum)
Valid Characters: 0-9
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a modulo 10 checksum
added and with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1J000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode J<CR>
E
K:
Plessey
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 1 to 14 digits
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
If a + character is the last data character, an additional MSI checksum will be added to
the bar code in place of the + character.
The following example prints a Plessey bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1K000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode K<CR>
E
198
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
L:
Interleaved 2 of 5 (with a Modulo 10 Checksum and Bearer Bars)
Valid Characters: 0-9
Variable Length: For the bearer bars to be printed, 13 characters are required.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a modulo 10 checksum
with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1 and bearer bars:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1L00000001501000123456789012<CR>
121100000000100Barcode L<CR>
E
M:
2-Digit UPC Addendum
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 2 digits.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width). Human readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above
the symbol.
The following example prints a 2 digit UPC bar code addendum:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1M000000015010042<CR>
121100000000100Barcode M<CR>
E
N:
5-Digit UPC Addendum
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 5 digits.
Valid bar widths: The width multiplier is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other
bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
Human readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the symbol.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
199
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
The following example prints a 5 digit UPC bar code addendum:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1N000000015010001234<CR>
121100000000100Barcode N<CR>
E
O:
Code 93
Valid Characters: 0-9, A-Z, -.$/+% and the space character.
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The width multiplier is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other
bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
The following example prints a Code 93 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1O0000000150100Datamax42<CR>
121100000000100Barcode O<CR>
E
p:
Postnet
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 5, 9 or 11 digits
Valid bar widths: The width and height multiplier values of 00 will produce a valid
Postnet symbol.
Usage: The bar code height field is ignored since the symbol height is United States
Postal Service specific. This bar code is to display the zip code on a letter or package for
the US Postal Service.
The following example prints a Postnet bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1p000000015010032569<CR>
121100000000100Barcode p<CR>
E
200
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Q:
UCC/EAN Code 128
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 19 digits.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width). Human readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above
the symbol.
The printer spreads a weighted module 103 check sum.
The following example prints a UCC/EAN Code 128 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1Q00000001501000123456789012345678<CR>
121100000000100Barcode Q<CR>
E
R:
UCC/EAN Code128 K-MART NON EDI
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 18 digits
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width). Human readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above
the symbol. (See W1R for an alternate.)
This bar code is set up according to K-MART specifications.
The following example prints a KMART bar code.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1R0000000150100012345678901234567<CR>
121100000000100Barcode R<CR>
E
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
201
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
S:
UCC/EAN Code 128 Random Weight
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: At least 34 digits.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width).
This bar code is commonly used by the food and grocery industry.
The following example prints a UCC/EAN Code 128 Random Weight bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1S000000015005001100736750292601193042032020018002110123456<CR>
121100000000100Barcode S<CR>
E
Barcode S
T:
Telepen
Valid Characters: All 128 ASCII characters.
Variable Length
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of the record is the width of the narrow bar in
dots. All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the
narrow bar width).
The following example prints a Telepen bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1T0000000150100ABCDEF<CR>
121100000000100Barcode T<CR>
E
202
Barcode T
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
u:
UPS MaxiCode, Modes 2 & 3
The printer supports MaxiCode as defined in the AIM Technical Specification. The
following examples illustrate various label format record message syntaxes for encoding
data as MaxiCode. In the following examples, special formatting is used to denote
special ASCII characters as shown:
Symbol
R
S
G
S
E
OT
Hexadecimal Value
1E
1D
04
(Printer message syntax allows for EOT to be
substituted with <CR> or the use of both EOT and
<CR>.)
UPS Modes 2 & 3 Explicit
The data stream can force Mode 2 or 3 encoding by placing #2 or #3, respectively,
before the data, as shown in the example below. If this is not specified, the printer
chooses the best mode.
1u0000001200120#3[)>RS01GS96123456GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS0
89GSGS1/1GS10.1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT
This example will print encoding the MaxiCode symbol in Mode 3.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1u0000001200120#3[)>RS01GS96123456GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/
1GS10.1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT
121100000000100Barcode u<CR>
E
Where:
#3
Forces Mode 3 encoding
[)>RS01GS96 Message Header
123456
Maximum 9 alphanumeric ASCII, postal
code
068
Country Code
001
Class
G
1Z1...
S
...TRSEOT
Primary
Message
Secondary
Message
Examples
In the UPS 3.0 protocol examples that follow, Primary Message control characters GS will
not be encoded in the MaxiCode symbol. All characters, the Secondary Message, with
the exception of the leading GS, in are encoded.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
203
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
A UPS 3.0 zip + 4 with Message data format and message header:
1u0000001200120[)>RS01GS96841706672GS840GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/
1GS10.1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT
Where:
[)>RS01GS96
841706672
840
001
G
S1Z1...
...TRSEOT
Message Header
Maximum 9 alphanumeric ASCII, postal code
Country Code
Class
Primary
Message
Secondary
Message
A UPS 3.0 international postal “V6C3E2” with Message data format and message header:
1u0000001200120[)>RS01GS96V6C3E2GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/1GS
10.1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT
Where:
[)>RS01GS96
V6C3E2
068
001
G
S1Z1...
...TRSEOT
Message Header
Maximum 6 alphanumeric ASCII, international zip code
Country Code
Class
Primary
Message
Secondary
Message
A UPS 3.0 international zip “V6C3E2” without Message data format and message header:
1u0000001200120V6C3E2GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/1GS10.1
G
G G G
R E
SY S S SUT S OT
Where:
V6C3E2
068
001
G
S1Z1...
...TRSEOT
Maximum 6 alphanumeric ASCII, international zip code
Country Code
Class
Primary
Message
Secondary
Message
A UPS 3.0 zip + 4 “32707-3270” without Message data format and message header:
1u0000001200120327073270GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/1GS10.1GSYGS
R E
G G
S SUT S OT
Where:
32707
3270
068
001
G
S1Z1...
...TRSEOT
204
5 digit ASCII, Zip code
4 digit ASCII, +4 Zip code (not required)
Country Code
Class
Primary
Message
Secondary
Message
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
U:
UPS MaxiCode, Modes 2 & 3 with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case U identifies a UPS MaxiCode bar code with a 4-digit
string length specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the
data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit
decimal data byte count immediately follows the 4-digit column position field. This value
includes all of the data following the byte count field, but does not include itself.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1U00000010001000051327895555840666this package<0x0D>is going to Datamax<CR>
121100000000100Barcode U<CR>
E
From the example above, the bar code’s data stream,
1U00000010001000051327895555840666this package<0x0D>is
going to Datamax
includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in bold), where 0051
equals the four-digit decimal data byte count and includes all bytes
that follow until the end of the bar code data. Field termination is
set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> all represent single
byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively. The UPS
MaxiCode bar code produced encodes “327895555840666this
package<CR>is going to Datamax”, and prints a line of text:
Barcode U.
v:
Barcode U
FIM
Valid Characters: A, B, C, or D
Length: 1 character
Valid bar widths: The width and height multiplier works the same as for fonts on this bar
code.
This bar code is used to display the Facing Identification Mark (FIM) that is carried on
certain types of letter mail for the U S Postal Service:
FIM A: Courtesy reply mail with Postnet.
FIM B: Business reply, penalty or franked mail without Postnet.
FIM C: Business reply, penalty or franked mail with Postnet.
FIM D: OCR readable mail without Postnet (typically for envelopes with a courtesy reply
window).
The following example prints an FIM A bar code:
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
205
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1v0000000150100A<CR>
121100000000100Barcode v<CR>
E
z:
PDF-417
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters.
Variable Length – This two dimensional bar code holds large amounts of data in a small
area, while providing a high level of redundancy and error checking, if specified.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1z0000000150100F1000000PDF417<CR>
121100000000100Barcode z<CR>
E
Barcode z
The example above prints a normal, security level one, PDF-417 bar code with a 1:2
aspect ratio and best-fit rows and columns. The (bolded) bar code’s data stream
1z0000000150100F1000000PDF417<CR> decodes as follows:
Example Data
Explanation
F
1-character specifying a normal or truncated bar code (T to truncate, F for
normal).
1
1-digit security level ranging from 0 to 8.
00
2-digit aspect ratio specified as a fraction, with the first digit being the
numerator and the second digit the denominator. Use “00” for the default
ratio of 1:2. Valid range is from “00” to “99.”
00
2-digit number specifying the number of rows requested. Use “00” to let
the printer find the best fit. Valid range is from “03” to “90”. Row values
less than 3 are set to 3, while row values greater than 90 are set to 90.
00
2-digit number specifying the number of columns requested. Use “00” to
let the printer find the best fit. Valid range is from “01” to “30”. Column
values greater than 30 are set to 30.
PDF417
<CR>
The data stream to be encoded.
Terminates the data stream.
Format Record header fields c and d should both be zero.
206
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Z:
PDF-417 with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case Z identifies a PDF-417 bar code with a string 4-digit
length specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be used within the data strings
without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit decimal data
byte count immediately follows the 4-digit column position field. This value includes all
of the data following the byte count field, but does not include itself.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1Z00000001501000015F1000000pdf<0x0D>417<CR>
121100000000100Barcode Z<CR>
E
Barcode Z
From the example above, the bar code’s data stream,
1Z00000001501000015F1000000pdf<CR>417
includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in bold), where 0015 equals the four-digit
decimal data byte count and includes all bytes that follow until the end of the bar code
data. Field termination is set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> all represent
single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively. The PDF-417 bar code
produced encodes “pdf<CR>417”, and prints a line of text: Barcode Z.
W1c: DataMatrix
Valid Characters: Any 8-bit byte data
Variable Length
DataMatrix is a two-dimensional matrix symbology, which is comprised of square
modules arranged within a perimeter finder pattern. There are two basic types: ECC
000-140 and ECC 200.
ECC 000 - 140 symbols:
These square symbols can be any odd size from 9x9 to 49x49, which may be specified in
fields jjj and kkk. If an ECC 000-140 symbol is specified with even numbers of rows or
columns, the next largest odd value will be used. Input values greater than 49 or less
than 9 will cause the symbol to be automatically sized for the input character stream.
The record format is shown here, expanded with spaces.
a W b[b] c d eee ffff gggg hhh i jjj kkk ll…l
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
207
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
a
1,2,3, and 4
Meaning
W
W
b[b]
c, 1c
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size horizontal multiplier
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size vertical multiplier
eee
000 to 999
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects the DataMatrix bar code - the two differing values
have no other significance.
No effect; Must be numeric
A 3-digit convolutional error correction level.
hhh
000, 050, 080, 100, 140
If any number other than one of these options is entered
then the nearest lesser value from the valid entries is used.
Example: Selecting an ECC value of 099 will cause the
actual ECC value of 080 to be used.
1 digit format identification:
i
0-6
0 - Automatically choose the encodation scheme based
on the characters to be encoded.
1 - Numeric data.
2 - Upper-case alphabetic.
3 - Upper-case alphanumeric and punctuation characters
(period, comma, hyphen, and slash).
4 - Upper-case alphanumeric.
5 - ASCII, the full 128 ASCII character set.
6 - Any 8-bit byte.
If a format identifier is selected which will not encode the
input character stream then the bar code symbol will not be
printed.
Auto-encodation format identification is recommended
since it will select the best possible encodation scheme for
the input stream.
jjj
9,11,13…49. ECC 140
minimum is 15.
A 3 digit odd number (or 000) of rows requested. 000
causes rows to be automatically determined. If the rows
and columns do not match, the symbol will be sized to a
square using the greater of the two values.
kkk
9,11,13…49. ECC 140
minimum is 15.
A 3 digit odd number (or 000) of columns requested. 000
causes columns to be automatically determined. If the rows
and columns do not match, the symbol will be sized to a
square using the greater of the two values.
ll…l
8-bit data, followed by a
termination character.
Data to be encoded.
Table G-2: DataMatrix ECC 000 – 140 Record Structure
208
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
ECC 200 symbols:
There are 24 square symbol sizes available, with both row and column dimensions,
which may be specified in fields jjj and kkk, measured in modules as indicated in the
following list - 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 64, 72, 80, 88,
96, 104, 120, 132, and 144. If an ECC 200 symbol is specified with odd numbers of
rows or columns, the next largest even value will be used. Input values greater than
144 or less than 10 will cause the symbol to be automatically sized for the input
character stream. The record format is shown here, expanded with spaces.
a W b[b] c d eee ffff gggg hhh i jjj kkk ll…l
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
a
1,2,3, and 4
W
W
b[b]
c, 1c
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size horizontal multiplier
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size vertical multiplier
eee
000 to 999
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
hhh
200
i
0
jjj
kkk
ll…l
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects the DataMatrix bar code - the two differing values
have no other significance.
No effect; Must be numeric
ECC 200 uses Reed-Solomon error correction.
Fixed value, not used
10,
22,
44,
88,
12,
24,
48,
96,
14, 16, 18, 20,
26, 32, 36, 40,
52, 64, 72, 80,
104, 120, 132,
144
A 3 digit even number (or 000) of rows requested.
10,
22,
44,
88,
12,
24,
48,
96,
14, 16, 18, 20,
26, 32, 36, 40,
52, 64, 72, 80,
104, 120, 132,
144
A 3 digit even number (or 000) of columns requested.
8-bit data
000 causes rows to be automatically determined. The
symbol will be sized to a square if the rows and columns do
not match by taking the larger of the two values.
000 causes columns to be automatically determined. The
symbol will be sized to a square if the rows and columns do
not match by taking the larger of the two values.
Data to be encoded in the symbol
Table G-3: DataMatrix ECC 200 Record Structure
Example:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1c44000010001002000000000DATAMAX<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1c<CR>
E
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Barcode W1c
209
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
W1C: DataMatrix with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case C identifies a DataMatrix bar code with a string 4digit length specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the
data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit
decimal data byte count immediately follows the four-digit column position field. This
value includes all of the data following the byte count field, but does not include itself.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1C440000100010000292000000000Datamax<0x0D>prints best<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1C<CR>
E
From the example above, the bar code’s data stream,
1W1C440000100010000292000000000 Datamax<0x0D>prints best
includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in bold), where 0029
equals the four-digit decimal data byte count and includes all
bytes that follow until the end of the bar code data. Field
termination is set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> all
represent single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D,
respectively. The DataMatrix bar code produced encodes
“Datamax<CR>prints best,” and prints a line of text: Barcode
W1C.
W1d / W1D:
Barcode W1C
QR Code
Valid Characters: Numeric Data, Alphanumeric Data, 8-bit byte data, and Kanji
characters
Variable Length: The two-dimensional bar code (as documented in AIM, Version 7.0).
Syntax: a W1 b c d eee ffff gggg hh…h
Where:
210
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Field
Valid Inputs
a
1,2,3 and 4
W1
W1
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects the QR bar code formatting mode, where:
D and d
b
D = Manual formatting. Allows the data string (hh…h) to
be entered with a comma (,) as a field separator;
fields are optional per QR Code specifications, and the
first field indicates Model 1 or Model 2 QR Code
(Model 2 is the default).
d = Automatic formatting. Allows the data string (hh…h)
to be data only.
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size horizontal multiplier Each cell in the bar code is
square, therefore ‘c’ and ‘d’ must be equal. Depending on
the conversion mode (<STX>n or <STX>m), each unit
indicates a cell dimension of .01 inch or .1 mm.
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size vertical multiplier. (See explanation for ‘c’,
above.)
eee
000 to 999
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column (see Appendix J)
hh…h
Valid ASCII character
string, followed by (a)
termination character(s)
No effect; must be numeric
QR Code data string (see Generation Structure, below).
Generation Structure
The data input structure (hh…h) is as follows:
Auto Format (W1d)
With bar code identifier ‘d’, the data begins after the last character of the column
position field, and does not include any command characters. The data string is
terminated with a termination character, usually a 0x0d hex that occurs twice in
succession. The bar code symbol will have the following characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Model 2
Error Correction Code Level = ‘M’ (Standard Reliability Level)
Mask Selection = Automatic
Data Input Mode = Automatic [1]
Example:
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
211
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1d4400000100010This is the data portion<CR><CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1D<CR>
E
[3]
(2 termination
characters required.)
Manual Formatting (W1D)
With bar code identifier ‘D’, minor changes allow flexibility for data entry. (Spaces
have been added for readability.)
[q,] [e [m] i,]
cdata cdata cdata…cdata term
[2]
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
q
1, 2
e
m
I
cdata
term
Meaning
QR Code Model number, optional. Model 2 is the default.
Error Correction Level (Reed-Solomon) – Four
allowing recovery of the symbol code words:
H = Ultra Reliability Level (30%)
Q = High Reliability Level (25%)
M = Standard Reliability Level (15%)
L = High Density Level (7%)
H, Q, M, L
0 – 8, none
Mask Number, optional:
None = Automatic Selection
0-7 = Mask 0 to Mask 7
8
= No Mask
A, a, M, m
Data
A
a
M
m
N, A, B, K
immediately followed
by data
<CR>, <CR><CR>
[3]
Input Mode:
= Automatic setting, ASCII
= Automatic, hex-ASCII [1]
= Manual Setting, ASCII[2]
= manual, hex-ASCII[2]
levels
[1]
Character Mode:
N = Numeric, N data
A = Alphanumeric, A data
B = Binary , Bnnnn data (where nnnn = data bytecount, 4 decimal digits; byte-count /2 for hexASCII
K = Kanji, K data
The data string is terminated with a termination character,
generally a 0x0d hex, but can be changed by the operator.
If the Data Input Mode is Automatic, the data string is
terminated with two successive termination characters.
[1]
When Data Input Mode = Automatic, Kanji data cannot be used; Manual data input required.
When using manual formatting, commas are required between format fields and data types.
[3]
<CR> represents the line termination character as defined by the current control code set or
after use of Txx, line field terminator label format command.
[2]
212
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
If HEX/ASCII mode is selected in manual Data Input Mode, only the data for Kanji or
Binary data types will be converted, therefore the other data types and all command
characters must be entered in ASCII format. If HEX/ASCII is selected in automatic
Data Input Mode, all of the data must be entered in HEX/ASCII format.
Data Append Mode String Format, Manual Formatting – Bar Code W1D
D aa tt pp I
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
D
D
aa
00, 99
Meaning
Data Append Mode String Format indicator
QR Code Number in Append Series, 2 decimal digits
tt
The total number of QR Codes in series, 2 decimal digits
pp
Value of Parity, 2 digits, 8 LSBs of data parity
e
H, Q, M, L
As above
m
0 – 8, none
As above
i
A, a, M, m
As above
cdata
N, A, B, K
immediately followed
by data
As above
term
<CR>, <CR><CR>
As above
Characteristics
Models:
Model
A.
B.
C.
D.
1 (original version), bar code versions 1 through 14
ECC Levels ‘H’, ‘M’, ‘Q’, and ‘L’
Mask Selection Automatic or 0 through 8
Data Input Modes Automatic and Manual
Data Append Mode
Model
A.
B.
C.
D.
2 (enhanced version), bar code versions 1 through 40
ECC Levels ‘H’, ‘M’, ‘Q’, and ‘L’
Mask Selection Automatic or 0 through 8
Data Input Modes Automatic and Manual
Data Append Mode
Representation of data:
Dark Cell = Binary 1
Light Cell = Binary 0
Symbol Size (not including quiet zone, 4 cells on each of the 4 sides):
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
213
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Model 1: 21 X 21 cells to 73 X 73 cells (Versions 1 to 14, increase in steps of 4 cells
per side)
Model 2: 21 X 21 cells to 177 X 177 cells (Versions 1 to 40, increase in steps of 4
cells per side)
Data Characters per symbol (maximum for symbol size):
Numeric Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 1,167 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 7,089 characters
Alphanumeric Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 707 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 4,296 characters
Binary Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 486 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 2,953 characters
Kanji Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 299 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 1,817 characters
Code Type: Matrix
Orientation Independence: Yes
Example
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1D44000001000102HM,AThis is the data portion also with
binary,B0003<0xfe><0xca><0x83><0x0D>
121100000000100Barcode W1D<CR>
E
Barcode W1D
Where:
QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.1 inch square, positioned at X =. 1” and Y = .1”,
ECC=H, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual.
Other Examples:
DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.04 inch square, positioned at X =
.1” and Y = .1”, ECC = H, Mask = 3, Data Input Mode = Manual:
1W1D4400000100010H3M,AThis is the data portion also with
binary,B0003<0xfe><0xca><0x83><0x0D>
214
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.08 inch square, positioned at X =
.1” and Y = .1”, ECC = L, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual - Kanji:
1W1D88000001000102,LM,K<0x81><0x40><0x81><0x41><0x81><0x42><0x0D>
DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.04 inch square, positioned at X =
.1” and Y = .1”, ECC = L, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual - Kanji (in
Hex/ASCII format):
1W1D4400000100010L8m,K814081418142<0x0D>
DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.01 inch square, positioned at X =
.1” and Y = .1”, ECC = M, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Automatic:
1W1d1100000100010Pallet 35FGA, Box 55367, Datamax Corp, Orlando,
Florida 32707<0x0D><0x0D>
W1f / W1F: Aztec
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters, depending upon the selected options.
Variable Length (W1f): This two dimensional bar code holds a large amount of data in a
small area and can provide a high level of error checking.
Specified Length (W1F): With a string four-digit length specifier, values 0x00 through
0xFF to be included within the data strings without conflicting with the DPL format
record terminators.
Syntax: a W1 b c d eee ffff gggg [hhhh] i jjj kk…k
Where:
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
215
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Field
Valid Inputs
a
1,2,3, and 4
W1
W1
b
f and F
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Lowercase selects the Aztec bar code, variable length
Uppercase selects the Aztec bar code with a Byte Count
Specifier
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size horizontal multiplier, 0 = default size. The c/d
module size parameters should be equal to produce a
square symbol. When the label command (Dwh) is used to
generate larger text, then c and d may be used to
compensate and ensure a square symbol.
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size vertical multiplier, 0 = default size (See
explanation for ‘c’, above.)
eee
000
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
[hhhh]
0000 to 9999
Optional string length specifier. Field termination is set by
this byte count. This decimal value includes all of the data
following this byte count field, but does not include itself.
i
0, 1
No Effect
Extended Channel Interpretation (ECI) mode; 0 = Disabled,
1 = Enabled
Error Correction (EC) / Amount (see table below), where:
jjj
000 to 300
kk…k
8-bit data, followed by a
termination character
000
001
101
201
300
–
–
–
–
–
Default EC, approximately 23%
099 EC fixed value, expressed as a percent.
104 Compact core, 1 to 4 layers respectively.
232 Full size core, 1 to 32 layers respectively.
Rune format, encodes three ASCII decimal digits 0256; scanner decode output is decimal number 0256
Data to be encoded.
The error correction or size selection determines the symbol size and other
characteristics of the symbol, as shown in the following table. Attempting to encode
more data that has been made available will result in no symbol printed.
216
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Error Correction (EC) / Size Implications
jjj
Symbol
Size[1]
Symbol
Format
000
variable
001 to 099
variable
data
dependant
data and EC
dependant
101
102
102
103
104
15
19
19
23
27
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
19
23
27
31
37
41
45
49
53
57
61
67
71
75
79
83
87
91
95
101
105
109
113
117
121
125
131
135
139
143
147
151
compact
compact
compact
compact
compact
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
Maximum[2]
Binary Data
Bytes
Maximum[2]
Alphabetic
Characters
Maximum[2]
Numeric
Characters
1914
3067
3832
1914
3067
3832
6
19
19
33
53
12
33
33
57
89
13
40
40
70
110
8
24
40
62
87
114
145
179
214
256
298
343
394
446
502
559
621
687
753
824
898
976
1056
1138
1224
1314
1407
1501
1600
1702
1806
1914
15
40
68
104
144
187
236
291
348
414
482
554
636
718
808
900
998
1104
1210
1324
1442
1566
1694
1826
1963
2107
2256
2407
2565
2728
2894
3067
18
49
84
128
178
232
294
362
433
516
601
691
793
896
1008
1123
1246
1378
1511
1653
1801
1956
2116
2281
2452
2632
2818
3007
3205
3409
3616
3832
300
11
Rune
1
1
Measured in module size x, assuming default module size (cd=00).
[2]
Maximum sizes are approximate and data dependant, and may be less than indicated.
[1]
1
Table G-4: Aztec Characteristics Index
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
217
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Error Correction
Size 001 to 099: This value specifies the percent of symbol code words to be used for
error correction. Actual error correction word percentage will vary depending on data.
The default value, approximately 23%, is recommended. Any other value may be
selected to meet the user’s needs. Some minimum-security code word may be
generated depending on the data sent for encoding, particularly when the volume of that
data is small. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is printed.
Size 101 to 104: Values 101 through 104 results in 1 through 4 layers (two modules
thick) respectively, around the center finder pattern. Data volume constraints apply as
indicated in the table above. Symbols will be of the compact form. All available code
word will be used for error correction. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is
printed.
Size 201 to 232: Values 201 through 232 result in 1 through 32 layers (two modules
thick) respectively, around the center finder pattern. Data volume constraints apply as
indicated in the table above. Symbols will be of the full-size form. All available
codewords will be used for error correction. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol
is printed.
Size 300: Value 300 informs the printer that the data, which follows will be used to
encode one RUNE symbol. The data consists of one to three ASCII digits with value
range of 0 to 256. The data may include leading zeros. Data streams longer than three
digits or data that includes non-numeric characters may have unpredictable results.
Extended Channel Interpretation Mode: A value of 1 provides for extended channel
codewords to be inserted into the bar code symbol, using escape sequences in the
datastream. This mode also provides for effective Code 128 and UCC/EAN 128
emulations, when used in with appropriately configured bar code readers. The valid
values for escape sequences are of the form <ESC>n, where:
<ESC>
n
– 1 byte with value 2710 = 1B16
– 1 ASCII digit, range 0 through 6
These escape sequences are encoded as FLG(n) character pairs described in the
International Symbology Specification – Aztec Code, AIM, 1997-11-05, and the
meanings of the values for n are the same in both.
<ESC>0 – Is encoded as FLG(0), and interpreted as FNC1 or <GS> depending on its
location in the data stream. The printer does not validate <ESC>0
locations in the data stream.
When <ESC>0 is the leading data in the stream, it is interpreted as a
FNC1 as used in the Code 128 symbology, and specifically for UCC/EAN
128 applications. For appropriately configured scanners this will be
interpreted/transmitted as a ]C1 symbology identifier preamble. The
printer does not validate UCC/EAN 128 data syntax.
When <ESC>0 follows a single alphabetic or two numeric characters
respectively, then it also interpreted as a FNC1. For appropriately
configured scanners this would be interpreted/transmitted as a ]C2
symbology identifier preamble, and the alpha or numeric characters
218
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
preceding the FNC1 are Application Indicators assigned by AIM
International. The printer does not check AI validity.
When <ESC>0 is anywhere else in the data stream, a <GS> replaces it in
the bar code symbol, as with UCC/EAN 128 field separators.
<ESC>n – Is encoded as FLG(n), and is interpreted as signaling Extended Channel
Interpretation. When the value of n is from 1 to 6, it signals that the
following n digits comprise an extended channel identifier for use with ECI
compliant bar code scanners. An erroneous bar code symbol may result
from failing to follow <ESC>n with n digits. Any <ESC>0 following
<ESC>n and not within the n digits will be encoded as FLG(0). In the
context of a FLG(n), any backslash ‘\’ (9210) will be interpreted by the
scanner as two backslashes ‘\\’.
Example 1:
The variable length example encodes “AZTEC” with no ECI input, and 23%
error correction, and prints the bar code. A line of text is also printed.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1f00000001501000000AZTEC<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1f<CR>
E
Example 2:
Barcode W1f
The specified length example includes a byte count field for all bytes that
follow until the end of the bar code data. The byte count is 17. The
symbology encodes “AZTEC<CR>barcode”, and prints the bar code. Notice
that a <CR> does not terminate the bar code format record. A line of text
is also printed.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1F000000015010000170000AZTEC<0x0D>barcode
121100000000100Barcode W1F<CR>
E
Barcode W1F
Functions Not Supported
•
•
•
Structured Append
Reader Initialization Symbol Generation
Module shaving
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
219
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
W1g / W1G: USD-8 (Code 11)
Valid Characters: 0-9,Bar Code Data String Length: Variable, typical max 41 characters
Non-Human Readable: W1g
Human Readable: W1G
USD-8 (Code 11) is a bar code that encodes the ten digits and the dash (-) character.
An additional character serves as the start and stop indicator. Each character has three
bars and two spaces for a total of five elements. Of these five elements, two are of
medium width and three are narrow, except for the “0”, “9”, and “-“ characters, which
have only one wide element and four narrow elements.
The narrow bar size is specified in DPL by the narrow bar parameter, the medium is
specified in DPL by the wide bar parameter and the wide bar is fixed at 2 times the
medium bar minus the narrow bar.
DPL calculates two checksum characters, C and K, and automatically places them prior
to the stop character. The following example prints a Code11 bar code:
<STX>L
D11
1W1G00000015001500123456789-<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1G<CR>
E
Barcode W1G
W1I: EAN128 (with Auto Subset Switching)
Valid characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set.
Variable length, minimum 4 characters
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width, 3 times the
narrow bar width, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A, B, and C. If the data begins with at least
four numeric characters the default start code is subset C. If there is a non-numeric in
the first four characters then the default start code is subset B. The next character after
start is always FNC1. Subset switching between B and C is performed based on rules as
below:
1. If in subset C and there are an odd number of numeric digits, subset B will be set
prior to the last digit.
2. If four or more numeric digits appear consecutively while in subset B, the character
code C will be set prior to the digits.
220
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
3. When in subset C and a non-numeric occurs, subset B will be inserted prior to the
character.
Note that there is no auto-switching from or to Subset A. Standard switches are still
used (see table below).
Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the control and special characters.
Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the lowercase alphabetic and special characters.
Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive, as well as
special characters. EAN128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric
data.
Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are
considered special characters. To access these values, a two-character reference table is
built into the printer; see table below. As an example, to encode FNC2 into an EAN128
Subset A bar code, send the ASCII & (DEC 38, HEX 26) followed by an ASCII B (DEC 66,
HEX 41). Code FNC2 will be encoded.
ASCII
2 CHAR
CODE A
CODE B
CODE C
96
&A
FNC3
FNC3
-NA-
97
&B
FNC2
FNC2
-NA-
98
&C
SHIFT
SHIFT
-NA-
99
&D
CODEC
-NA-
-NA-
100
&E
CODEB
FNC4
-NA-
101
&F
FNC4
CODEA
CODEA
102
&G
FNC1
FNC1
FNC1
Table G-8: Special Character Handling
Control Codes: Control character encoding into Code 128 Subset A by sending these
control codes:
`
a through z
{
|
}
~
ASCII 127
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NUL
1 - 26
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
221
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
The following example prints an EAN128 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1I000000025002512345&G10Z2133021AK<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1I<CR>
E
Barcode W1I
When scanned this bar code will decode as follows:
[C][FNC1]1234[B]5[F1]10Z[C]213302[B]1AK(81)
W1J: Code 128 (with Auto Subset Switching)
Valid characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set.
Variable length
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width, 3 times the
narrow bar width, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A, B, and C. If the data begins with at least
four numeric characters the default start code is subset C. If there is a non-numeric in
the first four characters or there are less than four then the default start code is subset
B. Subset switching between B and C is based on the following rules:
1. If in subset C and there are an odd number of numeric digits, subset B will be set
prior to the last digit.
2. If four or more numeric digits appear consecutively while in subset B, the character
code C will be set prior to the digits. If there is an odd number of numerics already in
B, the first numeric will be placed in B with the others in C.
3. When in subset C and a non-numeric occurs, subset B will be inserted prior to the
character.
Note that there is no auto switching from, or to, subset A. Standard switches are still
used. See table below.
Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the control and special characters.
Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the lowercase alphabetic and special characters.
Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive, as well as
special characters. Code128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric
data.
Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are
considered special characters. To access these values, a two-character reference table is
222
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
built into the printer; see table below. As an example, to encode FNC2 into a Code128
Subset A bar code, send the ASCII & (DEC 38, HEX 26) followed by an ASCII B (DEC 66,
HEX 41). Code FNC2 will be encoded.
ASCII
2 CHAR
CODE A
CODE B
CODE C
96
&A
FNC3
FNC3
-NA-
97
&B
FNC2
FNC2
-NA-
98
&C
SHIFT
SHIFT
-NA-
99
&D
CODEC
-NA-
-NA-
100
&E
CODEB
FNC4
-NA-
101
&F
FNC4
CODEA
CODEA
102
&G
FNC1
FNC1
FNC1
Table G-9: Special Character Handling
Control Codes: Control character encoding into Code 128 Subset A by sending these
control codes:
`
a through z
{
|
}
~
ASCII 127
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NUL
1 - 26
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
The following example prints a Code128 Auto bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1J000000025002512345&G10Z2133021AK<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1J<CR>
E
Barcode W1J
When scanned this bar code will decode as follows:
[C]1234[B]5[F1]10Z2 [C]133021[B]AK(95)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
223
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
W1k: Reduced Space Symbology (RSS)
Valid Characters: Type dependant
Bar Code Data String Length: Type dependant
RSS is a continuous, linear bar code symbology used for identification in EAN.UCC
systems. There are six different types:
RSS Type
Overview*
• Encodes a full 14-digit EAN.UCC item identification
RSS-14
RSS-14 Truncated
RSS-14 Stacked
RSS-14 Stacked Omni-Directional
within a linear symbol that can be scanned omnidirectionally.
• The encodable character set is 0 through 9.
• The maximum numeric data capacity is the
application identifier plus 14-digit numeric item
identification.
• Error detection is mod 79 checksum.
• Encodes a 14-digit EAN.UCC item identification with
indicator digits of zero or one within a linear symbol.
• The encodable character set is 0 through 9.
RSS Limited
• The maximum numeric data capacity for is the
application identifier plus 14-digit numeric item
identification.
• Data must begin with indicator 0 or 1. Any higher
number results in discarded data.
• Error detection is mod 89 checksum.
• Encodes EAN.UCC item identification plus
supplementary AI element strings.
• The encodable character is a subset of ISO 646,
RSS Expanded
consisting of upper and lower case letters, digits and
20 selected punctuation characters, plus the special
function character FNC1, (#).
• The maximum numeric data capacity is 74 numeric or
41 alphanumeric.
• Error detection is mod 211 checksum.
*Additional data can be encoded in a two-dimensional composite as per specification (see AIM
Spec ITS/99-001 “ISS - Reduced Space Symbology” for more details).
224
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Syntax for RSS-14, RSS-14 Truncated, RSS-14 Stacked, RSS-14 Stacked OmniDirectional and RSS Limited (spaces shown for readability):
a W1 k c d eee ffff gggg h
i j m n…n | p…p
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
a
1,2,3, and 4
W1
W1
k
k
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Wide bar ratio, default = 2
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Narrow bar ratio, default = 2
eee
000
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects RSS bar code
No effect
RSS Type:
R
T
S
D
L
=
=
=
=
=
RSS-14,
RSS Truncated,
RSS Stacked,
RSS Omni-Directional,
RSS Limited
h
R, T, S, D, L
i
1-9
j
0 to (i-1)
X pixels to undercut
m
0 to (i-1)
Y pixels to undercut
n…n
0 to 9
|
| (optional)
p…p
2-D data (optional)
Pixel Multiplier
Numeric linear data, length 13
[1]
Vertical bar separates primary linear data from secondary
2-D data
Additional 2-D data
[2]
[1]
The application identifier is not encoded in the symbol nor is the last check digit; the user
should enter in a 13-digit value. The decoding system will display the application identifier and
calculate the check digit.
[2]
The separator row height for two-dimensional composite is fixed at one times the pixel
multiplier.
Table G-5: RSS-14 Truncated, Stacked, Omni-Directional, & Limited Record Structures
Examples:
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
225
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
The following example prints an RSS-14 bar code:
Barcode W1k
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150R1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
The following example prints an RSS-14 bar code with 2-D data:
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150R1002001234567890|123456-99/99/99
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k
The following example prints an RSS-14 Truncated bar code:
Barcode W1k
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150T1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
The following example prints an RSS-14 Stacked bar code:
Barcode W1k
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150S1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
The following example prints an RSS-14 Stacked Omni-Directional bar
code:
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150D1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k
The following example prints an RSS-14 Limited bar code:
Barcode W1k
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150L1001501234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
226
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Syntax for the RSS Expanded bar code (spaces shown for readability):
a W1 k c d eee ffff gggg h
i j m nn p…p | q…q
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
a
1,2,3, and 4
W1
W1
k
k
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Wide bar ratio, default = 2
Narrow bar ratio, default = 2
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects RSS bar code
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
eee
000
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
h
E
i
1-9
j
0 to (i-1)
m
0 to (i-1)
nn
No effect
RSS Type: E= RSS Expanded
Pixel Multiplier
X pixels to undercut
Y pixels to undercut
[2]
2-22, even only
p…p
0 to 9
|
| (optional)
q…q
2-D data (optional)
Segments per row
Subset of ISO646, including alphanumerics
Vertical bar separates primary linear data from secondary
2-D data
Additional 2-D data
[1]
[1]
Separator row height for two-dimensional composite is fixed at one times the pixel multiplier.
When using additional 2-D composite data, the sequence width must be at least 4.
[2]
Table G-6: RSS-14 Expanded Record Structure
Example:
The following example prints an RSS-14 Expanded bar code.
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150E100022001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
227
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
W1m / W1M:
Australia Post 4-State Bar Code
Length: 37, 52, or 67 bars
Usage: This symbol is used for processing mail in the Australia Post System. The symbol
is 37, 52 or 67 bars in length, and the height and ratios are fixed according to the
specification (see “Customer Barcoding Technical Specifications” from Australia Post for
more information).
Syntax for the Australia Post 4-State Bar Code (spaces shown for readability):
a W1 m c d eee ffff gggg hh iiiiiiii j…j
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
a
1,2,3, and 4
W1
W1
Fixed value, extended bar code set
m
m
Selects the Australia Post bar code
c
0
Not used.
d
0
Not used.
eee
000
Not used.
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
Rotation
Format Control Code (FCC):
hh
11, 87, 45, 92, 59, 62,
44
iiiiiiii
00000000-99999999
j…j
0-9, a-z, A-Z, #, space
FCC Value
11
87
45
92
59
62
44
Resulting Format
Standard Customer Bar Code
Routing Bar Code
Reply Paid Bar Code
Redirection Bar Code
Customer Bar Code 2
Customer Bar Code 3
Reserved
8-digit Delivery Point Identifier (DPID)
Optional – Customer information, Bar Code 2 or 3 (Bar
Code 2 has a maximum of 8 digits or 5 alphanumeric
characters, while Bar Code 3 has a maximum of 15 digits
or 10 alphanumeric characters), where if all numeric then
data will be encoded in N-type; otherwise, C-type will be
used.
Example 1:
The following example prints a Standard Customer Barcode using a DPID of
“39987520”:
228
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1WM00000005000501139987520<CR>
E
Barcode W1M
Note that the human readable shows the format control code, sorting code and the
generated Reed Solomon error correction parity values.
Example 2:
The following example prints a Customer Barcode 2 using a DPID of “32211324” and
customer information “A124B”:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1Wm00000005001505932211324A124B<CR>
E
Barcode W1m
W1p: USPS 4 CB Bar Code
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 20, 25, 29 or 31 digits
Valid bar widths: The width and height multiplier values of 00 will produce a valid USPS
4CB symbol.
Usage: The bar code height field is ignored since the symbol height is United States
Postal Service specific. This bar code represents a 20 digit tracking code and a zero,
five, nine, or eleven digit routing code on a letter or package for the USPS.
The following example prints a USPS 4CB bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1p000000050005001234567094987654321012345678
91<CR>
E
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Barcode W1p
229
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
W1R: UCC/EAN Code 128 K-MART NON EDI
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 18 digits
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, or 4 times the narrow bar
width). Human readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the
symbol.
This bar code produces the same symbology as bar code ID “R”, except that the human
readable field has been modified to print on the bottom of the bar code (see below). The
following example prints a KMART bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1R0000000150100012345678901234567<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1R<CR>
E
34 567890 123 4567
Barcode W1R
W1t: TCIF Linked Bar Code 3 of 9 (TLC39)
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters.
Variable Length: Encodes a 25-character alphanumeric serial number in MicroPDF417
symbol.
Specified Length: Encodes a six-digit sequence in a standard Code 39 followed by a link
flag character in Code 3 of 9.
Syntax: a W1 t c d eee ffff gggg hhhhhh ; ii…i
Where:
230
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Field
Valid Inputs
a
1,2,3, and 4
W1
W1
t
t
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Wide bar of Code 39, ratio of wide to narrow must be
between 2:1 and 3:1.
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Narrow bar of Code 39
eee
001 to 999
Height of Code 39
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
hhhhhh
ECI Data
;
Fixed
i…i
S/N Data
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects TLC39 bar code
Six digit ECI number
Parses data. (If the seventh character is not a semi colon
then only a six-digit code 39 will print.)
Up to 25 alphanumeric serial number characters to be
encoded in the MicroPDF417 symbol. This symbol is fixed
at four columns. The number of rows is determined by the
amount of data, as follows:
Character Count
1-14
15-22
23-25
Row Count
4
6
8
The link flag is the character “T” in code 39 without a start/stop indicator. The location
of this flag is based on the ECI code location, length and height. The location of the
MicroPDF417 symbol is based on the location of ECI bar code. The symbol’s module
width and height are fixed at the default. The following example prints a TLC39 bar
code:
<STX>L
D11
1Wt0000001500150123456;ABCD12345678901234
1911A0801300170A1B2C3DAAA
121100000000100Barcode W1t<CR>
E
Barcode W1t
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
231
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
W1z: MicroPDF417
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters, depending on the selected options.
Variable Length
Syntax: a W z c d eee ffff gggg h i j k 0 m…m
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
a
1,2,3, and 4
W1
W1
Fixed value, extended bar code set.
z
z
Selects the MicroPDF417 bar code.
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size horizontal multiplier, 0 – default size.
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size vertical multiplier, 0 – default size.
eee
000
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
h
1 to 4
i
0 to 9 and A
j
0, 1
Byte Compaction Mode (1), best compression for binary
data.
k
0, 1
Macro Character Substitution Disable (1)
0
0
m…m
8-bit data
Rotation
No Effect
Number columns
Row / Error Correction index
Fixed ASCII digit 0.
Reserved for future use.
Data to be encoded.
This is a 2 dimensional bar code capable of holding large amounts of data in a small
area. It provides a high level of redundancy and error checking. Please reference the
following specifications for details: International Symbol Specification – MicroPDF417,
AIM International Technical Specification, version 1.0 1998-06-18; International Symbol
Specification Code 128, AIM International Technical Specification, version 1.0 1999-114; UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifier Standard, Uniform Code Council, Inc, January
1993, revised July 1995; Application Standard for Shipping Container Codes, Uniform
Code Council, 1996. The following example prints a MicroPDF417 bar code, default
module size (cd = 00), with 1 column, 24 rows, error correction of 33%, no byte
compaction, macro character substitution enabled.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1z000000015010014000PDF417<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1z<CR>
E
Barcode W1z
232
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
The number of columns (h) and the row / error correction index (i) combine to form a
row/column/error correction selection index (hi) which determines other characteristics
of the symbol as shown in the following table.
Row/Column/Error Correction Selection Index (h, i) Implications
Max
Max
Max
Symbol Symbol
Max
Errors
Alphabetic
Numeric
Width Height Binary Data
Corrected
Characters Characters
[2]
[3]
Bytes[3]
[1]
[5]
[5]
hi
Columns
Rows
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
14
17
20
24
28
4
4
4
5
5
5
40
40
40
40
40
40
24
30
36
42
50
58
3
7
10
13
18
22
6
12
18
22
30
38
8
17
26
32
44
55
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
8
11
14
17
20
23
26
5
6
6
7
8
10
12
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
8
14
21
27
33
38
43
14
24
36
46
56
67
72
20
35
52
67
82
93
105
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
6
8
10
12
15
20
26
32
38
44
9
11
13
15
18
23
29
35
41
47
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
14
18
22
26
32
42
54
66
78
90
6
10
15
20
27
39
54
68
82
97
10
18
26
34
46
66
90
114
138
162
14
26
38
49
67
96
132
167
202
237
40
4
4
5
101
10
8
14
20
41
4
6
9
101
14
13
22
32
42
4
8
11
101
18
20
34
49
43
4
10
13
101
22
27
46
67
44
4
12
15
101
26
34
58
85
45
4
15
18
101
32
45
76
111
46
4
20
23
101
42
63
106
155
47
4
26
29
101
54
85
142
208
48
4
32
35
101
66
106
178
261
49
4
38
41
101
78
128
214
313
4A
4
44
47
101
90
150
250
366
[1]
Can be any combination of 1∗erasures + 2∗substitutions (e.g. 13 maximum number of errors
corrected might include 7 erasures and 3 substitutions).
[2]
Includes 1 module width of quiet zone on either side.
[3]
Assumes the module height is 2∗module width, and includes one module width quiet zones on
top and bottom.
[3]
Assumes Binary Compaction.
[5]
Assumes Text Compaction.
Table G-7: MicroPDF417 Characteristics Index
In the table above, row/column/error correction selection index (hi) values increasingly
large do not necessarily result in the ability to encode more data.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
233
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Byte Compaction Mode (j = 1)
A value of 1 forces Byte Compaction. The compaction ratio is six 8-bit bytes of data
compressed into a 5-symbol codeword. See the table above for the maximum data
allowed for any row/column/error correction selection index (hi).
Macro Character Substitution Disable (k=1)
By default Macro Character Substitution is enabled (k=0). When enabled, Byte
Compaction has priority over Macro Character Substitution. When Macro Character
Substitution is enabled, the data stream header and trailer are compacted when they
conform to the following forms:
[)>RS05GS data RS EoT
or
R
[)> S06GS data RS EoT
where:
data may not contain adjacent bytes with values RS or
(
R
S
= 3010 , 1E16 and
G
S
= 2910
G
S
1D16 and oT = 410 ,416)
E
,
Functions Not Supported
•
•
•
•
General Purpose Extended Channel Interpretations, including Code-128 emulations
Structured Append
Reader Initialization Symbol Generation
Module shaving
W1Z: Micro PDF417 with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case Z identifies a Micro PDF417 bar code with a 4-digit
string length specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the
data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit
decimal data byte count immediately follows the four-digit column position field. This
value includes all of the data following the byte count field, but does not include itself.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1Z0000000150100001214000pdf<0x0D>417
121100000000100Barcode W1Z<CR>
E
Barcode W1Z
From the example, the bar code’s data stream,
1W1Z0000000150100001214000PDF<0x0D>417,
includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in bold), where 0012 equals the four-digit
decimal data byte count and includes all bytes that follow until the end of the bar code
data. Field termination is set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> all represent
single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively. The Micro PDF417 bar
code produced encodes “pdf<CR>417”, and prints a line of text: Barcode W1Z.
234
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix H
Single and Double Byte Character Font Mapping
Label format records with font code 9 in the b field of the Format Record header can specify
any of the following bitmapped or scalable fonts with the associated specification in the font
size/selection (eee height) field, as shown in the tables on the following pages.
Example: 1911u4000100010A0215134<CR>
The example above will produce a printed string consisting of the two Kanji characters
referenced by the two HEX ASCII pairs A0, 21, and 51, 34, on appropriately equipped
printers.
Example: 1911U4001000100P012P012<0x38><0x77><0x00>
The above example will produce a printed string consisting of the one 12 point Kanji
character referenced by the byte pair with hex values 38 and 77 on appropriately equipped
printers.
Double byte hex representation character strings terminate with two null bytes and a <CR>,
i.e., 0x 00 00 0D. The Hex-ASCII representation is terminated with <CR>.
The alphanumeric portion (nn) of the scalable font specifiers, Snn, Unn, unn, numbering
system is a base 62 numbering system, 0, 1, 2…8, 9, A, B, C...X, Y, Z, a, b, c...x, y, z. For
scalable fonts the S designation signifies single byte characters and U designates double
byte. The lower case U counterpart signifies that print data in the label format record is in a
hex-ASCII format. Fonts that have been downloaded with designators of the form nn, where
nn are alphanumeric, as seen in the font size specifier (eee height) column below, may be
referenced in label format records by their upper or lower case specifiers as available.
However, fonts created for double-byte access cannot be accessed using Snn as the font
designator, and vice versa, single-byte fonts cannot be accessed using Unn or unn.
Downloading scalable fonts require specifying the font ID, a two character alphanumeric.
The S, or U, u used in referencing the font within label format records is not used in the
download specification. Attempting to utilize a scalable font with an inappropriate byte-size
designation (e.g. S on double byte or U, u on single byte) will have unpredictable results.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
235
Appendix H – Single and Double Byte Character Font Mapping
Font 9, Font Specifications (eee Height) and Associated Characteristics
Font
Name
Character
Mapping
Font Size Specifier
(eee Height)
Point
Size
Font 9 Bitmapped Downloaded Fonts
User-downloaded
typeface
Single Byte
100 - 999
user defined
Font 9 Scalable Resident Fonts Specifications
CG Triumvirate
Bold Condensed [1]
Single Byte
S00
CG Triumvirate[1]
Single Byte
S01
scalable
scalable
Font 9 Scalable Resident Fonts Specifications (optional)
CG Times[2]
Single Byte
SA0
scalable
CG Times Italic[2]
Single Byte
SA1
scalable
CG Times Bold[2]
Single Byte
SA2
scalable
CG Times Bold[2]
Italic
Single Byte
SA3
scalable
Gothic B Kanji
Double Byte (Binary)
U40
scalable
Gothic B Kanji
Double Byte (Hex ASCII)
u40
scalable
GB Simplified
Chinese
Double Byte (Binary)
UC0
scalable
GB Simplified
Chinese
Double Byte (Hex ASCII)
uC0
scalable
Korean Hangul
Double Byte (Binary)
UH0
scalable
Korean Hangul
Double Byte (Hex ASCII)
uH0
scalable
Font 9 Scalable Downloaded Fonts
User-downloaded
typeface
Single Byte (Binary)
S50 - S5z...,
S90 - S9z
scalable
User-downloaded
typeface
Double Byte (Binary)
U50...,U5z...,
U90...U9z
scalable
User-downloaded
typeface
Double Byte (Hex ASCII)
u50...,u5z...,
u90...u9z
scalable
[1]
Standard internal fonts
Standard internal fonts, all models except EX2 and I-4208
[2]
Table H-1: Font 9 Specifications
236
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix I
Symbol Sets and Character Maps
Symbol Set Selection
Scalable fonts are mapped through a symbol set sometimes referred to as a ‘code page’.
This mapping allows the host application to select a variety of characters to match the
application. For example in the code page (CP), character code 0xE4 causes character Φ to
be printed. In CP E7, the character code 0xE4 causes δ to be printed. Each of the CPs allows
the host application to “emulate” a character set for their application. Datamax printers
that support scalable fonts contain either a standard or an enhanced group of CPs as
defined below. The CP (symbol set) is selected using a DPL Command, <STX>ySxx, where xx
is the two letter CP Identifier.
In the following table, the checkmark symbol (√) is used to indicate a full compliment of
characters, while “Part” indicates a partial compliment of characters and “X” indicates an
absence of characters for the given code page.
Single Byte Code Pages
Code Page
Identifier
Intellifont
HP
CG
Datamax
(PCL) Triumvirate
[1]
Font Format
MicroType
[2]
CG
Times
CG
Triumvirate
CG
Times
True
Type
Description
AR
8V
X
√
X
√
√
[1]
Arabic-8
CP
3R
Part
√
Part
√
√
[1]
PC Cyrillic
D1
11L
X
X
X
X
ITC Zapf Dingbats/100
D2
12L
X
X
X
X
ITC Zapf Dingbats/200
D3
13L
X
X
X
X
ITC Zapf Dingbats/300
DN
0D
Part
Part
Part
Part
DS
10L
X
X
X
X
DT
7J
√
√
√
√
√
DeskTop
E1
0N
√
√
√
√
√
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
E2
2N
Part
√
√
√
√
ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
E5
5N
√
√
√
√
√
ISO 8859/9 Latin 5
√
ISO 60 Danish /
Norwegian
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
237
Appendix I – Symbol Sets and Character Maps
Single Byte Code Pages
Code Page
Identifier
Datamax
Intellifont
HP
CG
(PCL) Triumvirate
Font Format
MicroType
[1]
[2]
CG
Times
CG
Triumvirate
CG
Times
True
Type
Description
E6
6N
Part
√
√
√
√
ISO 8859/10 Latin 6
E7
12N
Part
√
X
X
√
ISO 8859/7
Latin/Greek
E9
9N
X
X
√
EG
12N
Part
√
Part
EH
7H
Part
√
ER
10N
Part
FR
1F
G8
√
[1]
√
√
[1]
Part
√
√
[1]
√
Part
√
√
[1]
Part
Part
Part
Part
8G
Part
√
Part
√
√
[1]
Greek-8
GK
12G
Part
√
Part
√
√
[1]
PC-8 Greek
GR
1G
Part
Part
Part
Part
H0
0H
Part
√
Part
√
√
[1]
Hebrew-7
H8
8H
Part
√
Part
√
√
[1]
Hebrew-8
IT
0I
√
√
√
√
√
ISO 15: Italian
L$[1]
14L
√
√
X
X
√
HP4000 ITC Zapf
Dingbats
LG
1U
√
√
√
√
√
Legal
M8
8M
√
√
√
√
√
Math-8
MC
12J
√
√
MS
5M
√
√
√
√
P9[1]
13U
X
X
√
√
PB
6J
Part
Part
Part
Part
√
Microsoft Publishing
PC
10U
√
√
√
√
√
PC-8, Code Page 437
PD
11U
√
√
√
√
√
PC-8 D/N, Code Page
437N
PE
17U
Part
√
√
√
√
PC-852 Latin 2
PG
10G
Part
√
Part
√
√
[1]
√
[3]
[1]
√
√
ISO 8859/15 Latin 9
ISO 8859/7
Latin/Greek
ISO 8859/8
Latin/Hebrew
ISO 8859/5
Latin/Cyrillic
ISO 69: French
ISO 21: German
√
[3]
Macintosh
[3]
√
[3]
PS Math
[3]
√
[3]
PC-858 Multilingual
√
√
[1]
PC-851 Latin/Greek
(continued)
238
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix I – Symbol Sets and Character Maps
Code Page
Identifier
Intellifont
HP
CG
Datamax
(PCL) Triumvirate
[1]
Font Format
MicroType
[2]
CG
Times
CG
Triumvirate
CG
Times
Description
True
Type
15H
√
√
√
√
PI
15U
Part
Part
Part
Part
PM
12U
√
√
PR
10V
√
√
√
√
√
PC-864 Latin/Arabic
PT
9T
√
√
√
√
√
PC-8 TK, Code Page
437T
PU
9J
√
√
√
√
√
PC-1004
PV
26U
Part
√
√
√
√
PC-775 Baltic
PX
12U
√
√
X
X
PY
3Y
X
X
X
X
R8
8U
√
√
√
√
R9[1]
4U
X
X
√
SP
2S
√
√
√
√
√
ISO 17: Spanish
SW
0S
√
√
√
√
√
ISO 11: Swedish
SY
19M
X
X
X
X
√
Symbol
TK
8T
√
√
X
X
TS
10J
√
√
√
√
√
PS Text
UK
1E
√
√
√
√
√
ISO 4: United Kingdom
US
0U
√
√
√
√
√
ISO 6: ASCII
U8
-
X
X
√
√
√
UTF8
VI
13J
√
√
√
√
√
Ventura International
VM
6M
√
√
√
√
VU
14J
Part
Part
Part
Part
√
Ventura US
W1[3]
19U
Part
√
√
√
√
Windows 3.1 Latin 1
WA
9V
Part
√
√
√
√
[3]
√
√
[3]
[3]
√
[1]
PH
√
√
[3]
PC-862 Latin/Hebrew
Pi Font
PC-850 Multilingual
PTXT3000
√
[1]
√
√
[3]
Non-UGL, Generic Pi
Font
Roman-8
Roman-9
Turkish-8
√
√
[1]
[1]
Ventura Math
Windows Latin/Arabic
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
239
Appendix I – Symbol Sets and Character Maps
Code Page
Identifier
Intellifont
HP
CG
Datamax
(PCL) Triumvirate
[1]
Font Format
MicroType
[2]
CG
Times
CG
Triumvirate
CG
Times
True
Type
Description
WD
579L
X
X
X
X
√
Wingdings
WE[3]
9E
Part
√
√
√
√
Windows 3.1 Latin 2
WG[3]
9G
Part
√
Part
√
WL[3]
19L
Part
√
√
√
WN
9U
√
√
X
X
WO
9U
√
√
√
[3]
WR[3]
9R
Part
√
√
[3]
WT[3]
5T
√
√
√
√
√
Windows Latin/Greek
Windows 3.1 Baltic
(Latv, Lith)
Windows
[3]
√
√
[1]
√
[3]
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
√
[1]
Windows Latin/Cyrillic
√
√
Windows 3.1 Latin 5
[1]
Supported in the EX2 model.
Supported in the A-Class, H-Class, I-Class, and EX2 models.
[3]
Contains the Euro currency symbol ( ).
[2]
Table I-1: Single Byte Code Pages
Double-Byte Symbols, Chinese, Kanji, and Korean
Character Map Selection
Double byte scalable fonts are mapped through a ‘character map’. This mapping allows the
host application to select a variety of characters to match the application. Each of the code
pages allows the host application to emulate a character set for the application.
Double Byte Character Map
Character
Map ID
TrueType
Font
B5
√
BIG 5 (Taiwan) Encoded*
EU
√
EUC (Extended UNIX Code)
GB
√
Government Bureau Industry Standard; Chinese (PRC); default
JS
√
JIS (Japanese Industry Standard); default
SJ
√
Shift JIS
UC
√
Unicode (including Korean)
*Unavailable for the EX2.
Description
Table I-2: Double Byte Character Map
The double-byte symbol set is selected using <STX>yUxx command. The single-byte symbol
set is selected using the same command, <STX>ySxx. Each affects an independent database
selection and has no impact on the other.
240
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix J
General Purpose Input Output (GPIO) Port Applications
GPIO-equipped printers can interface with most external controlling devices. Operational
preferences can be stored for subsequent power-ups using the printer menu, or via <STX>Kc
commands. Functions and connections vary, as discussed below.
When a label is ready to print but awaiting a Start of Print signal, the prompt differs
slightly depending upon equipment:
• Non-Display Models – The STOP LED will flash.
• Display-Equipped Models – The display will indicate WAITING FOR SIGNAL.
Always wear a wrist strap and follow ESD prevention measures when handling the GPIO
or Applicator Interface Card. For specification information, reference the printer’s
Maintenance Manual.
Applicator Interface Card (Type 1)
The Applicator Interface Card (Type 1) is equipped with a GPIO Port, an Auxiliary (Serial B)
Port and two LEDs as detailed below.
Applicator Interface Card
1
2
3
4
5
Connector
Pin-Outs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
7
8
Auxiliary Port, J1
9
Green and Yellow LEDs
9
10
GPIO Port, J2
11
12
13
14
15
Applicator Interface Card (Type 1) Location and Connector Pin Outs
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
241
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
Applicator Interface Card (Type 1) Jumper Locations
The GPIO Port allows printer integration. Functions can be configured using the menu
system or via <STX>Kc commands. All configuration settings are saved in non-volatile
memory. Jumper settings are critical:
•
Jumper settings allow internal or external power distribution to the applicator circuitry.
•
Jumper settings allow + 5 or +24 VDC output signal levels.
Failure to configure the card for the device(s) you are connecting may result in damage
to the printer and/or the applicator.
The table below details the GPIO Port functions, and configurable settings:
242
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
Applicator Interface Card (Type 1) GPIO Port (J2) Overview
Pin
Number
1
2
Signal
Name
Ground
(Configurable)
+5 VDC
(Configurable)
Signal
Direction
Active
Setting
Jumper
Placement
Ground
Ground
JMP 7 ‘On’
Printer chassis ground is
used
Open
Open
JMP 7 ‘Off’
Ground return must be
supplied
Output
+5 VDC
JMP 8 ‘On’
Printer +5 VDC is used
(.5 amp max.)
Open
Open
JMP 8 ‘Off’
+5 VDC must be supplied
N/A
N/A
3
Start Of
Print [3]
Input
Programmable
4
Slew
Label
Input
Programmable
5
Pause
Toggle
Input
Low
Input
Low
[2]
6
Reprint
7
+24 VDC
(1.0 amp
max.)
Output
+24 VDC
8
Ground
Ground
Ground
9
Ribbon
Low
Output
Programmable
10
Service
Required [1]
Output
Low
11
End Of
Print
Output
Programmable
12
Media
Out
Output
Low
– OR –
13
Ribbon
Out
Output
Low
Pins 2 & 3 =
+24 VDC
14
Data Ready
(DRDY)
Output
Low
15
Spare
Output
N/A
JMP 9:
Function /
Description
When inactive, all output
pins will be pulled up to
the voltage determined
by this jumper setting.
Pins 1 & 2
= +5 VDC
N/A
Failure to
configure the card
for the device(s) you
are connecting may
result in damage to
the printer and/or
the applicator.
N/A
[1]
Evoked by occurrences listed under ‘Fault Messages’ in the A-Class Operator’s Manual.
Reprints the last label exactly, with no increment or time stamp changes; use it for error conditions.
Always keeping this signal LOW will result in non-stop printing.
[3]
If active with no current print job, “WAITING FOR DATA” is displayed. Specifying a quantity of 9999
while always keeping this signal ‘ON’ will cause non-stop label printing, except in single label mode
(see Imaging Mode, Section 4.2.5 of the A-Class Operator’s Manual), which will cause the printer to
stop between labels.
[2]
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
243
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
The Start of Print Circuit depends upon the applicator system’s requirements:
J2 - GPIO PORT
•
For direct inputs –
3 Start of Print
Use the printer’s +5VDC and Ground to supply
the devices interfacing to the GPIO inputs (as
shown, right).
4 Slew Label
5 Pause Toggle
6 Reprint
1 Ground
Vcc = 5 VDC External Power Source
•
For isolated inputs –
J2 -GPIO PORT
2 Vcc
Supply an external +5 VDC and ground,
remove JMP 7 and JMP 8 from the Applicator
Interface Card and follow the schematic shown
right.
3 Start of Print
4
Slew Label
5 Pause Toggle
6 Reprint
Ground
The Auxiliary Port (J1) is an RS-232 interface. Serial data transfer settings (such as baud
rate, word length, and parity) can be made using <STX>KcSP commands. These settings
must match the device that you are connecting. Jumpers JMP 1 – JMP 4 should be in
installed.
Applicator Interface Card (Type 1) Auxiliary Data Port
Pin Number(s)
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6&9
7
8
+5 VDC (0.5 Amp )
RX
TX
DTR
Ground
N/C
RTS
CTS
Indicators: The Green and Yellow LEDs provide a visual indication of printer/applicator
signal activity:
Applicator Interface Card (Type 1) Indicators
244
• Yellow LED
Flash at power-up and when the card’s outputs change state.
• Green LED
Flash at power-up and when the card’s inputs change state.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
Applicator Interface Card (Type 2)
The Applicator Interface Card (Type 2) has two GPIO Ports, two Auxiliary Ports (Serial C &
D) and two indicator LEDs as detailed below.
15
14
J2
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
9
8
7
J4
6
5
13
4
12
3
11
2
10
1
9
5
8
J1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
4
3
2
J3
8
1
Applicator Interface Card (Type 2) Port Pin Out
Applicator Interface Card (Type 2) Hardware Jumper Locations
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
245
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
GPI/O A (J1)
Four dedicated inputs are available for control of printer functions. These inputs require
no external pull-ups, are designed to interface to open-collector outputs and accept totem
pole outputs from +4.5 to + 26 VDC. Optical isolators are available to provide isolation. Two
print control circuit examples are given below.
•
GPI/O A - J1
For direct inputs –
Use the printer’s +5VDC and Ground to supply
the devices interfacing to the GPI/O A inputs
(as shown, right).
3 Start of Print
4
Slew Label
5 Toggle/Pause
6 Reprint
1 Ground
•
For isolated inputs –
To provide galvanic isolation for the GPI/O A
inputs, remove jumper JMP 9 then supply an
external +5VDC source voltage to Pin 2, and
remove jumper JMP 8 then supply an external
Ground to Pin 1 (as shown, right).
+5 VDC External Source
GPI/O A - J1
2 Vcc
3 Start of Print
4
Slew Label
5 Toggle/Pause
6 Reprint
1
Ground
Seven dedicated outputs are available for control, warning, and error functions. These
open-collector outputs are slew-limited. Optional 10K ohm pull-up resistors, tied to a
common point for use at either +5 or +24 VDC, are available via jumper JMP 1.
To avoid damage if external pull-up resistors are used (that is, without jumper JMP1
installed), ensure that the external voltage does not exceed +30VDC.
The table below details the GPI/O A pin assignments, settings and functions:
246
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
Failure to properly configure the GPIO Port can result in damage to the printer and / or connected devices.
Applicator Interface Card (Type 2) GPI/O Port A Overview
Pin
Number
1
Signal Name
Signal
Direction
Ground
[1]
Jumper
Position
JMP 8
+5 VDC
Installed
Printer chassis is used.
Removed
Ground must be supplied.
Printer +5VDC is used (.5 amp maximum)
N/A
2
Installed
JMP 9
Removed
3
+5VDC must be supplied.
Programmable
4
Slew Label
Programmable
5
Toggle /
Pause
6
Reprint
7
+24 VDC
8
Ground
Input
The printer pauses when the signal is taken LOW.
N/A
11
12
Media Out
13
Ribbon Out
14
Data Ready
15
Option Fault
N/A
Printer chassis.
When inactive, outputs will
be pulled up to a voltage
determined by this jumper
setting, where:
Output
The last label is reprinted exactly, with no increment or time stamp
changes; recommended for use during error conditions. Keeping this
signal LOW results in non-stop printing.
Printer +24 VDC (1.5 amp maximum)
N/A
Ribbon Low
Service
Required
End Of Print
10
[2]
Start Of Print
Drawing more than .5 amps can cause unreliable printer operation.
[2]
9
[1]
Function / Description
JMP 1
•
•
•
Pins 1 – 2 = +5VDC;
Pins 2 – 3 = +24VDC; or,
None = A common external
voltage (not to exceed
+30VDC) via external pullups (providing a 20K ohm
feedback path through any
two outputs).
Programmable
condition.
[1]
. Signifies a RIBBON LOW DIAMETER warning
Evoked by occurrences listed under ‘Fault Messages.’[1] Active LOW.
Programmable
[1]
. Signifies the End of Print (EOP) process.
Evoked during an Out of Stock condition. Active LOW.
Evoked during an Out of Ribbon condition. Active LOW.
Evoked when a label is waiting to be printed. Then after the printer
receives the Start of Print signal, printing will begin. For synchronization
with the print cycle, the End Of Print signal indicates the completion of
the print process. Active LOW.
Evoked during a Linear Scanner or RFID fault condition. Active LOW.
Signal directions are given relative to the printer.
If active with no current print job, “WAITING FOR DATA” will be displayed. Specifying a quantity of 9999 while keeping this signal ON will cause non-stop
label printing, except in single label “Imaging Mode”, which will cause the printer to stop between labels.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
247
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
GPI/O B (J2)
Six unassigned inputs are designed to interface to open-collector outputs. These inputs
require no external pull-ups and blocking diodes allow the use of totem pole outputs from
+4.5 to + 26 VDC. Optical isolators are available to provide isolation. Two print control
interface circuit examples are given below.
GPI/O B - J2
•
For direct inputs –
Use the printer’s +5VDC and Ground to supply
the devices interfacing to the GPI/O B inputs
(as shown, right).
13 Input 1
8 Input 2
3 Input 3
12 Input 4
7 Input 5
2 Input 6
6 Ground
+5 VDC External Source
GPI/O B - J2
•
For electrically-isolated inputs –
To provide galvanic isolation for the GPI/O B
inputs, remove jumper JMP 11 then supply an
external +5VDC source voltage to Pin 1, and
remove jumper JMP 10 then supply an
external Ground to Pin 6 (as shown, right).
1 Vcc
13 Input 1
8 Input 2
3 Input 3
12 Input 4
7 Input 5
2 Input 6
6 Ground
Six unassigned outputs are programmable and slew-limited. Optional 10K ohm pull-up
resistors, one for each of the output lines, can be used at either +5 or +24 VDC via jumpers
JMP 2 – 7.
To avoid damage if external pull-up resistors are used (that is, when Jumpers JMP 2 - 7 are
not installed), ensure that the external voltage does not exceed +30VDC.
The table below details the GPI/O B pin assignments, settings and functions:
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
248
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
Failure to properly configure the GPIO Port can result in damage to the printer and / or connected devices.
Applicator Interface Card (Type 2) GPI/O Port B Overview
Pin Number
Signal Name /
Direction [1]
Jumper
Position
Function / Description
Printer +5VDC is used (.5 amp maximum).
1
+5 VDC
JMP 11
2
Input 6
N/A
3
Input 3
N/A
Installed
Removed
4
Output 6
JMP 7
N/A
N/A
Output 3
JMP 4
6
Ground
JMP 10
7
Input 5
N/A
8
Input 2
N/A
9
Output 5
JMP 6
Output 2
JMP 3
Installed: Pins 2 – 3
Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC.
An external voltage via external pull-ups determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
Installed: Pins 1 – 2
Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Installed: Pins 2 – 3
Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC.
Removed
An external voltage via external pull-ups determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
Installed
Printer chassis is used.
Removed
Ground must be supplied.
N/A
Programmed input function.
N/A
Programmed input function.
Installed: Pins 1 – 2
Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Installed: Pins 2 – 3
Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC.
An external voltage via external pull-ups determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
Installed: Pins 1 – 2
Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Installed: Pins 2 – 3
Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC.
Removed
An external voltage via external pull-ups determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
11
+24 VDC
N/A
N/A
Printer +24 VDC (1.5 amp maximum).
12
Input 4
N/A
N/A
Programmed input function.
13
Input 1
N/A
N/A
Programmed input function.
14
Output 4
JMP 5
Installed: Pins 1 – 2
Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Installed: Pins 2 – 3
Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC.
Removed
15
Output 1
JMP 2
An external voltage via external pull-ups determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
Installed: Pins 1 – 2
Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Installed: Pins 2 – 3
Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC.
Removed
[1]
Programmed input function.
Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Removed
10
+5VDC must be supplied.
Programmed input function.
Installed: Pins 1 – 2
Removed
5
Drawing more than .5 amps can cause unreliable printer operation.
An external voltage via external pull-ups determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
Signal directions are given relative to the printer.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
249
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
COM C (J4)
Serial Port C functions as an RS-232 interface or as a dedicated device interface, according
to jumper setting configurations indicated below:
COM C Jumper Setting Functions
Function
Position
JMP 12
JMP 13
JMP 14
JMP 15
RS-232 Communications
On
On
On
On
RFID
Off
On
On
On
Linear Scanner
On
Off
On
On
Remote Display
On
On
Off
On
Jumper settings will override most printer menu settings; however, if COM C jumpers
are set for RS-232 communications with both the RFID and Linear Scanner options
menu-enabled the printer will automatically assign the Linear Scanner to COM C (J4).
COM D (J3)
Serial Port D is an RS-232 communications interface.
Indicators:
Real-time incoming (IN) and outgoing (OUT) signal activity can be observed via LEDs on the
card bracket. Sampled every millisecond, color change occurs with a corresponding change
of signal state.
Unused, non-connected inputs and outputs will have an indeterminate state and assume a
value of 1 or 0.
Signal In
Signal Out
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
250
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
I-Class GPIO
I-Class GPIO functions are detailed in the table below:
I-Class GPIO Overview
Pin
Number
Signal
Name
Signal
State
Signal
Direction*
1
Vcc
+5 VDC
Output
+5 VDC power supply.
2
Ribbon
Fault
Low
Output
Goes low when a ribbon out condition is
detected.
3
Paper
Fault
Low
Output
Goes low when an out of stock condition is
detected.
4
Printer
Fault
Low
Output
Goes low when any printer fault is detected.
5
Ribbon
Low
Programmable
Output
Goes high (or low) when a low ribbon supply
is detected.
6
End of
Print
Programmable
Output
Goes high (or low) when printing is
complete, typically monitored to initiate the
next Start of Print sequence.
7
Backup
Label
Programmable
Input
When received, will position a presented
label for printing, provided that the
programmed present distance is greater
than zero.
8
Start of
Print Signal
(SOP)
Programmable
Input
When received, begins printing. (If the
printer awaits the SOP signal, WAITING FOR
SIGNAL will be displayed).
9
Signal
Ground
Ground
N/A
Description
Ground return.
GPIO pin configuration (illustrated right), as viewed from the
rear of the printer:
I-Class Control Circuit
Connections for an external Start of Print / Backup Label control
can be made (1) directly to Pin 8 / 7 using a TTL-level input or
(2) with an interface circuit similar to the one shown right. For
additional interfacing requirements; see the table above.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
251
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
M-Class II GPIO
M II GPIO functions are detailed in the table below:
M- Class GPIO Overview
Pin
Number
Signal
Name
Signal
State
Signal
Direction*
1
Vcc
+5 VDC
2.5 Amp
(fused)
Output
Printer +5 VDC
2
Printer
Fault
Low
Output
Goes low upon printer detection of a fault
condition.
3
Spare
Reserved
Input
Must be pulled high (see sample SOP
circuit, below).
When active, will begin printing.
Recommend only setting this signal to
ACTIVE LOW. When ready to print a label,
the applicator should hold this signal low for
at least 50ms – or until EOP goes not
active. See sample SOP circuit, below.
4
Start of
Print
(SOP)
Programmable
Input
5
End of
Print
(EOP)
Programmable
Output
6&8
Signal
Ground
Ground
N/A
7
+24 VDC
1.6 Amp
(fused)
Output
Description
Signifies the end of the print process. Can
be monitored to initiate next Start of Print
sequence. Minimum signal time 30ms.
Ground
Printer +24 VDC
[1]
Given relative to the printer.
Port operation is configuration dependent: Disable all unused optional functions (e.g., Present Sensor
or Cutter) and set GPIO to “YES” (or on display-equipped models, to APPLICATOR). Use the
Configuration Set command (<STX>Kc); or program the selections for non-display models via the
“Printer Setup Menu List” and for display-equipped models via the menu.
[2]
The GPIO signals can be accessed via the front Option Port connector (Molex, P/N 44300800), or via the Main PCB J6 connector (AMP, P/N 640456-8), where the pin-outs (as
viewed when facing the printer) are as follows:
Option Port
8
6
4
Main PCB (J6)
2
1
7
252
5
3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
M-Class Sample SOP Circuit
GPIO Connector Pin Number
Pin 3 should be pulled to +5VDC. In additional,
connections for the external Start of Print control can
either be directly made to Pin 4 of the Option Port (or
Main PCB connector) using a TTL-level input, or via an
interface circuit (similar to the one shown). For more
information, see the table below.
Vcc 1
1K O
Spare 3
1K O
SOP 4
Gnd 8
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
253
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
254
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix K
The tables in this section use the following standards: X = Supported; ND = Non-Display
Maximum Field & Character Values
Printer
[1]
Maximum Format Fields
A-Class,
H-Class,
I-4210, I-4212, I-4308, I-4406, I-4604,
Mark II
700
I-4206 & I-4208
500
[1]
Total Characters All Fields
32768
When the product of the number of fields and characters in each field exceeds the available printer memory (the limiting factor), portions
of the label may not print.
Table K-1: Maximum Label Format Fields & Characters
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
255
Appendix K –Maximum Row, Column, & Character Values; Print Resolutions & Widths; and, Module Identifiers & Allocations
Print Resolutions and Maximum Width & Record Column Values
Model
Print Resolution
Dot Dimensions (nominal)
Maximum Print Width
Maximum “gggg” Value
DPI
DPMM
Inches
Millimeters
Dots
Millimeters
Inch
Metric
A-4212
203
8.0
.0043 x .0052
.11 x .13
832
104.1
410
1041
A-4310
300
11.8
.0027 x .0043
.07 x .11
1248
105.7
416
1057
A-4408
406
16.0
.0013 x .0018
.03 x .05
1664
104.1
410
1041
A-4606
600
23.6
.0008 x .0015
.02 x .04
2496
105.7
416
1057
A-6212
203
8.0
.0043 x .0052
.11 x .13
1344
168.1
662
1680
A-6310
300
11.8
.0027 x .0043
.07 x .11
1920
162.6
640
1626
EX2
203
8.0
.0043 x .0052
.11 x .13
832
104.1
410
1041
H-4212 & H-4212X
203
8.0
.0043 x .0052
.11 x .13
832
104.1
410
1041
H-4310 & H-4310X
300
11.8
.0027 x .0043
.07 x .11
1248
105.7
416
1046
H-4408
406
16.0
.0013 x .0018
.03 x .05
1664
104.1
410
1041
H-4606 & H-4606X
600
23.6
.0008 x .0015
.02 x .04
2496
105.7
416
1057
H-6210 & H-6212X
203
8.0
.0043 x .0052
.11 x .13
1344
168.1
662
1680
H-6308 & H-6310X
300
11.8
.0027 x .0043
.07 x .11
1920
162.6
640
1626
H-8308X
300
11.8
.0027 x .0043
.07 x .11
2560
216.7
853
2167
I-4206, I-4208,
I-4210 & I-4212
203
8.0
.0043 x .0052
.11 x .13
832
104.1
410
1041
I-4308
300
11.8
.0027 x .0043
.07 x .11
1248
105.7
416
1046
I-4406
406
16.0
.0013 x .0018
.03 x .05
1664
104.1
410
1041
I-4604
600
23.6
.0008 x .0015
.02 x .04
2496
105.7
416
1057
M-Class 4206 &
4210 Mark II
203
8.0
.0043 x .0052
.11 x .13
864
108.0
425
1080
M-Class 4308 Mark II
300
11.8
.0027 x .0043
.07 x .11
1248
105.7
416
1046
Table K-2: Print Widths, Resolutions, and Record Column Field Values
256
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix K – Maximum Row, Column, & Character Values; Print Resolutions & Widths; and, Module Identifiers & Allocations
Row Adjust Range
Printer
Resolution (DPI)
Column & Present Adjust Fine Tune Parameter
Range (+/– dots)
Row Adjust Fine Tune
Parameter Range (+/– dots)
203
-100 – 100 dots
-100 – 2030 dots
300
-150 – 150 dots
-150 – 3000 dots
400
-200 – 200 dots
-200 – 4060 dots
600
-300 – 300 dots
-300 – 6000 dots
Table K-3: Row Adjust Range per Print Resolution
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
257
Appendix K –Maximum Row, Column, & Character Values; Print Resolutions & Widths; and, Module Identifiers & Allocations
Memory Module Identifiers and Allocations
D
F
[8]
EX2
M-Class
4210
Mark II &
4308
Mark II
X
DRAM (512 KB - default size), configurable.
X
X
X
X
DRAM (default 1MB), configurable.
X
X
X
X
SDIO
X
X
4 MB Flash option (as equipped)
[4]
X
[2]
X
512 KB Flash, Main CCA, configurable up to 6.5 MB with Flash option
≈ 1.0 MB Flash, Main CCA
[4, 5]
≈ 4.0 MB Flash, Main CCA
[4, 5]
USB Host Ports (as equipped)
I
USB Host Ports (as equipped)
J
64 MB option (as equipped)
X
ILPC Module, configurable 256 KB to 6.5 MB (as equipped).
Y
64 KB Flash – Menu / EFIGS – protected
128 KB Flash – Menu / EFIGS – protected
Z
X
X
Default, as assigned by <STX>X
H
[4]
X
X
Flash (512 KB available to user)
256 KB Flash, Main CCA
G
M-Class
4206
Mark II
C
DRAM (512 KB - default size)
H-Class
B
[1]
Description
I-Class
A
A-Class
Module ID
Printer
4 MB Flash – Option ILPC – protected
[3, 4]
X
X
X
X[7]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
[3,4]
X
[6]
X
[5]
[5]
X[5]
X[5]
X[5]
X
X
X
[6]
X[5]
X
X
[1]
≈100,000 writes for semi-or-permanent image, font and format storage, dependent upon options and available memory; see the configuration label or
<STX>KC.
[2]
Not available for the I-4206 and I-4208.
[3]
Modules G and X are partitioned to equal the sum of the total space available.
[4]
Configurable; see <STX>KcMCC.
[5]
Modules X and Y are factory allocated and locked; memory is used from Module G.
[6]
Modules X and Y are treated as folders or subdirectories within Module B and memory is used from Module B.
[7]
Size dependent on main board flash size and options installed, up to 6.0MB.
[8]
Queries report Modules A and B, and X and Y only.
Table K-4: Memory Module Identifiers and Default Memory Allocations
258
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix L
Speed Ranges
Printer Speed Command*
Speed Value:
Inches per Second
Millimeters per Second
A
1.0
25
B
1.5
38
C
2.0
51
D
2.5
63
E
3.0
76
F
3.5
89
G
4.0
102
H
4.5
114
I
5.0
127
J
5.5
140
K
6.0
152
L
6.5
165
M
7.0
178
N
7.5
191
O
8.0
203
P
8.5
216
Q
9.0
227
R
9.5
241
S
10.0
254
T
10.5
267
U
11.0
279
V
11.5
292
W
12.0
305
X
13.0
330
Y
14.0
356
Z
15.0
381
a
16.0
406
b
17.0
432
c
18.0
457
d
19.0
483
20.0
*Applicable speed values are printer dependent. See Table L-2, below.
e
508
Table L-1: Speed Command Values
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
259
Appendix L – Speed Ranges
Model
Print Speed
Feed Speed
Reverse Speed
Slew Speed
Range
Default
Range
Default
Range
Default
Range
Default
A-4212
C – W
O
C – W
O
C – I
G
C – a
O
A-4310
C – S
O
C – W
O
C – I
G
C – a
O
A-4408
C – O
K
C – S
K
C – I
G
C – a
K
A-4606
C – K
G
C – O
G
C – I
G
C – a
G
A-6212
C – W
O
C – W
O
C – I
G
C – Y
O
A-6310
C – S
O
C – W
O
C – I
G
C – Y
O
EX2
A – G
G
A – G
G
A – E
C
N/A
N/A
H-4212 &
H-4212X
C – W
O
C – W
O
C – G
G
C – a
O
H-4310 &
H-4310X
C – S
O
C – W
O
C – G
G
C – a
O
H-4408
C – O
K
C – S
K
C – G
G
C – a
K
H-4606 &
H-4606X
C – K
G
C – O
G
C – G
G
C – a
G
H-6210
C – S
K
C – W
K
C – G
G
C – W
K
H-6212X
C – W
O
C – W
O
C – G
G
C – Y
O
H-6308
C – O
K
C – S
K
C – G
G
C – S
K
H-6310X
C – S
O
C – W
O
C – G
G
C – Y
O
H-8308X
C – O
K
C – S
K
C – G
G
C – W
K
I-4206
C – K
K
C – O
K
C – G
G
C – K
K
I-4208
C – O
O
C – O
O
C – G
G
C – O
O
I-4210
C – S
O
C – S
O
C – G
G
C – W
O
I-4212
C – W
O
C – W
O
C – G
G
C – W
O
I-4308
C – O
K
C – O
K
C – G
G
C – O
K
I-4406
C – K
I
C – K
I
C – G
G
C – K
I
I-4604
C – G
E
C – G
E
C – G
G
C – G
E
4206
Mark II
C – K
K
C – K
K
C – G
G
C – K
K
4210
Mark II
C – S
O
C – S
O
C – G
G
C – S
O
4308
Mark II
C – O
K
C – O
K
C – G
G
C – O
K
Table L-2: Speed Ranges and Defaults
260
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix M
Commands by Function
Commands by Function
Function
Backup speed
Batch quantity request
Cancel
Character bitmapped data
Character code
Character dump mode
Column offset amount
Configuration label and dot pattern print
Configuration Set (See Table 5-1 for individual listings)
Continuous paper length
Count by
Cut
Cut by
Cut by
Decrement alphanumerically
Decrement numerically
DIP switch, host controlled settings
Dot size height and width
Edge sensor enable
Feed rate
Feedback characters enable
Field data line terminator
File delete from module
Firmware version request
Font descriptor
Font ID number
Form feed
Set Present Distance
Format attribute
Graphics image download
Heat setting
Inches
Increment alphanumerically
Increment numerically
Label format field replacement
Label formatting start
Label length maximum
Command
pa
<SOH>E
<SOH>C
<ESC>(snnnWdata
<ESC>*cnnnE
<STX>P
Cnnnn
<STX>Z
<STX>Kc
<STX>cnnnn
^nn
<STX>o
:nnnn
cnn
<fii
- fii
<STX>Vn
Dwh
<STX>e
<STX>Sa
<STX>a
Tnn
<STX>xmfname
<STX>v
<ESC>)snnnW
<ESC>*cnnnD
<STX>F
<STX>Kfnnnn
An
<STX>Iabfnamecr
Hnn
<STX>n
>fii
+fii
<STX>Unnstring
<STX>L
<STX>Mnnnn
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
261
Appendix M – Commands By Function
Function
Command
<STX>KQ
Memory query
Memory query (new format)
<STX>Kq
Metric
<STX>m
Metric
m
Mirror
M
Module clear
<STX>qm
Module, compress
<STX>zm
Module, directory request
<STX>Wa
Module, set default
<STX>Xm
Module, FLASH memory Test
<STX>w
Module, RAM memory Test
<STX>t
Modules, clear all
<STX>Q
Pause for each label
<STX>J
Pause toggle
<SOH>B
Pause, controlled
<STX>p
Place data in global register
G
Print last label format
<STX>G
Print speed
Pa
Print time and date
<STX>Tstring
Print head dot pattern test label
<STX>T
Quantity labels printed
<STX>Ennnn
Quantity of labels
Qnnnn
Recall global data and place in field
<STX>Sa
Recall stored label
rname
Reflective sensor select
<STX>r
Replacement field tag
U
Reset
<SOH>#
Resettable counters reset
<STX>Kr
Ribbon saver
<STX>Rx
Row offset amount
Rnnnn
RS-232 port test
<STX>k
Scalable font download
<STX>imtaabbb...bcrxxxxxxxxfff...f
Sensor values request
<STX>Y
Feed speed
Sa
Status ASCII string request
<SOH>A
Status byte request
<SOH>F
Store label in module & terminate formatting
smname
Symbol set select
<STX>ySaa
Symbol set select
ySaa
Terminate formatting - print label format
E
Terminate label formatting, do not print label
X
Time and date request
<STX>B
Time and date set
<STX>AwMMddyearhhmmjjj
Update system database with current database
<SOH>U
Zero (Ø) conversion to “0”
z
Table M-1: Commands Listed by Function
262
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix N
Image Loading
The printer will accept four types of image files: .BMP, .IMG, .PCX and a special Datamax 7bit ASCII file (as defined in this section). Use of the Datamax 7-bit ASCII format will require
at least twice as much data transmission time as the other formats, (see <STX>I). The
Datamax ASCII image file format is made up of a set of records with identical formats, each
representing a dot row of the image; a terminator follows the last of these records.
Dot-row record
•
•
•
•
Dot-row record
Terminator
Each dot-row record has the following format:
Syntax:
80nndd...d<CR>
Where:
nn
-
Is the number of character pairs in dd...d, represented in
ASCII hex.
dd…d
-
Is dot data, character pairs, ASCII hex, 00-FF.
Duplicate records may be encoded using a repeat data record, following the data record that
needs duplicating. The repeat data record format is:
Syntax:
0000FFnn<CR>
Where:
nn
-
Is the number of duplicates, ASCII hex, 00-FF.
The terminator, last record, at the image download is: FFFF<CR>
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
263
Appendix N – Image Loading
^BqA(CR)
^BIAAFLOGO(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC00000007FFC0003FFFFC001FC0001FC0003FFFFC0018000FFC001FF8000C0003FFFFE000000FFFFE0001FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC00000000FFC0003FFFFC001FC0001FC0003FFFFC0018000FFC001FF800040001FFFFE0000007FFFC0001FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC000000003FC0001FFFFC001FC0001FC0001FFFFC0018000FFC001FF800040001FFFFE0000003FFFC0001FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC000000000FC0001FFFFC001FE0001FE0001FFFFC00180007FC000FF800060001FFFFE0000003FFFC0003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000007E0001FFFFC001FE0001FE0001FFFFC00180007FC000FFC00060000FFFFE0000001FFFC0003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000003E0000FFFFC001FE0000FE0000FFFFC00180007FC0007FC00020000FFFFE0000001FFF80003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000001E0000FFFFC001FE0000FF0000FFFFC001C0007FC0007FC00030000FFFFE0010000FFF80003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000000F0000FFFFC001FE0000FF0000FFFFC001C0007FC0007FC00030000FFFFE00180007FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000000700007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0007FC0003FC000380007FFFE00180007FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF0000000000380007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0003FC0003FE000380007FFFE001C0003FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF0000000000380007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0003FC0003FE000380007FFFE001E0003FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF0000000000180003FFFC001FF00007FC0003FFFC001C0003FC0001FE0001C0003FFFE001E0001FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF00000000001C0003FFFC001FF00007FC0003FFFC001E0003FC0001FE0001C0003FFFE001F0000FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF00007C00000C0003FFFC001FF00007FE0003FFFC001E0003FC0000FF0001E0003FFFE001F0000FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80007F80000E0001FFFC001FF80007FE0001FFFC001E0003FC0000FF0001E0001FFFE001F80007F0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80007FC0000E00000000001FF80007FE00000000001E0001FC0000FF0001E00000000001FC0007F0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80007FE0000600000000001FF80003FF00000000001E0001FC00007F0000F00000000001FC0003F0001FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80003FF0000700000000001FF80003FF00000000001F0001FC00007F0000F00000000001FE0001E0001FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80003FF0000700000000001FF80003FF00000000001F0001FC00007F8000F00000000001FE0001E0001FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFC0001FFC0003C0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007E0000000001FFE00000003FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0001FFC0001E0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007E0000000001FFF00000003FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0001FFC0001E0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007F0000000001FFF00000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFC0001F0000000001FFE0000FFF0000000001F8000FC000007C0003F0000000001FFF80000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFC0001F0000000001FFE0000FFF0000000001FC0007C000007E0003F0000000001FFF80000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFE0001F0001FFC001FFE0000FFF8001FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFC0000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFE0000F8001FFC001FFF0000FFF8000FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFE000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF0000FFE0000F8000FFC001FFF0000FFF8000FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFE000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF0000FFE0000F8000FFC001FFF00007FFC000FFC001FC0007C000001F0001FC000FFE001FFFF000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF00007FE0000FC000FFC001FFF00007FFC0007FC001FE0007C002001F0001FC0007FE001FFFF000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF00007FF0000FC0007FC001FFF00007FFE0007FC001FE0003C002001F0001FE0007FE001FFFF800000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF00007FF0000FE0007FC001FFF80007FFE0007FC001FE0003C003000F0001FE0007FE001FFFFC00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80007FF00007E0007FC001FFF80007FFE0003FC001FE0003C003000F0001FE0003FE001FFFFC00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80007FF00007E0003FC001FFF80003FFF0003FC001FE0003C00300078001FF0003FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80003FF00007F0003FC001FFF80003FFF0003FC001FE0003C00380078000FF0003FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80003FF80007F0003FC001FFF80003FFF0001FC001FF0003C00380078000FF8001FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80003FF80007F0001FC001FFF80003FFF8001FC001FF0001C003C0038000FF8001FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFC0000000007FFC000001F80000000000FC000001FFF0000003FFE0000007FFC000001FFFC0003F80007FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFE000000000FFFC000001F80000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFE0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FC0003FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFF000000000FFFE000001F80000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FC0003FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFC00000000FFFE000001FC0000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FE0001FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFE00000000FFFE000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFF000001FFFC0003FE0001FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFF00000001FFFF000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF8000007FFF000001FFF80003FF0000FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFC0000001FFFF000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF8000003FFF800001FFF80007FF0000FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFE0000003FFFF800001FC00000000007F800001FFFC000003FFF8000003FFF800001FFF80007FF80007FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFF0000007FFFF800001FC00000000007F800001FFFC000003FFFC000003FFF800001FFF80007FF80007FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFF800000FFFFF800001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFC000003FFFC00001FFF00007FFC0003FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFE00001FFFFFC00001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFE000003FFFC00001FFF00007FFC0003FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFF00007FFFFFC00001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFE000003FFFE00001FFF00007FFE0001FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFF8003FFFFFFC00001FE00000000003FE00001FFFC000003FFFF000003FFFE00001FFF00007FFE0001FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
FFFF(CR)
^BL(CR)
1Y1100000000000LOGO(CR)
E(CR)
Figure N-1: Sample Datamax 7-Bit ASCII File Image
Figure N-2: Sample Label
264
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix O
UPC-A and EAN-13: Variable Price/Weight Bar Codes
The EAN/UPC standard allows for an additional checksum to be generated in the middle of
the bar code based on the data. This is used when the price or weight of an item is
embedded into the bar code data (commonly used in the food industry).
For the printer to generate this checksum, a ‘V’ must be placed in the data stream in the
position the checksum is requested. If the ‘V’ is placed in the 6th position for UPC-A or the
7th position for EAN-13, a checksum will be generated using the next five digits in the data
stream. If the ‘V’ is placed in the 7th position for UPC-A or the 8th position for EAN-13, a
checksum will be generated using the next four digits in the data stream. The checksum is
generated per the EAN/UPC bar code standard.
Examples:
1B110000200020012345V01199
Prints the UPC-A bar code with the variable price checksum in the sixth position.
1B1100002000200123456V0150
Prints the UPC-A bar code with the variable price checksum in the seventh position.
1F1100002000200123456V01199
Prints the EAN-13 bar code with the variable price checksum in the seventh position.
1F11000020002001234567V0150
Prints the EAN-13 bar code with the variable price checksum in the eighth position.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
265
Appendix O – UPC-A and EAN-13 Variable Price / Weight Bar Codes
266
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix P
International Language Print Capability (ILPC)
Programming Examples
ILPC (if equipped) allows the printing of non-English character sets, available with European
language support (CG TIMES), KANJI language support, Chinese language support
(SIMPLIFIED GB) and Korean Hangul. All of the features are embedded in the printer
resident firmware and accessible through DPL thus eliminating excessive download time of
bitmapped characters. Using scalable technology licensed from AGFA, this firmware allows
users to print smooth characters in sizes from 4pt (1.4 mm) to 999pt (350 mm) in over 40
languages. Consult Appendix I for code page selections. Specific details regarding which
characters are supported in each option can be obtained through Datamax Technical
Support.
ILPC - CG® TIMES
The CG Times is a single-byte scalable font consisting of four typefaces in 38 Western
European languages. This contains over 900 unique characters in each of the four typefaces
from the CG Times typeface family, Normal, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic. Single-byte scalable
fonts are selected using a print format record (see Generating Label Formats and Appendix
H for details).
Scalable CG® TIMES Font Code (‘eee’ field):
SA0 -CG TIMES
SA1 -CG TIMES ITALIC
SA2 - CG TIMES BOLD
SA3 - CG TIMES BOLD ITALIC
Sample DPL file (Greek) and resulting label:
<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySWG<CR>
1911SA003600020P020P020(WG) Greek Characters from<CR>
1911SA003000085P020P020the internal Symbol Set,<CR>
1911SA002400085P020P020font code SA0<CR>
1911SA001500050P020P020<ca><e1><eb><f9><f3><ef><f1><df><f3><e1><f4><e5><20>
<d3><f5><ed><dd><e4><f1><e9><ef><20><CR>
1911SA001100100P020P020<f4><f9><e3><20><c5><f4><e1><df><f1><f9><e3><20><f4>
<e7><f2><CR>
1911SA000700140P020P020Datamax<CR>
1X1100000100020B365190005005<CR>
Q0002<CR>
E<CR>
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
267
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
The notation “<xx>” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the
hexadecimal value of the character sent to the printer.
ILPC - Kanji
The Kanji Option is a double byte scalable font supporting Kanji Gothic B. In the double byte
format, the printer recalls one character printed from every two 8-bit bytes sent from the
host. Double byte scalable fonts are selected using a print format record (see Generating
Label Formats and Appendix H for details).
268
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
Scalable Double-Byte Font Map - KANJI
eee
(Font Code)
Scalable
Font Type
Font
Name
Binary
Hex ASCII
Addressing Addressing
U40
Scalable Resident
HG-Gothic-B Kanji
Scalable
u40
Scalable Resident
HG-Gothic-B Kanji
Scalable
UK1
Scalable Resident
HG-Gothic-E Kanji
Scalable
uK1
Scalable Resident
HG-Gothic-E Kanji
Scalable
√
u50 - u5z…
u90 - u9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User defined
√
U50 U5z...
U90 - U9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User defined
Code
Pages
EUC, JIS,
SJIS, UC
√
√
EUC, JIS,
SJIS, UC
EUC, JIS,
SJIS
√
EUC, JIS,
SJIS
√
Not all fonts contain an entire compliment of character codes for a given character map.
Sample Kanji Gothic B DPL file (binary addressing) and the resulting label:
<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySPM<CR>
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Kanji Gothic B Available<CR>
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>
yUJS<CR>
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>
112200002800030JIS CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S<CR>
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>
1911U4002650150P012P012<4D><3F><21><21><21><21><4D><4F><21><21><21><21><4D>
<5F><21><21><21><21><4D><6F><00><00><CR>
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>
2911U4002600150P012P012<4D><3F><00><00><CR>
2911U4002600205P012P012<4D><4F><00><00><CR>
2911U4002600250P012P012<4D><5F><00><00><CR>
2911U4002600300P012P012<4D><6F><00><00><CR>
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>
3911U4002330315P012P012<4D><6F><21><21><21><21><4D><5F><21><21><21><21><4D>
<4F><21><21><21><21><4D><3F><00><00><CR>
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>
4911U4001950165P012P012<4D><3F><00><00><CR>
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
269
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
4911U4001950215P012P012<4D><4F><00><00><CR>
4911U4001950265P012P012<4D><5F><00><00><CR>
4911U4001950315P012P012<4D><6F><00><00><CR>
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>
112200001650030SCALING JIS CHARACTER’S<CR>
1911U4001200020P010P020<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200050P020P020<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200080P030P020<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200110P040P020<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200145P040P030<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200190P040P040<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200250P040P050<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200320P040P060<21><6F><00><00><CR>
112200000050010NORMAL
INVERSE<CR>
112200000050245 NORMAL
MIRROR<CR>
1911U4000250010P040P040<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4000250245P040P040<4B><30><00><00><CR>
A5<CR>
1911U4000250090P040P040<21><6F><00><00><CR>
A1<CR>
M<CR>
1911U4000250390P040P040<4B><30><00><00><CR>
M<CR>
E<CR>
The notation “<xx>” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the
hexadecimal value of the byte sent to the printer.
270
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
Sample Kanji Gothic E DPL file (Hex-ASCII addressing) and resulting label:
<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySPM<CR>
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Kanji Gothic E Available<CR>
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>
yUJS<CR>
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>
112200002800030JIS CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S<CR>
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>
1911uK102650150P012P0124D3F212121214D4F212121214D5F212121214D6F<CR>
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>
2911uK102600150P012P0124D3F<CR>
2911uK102600205P012P0124D4F<CR>
2911uK102600250P012P0124D5F<CR>
2911uK102600300P012P0124D6F<CR>
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>
3911uK102330315P012P0124D6F212121214D5F212121214D4F212121214D3F<CR>
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>
4911uK101950165P012P0124D3F<CR>
4911uK101950215P012P0124D4F<CR>
4911uK101950265P012P0124D5F<CR>
4911uK101950315P012P0124D6F<CR>
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>
112200001650030SCALING JIS CHARACTER’S<CR>
1911uK101200020P010P020216F<CR>
1911uK101200050P020P020216F<CR>
1911uK101200080P030P020216F<CR>
1911uK101200110P040P020216F<CR>
1911uK101200145P040P030216F<CR>
1911uK101200190P040P040216F<CR>
1911uK101200250P040P050216F<CR>
1911uK101200320P040P060216F<CR>
112200000050010NORMAL
INVERSE<CR>
112200000050245 NORMAL
MIRROR<CR>
1911uK100250010P040P040216F<CR>
1911uK100250245P040P0404B30<CR>
A5<CR>
1911uK100250090P040P040216F<CR>
A1<CR>
M<CR>
1911uK100250390P040P0404B30<CR>
M<CR>
E<CR>
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
271
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
ILPC - Chinese
The Chinese Option is a double byte scalable font supporting Simplified GB Chinese. In the
double byte format the printer recalls one character printed from every two 8-bit bytes sent
from the host. Double byte scalable fonts are selected using a print format record (see
Generating Label Formats and Appendix H for details).
DPL Big 5 Encoding Support: With the ILPC Chinese option, the printer firmware supports
font files that are encoded for the GB Character Map and the Big 5 Character Map. The
resident Asian font in the printer is encoded in the GB Character Map. To utilize the Big 5
Character Map, the user must download a font file that is Big 5 encoded. The font file
downloaded must be of a size compatible with the internal module size available or of a size
compatible with an external (plug in) module where applicable. Printing characters from the
Big 5 encoded font file is accomplished by:
1. Setting the character mapping with a System Command or Label Format Command
(<STX>yUB5 or yUB5, respectively).
2. Setting the ‘b’ field = ‘9’ and ‘eee’ field = ‘Unn’, where ‘nn’ is equal to the Font ID
number selected for the Big 5 encoded font file downloaded.
3. Selecting string data corresponding to the Big 5 Character Map.
272
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
Scalable Double-Byte Font Map - CHINESE
eee
(Font Code)
Scalable
Font Type
Font
Name
UC0
Scalable Resident
Simplified
GB Chinese
uc0
Scalable Resident
Simplified
GB Chinese
U50 U5z...
U90 - U9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
Big 5
u50 - u5z…
u90 - u9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
Big 5
U50 U5z...
U90 - U9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User
defined
u50 - u5z…
u90 - u9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User
defined
Binary
Hex ASCII Code
Addressing Addressing Pages
√
GB
√
√
GB
B5
√
√
B5
–
√
–
Sample Simplified GB Chinese DPL file (binary addressing) and resulting label:
<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySPM<CR>
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Chinese Available in GB Character Set<CR>
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>
yUGB<CR>
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>
112200002800030GB CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S<CR>
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>
1911UC002650150P012P012<BD><D0>A1><A1><A1><A1><BD><D1><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD>
<D2><A1><A1>
<A1><A1><BD><D3><00><00><CR>
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>
2911UC002600150P012P012<BD><D0><00><00><CR>
2911UC002600205P012P012<BD><D1><00><00><CR>
2911UC002600250P012P012<BD><D2><00><00><CR>
2911UC002600300P012P012<BD><D3><00><00><CR>
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>
3911UC002330315P012P012<BD><D3><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD><D2><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD>
<D1><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD><D0><00><00><CR>
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>
4911UC001950165P012P012<BD><D0><00><00><CR>
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
273
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
4911UC001950215P012P012<BD><D1><00><00><CR>
4911UC001950265P012P012<BD><D2><00><00><CR>
4911UC001950315P012P012<BD><D3><00><00><CR>
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>
112200001650030SCALING GB CHARACTER’S<CR>
1911UC001200020P010P020<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200050P020P020<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200080P030P020<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200110P040P020<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200145P040P030<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200190P040P040<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200250P040P050<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200320P040P060<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
112200000050010NORMAL
INVERSE<CR>
112200000050245 NORMAL
MIRROR<CR>
1911UC000250010P040P040<BD><E0><00><00><CR>
1911UC000250245P040P040<BD><E1><00><00><CR>
A5<CR>
1911UC000250090P040P040<BD><E0><00><00><CR>
A1<CR>
M<CR>
1911UC000250390P040P040<BD><E1><00><00><CR>
M<CR>
E<CR>
The notation “<xx>” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the
hexadecimal value of the byte sent to the printer.
274
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
ILPC - Korean
The Korean Option is a double-byte scalable font supporting Korean Hangul. In the doublebyte format, the printer recalls one character printed from every two 8-bit bytes sent from
the host. Double-byte scalable fonts are selected using a print format record (see
Generating Label Formats and Appendix H for details).
Scalable Double-Byte Font Map - KOREAN
eee
(Font Code)
Scalable
Font Type
Font Name
Binary
Addressing
Hex ASCII
Addressing
UH0
Scalable Resident
Korean Hangul
√
uh0
Scalable Resident
Korean Hangul
√
u50 - u5z…
u90 - u9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User defined
√
U50 U5z...
U90 - U9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User defined
Code
Pages
UC
UC
√
Not all fonts contain an entire compliment of character codes for a given character map.
Sample Korean Hangul DPL file (binary addressing) and the resulting label:
<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySPM<CR>
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Korean Available in UC Character Set<CR>
yUUC<CR>
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>
112200002800030HANGUL CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATIONS<CR>
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>
1911UH002620150P012P012<AC><00><00><00><CR>
1911UH002620205P012P012<AC><65><00><00><CR>
1911UH002620250P012P012<AC><69><00><00><CR>
1911UH002620300P012P012<AC><DF><00><00><CR>
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>
2911UH002550150P012P012<AC><00><00><00><CR>
2911UH002550205P012P012<AC><65><00><00><CR>
2911UH002550250P012P012<AC><69><00><00><CR>
2911UH002550300P012P012<AC><DF><00><00><CR>
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
275
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>
3911UH002330165P012P012<AC><00><00><00><CR>
3911UH002330220P012P012<AC><65><00><00><CR>
3911UH002330265P012P012<AC><69><00><00><CR>
3911UH002330315P012P012<AC><DF><00><00><CR>
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>
4911UH001950165P012P012<AC><00><00><00><CR>
4911UH001950215P012P012<AC><65><00><00><CR>
4911UH001950265P012P012<AC><69><00><00><CR>
4911UH001950315P012P012<AC><DF><00><00><CR>
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>
112200001650030SCALING HANGUL CHARACTERS<CR>
1911UH001200020P010P020<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200050P020P020<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200080P030P020<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200110P040P020<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200145P040P030<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200190P040P040<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200250P040P050<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200320P040P060<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
112200000200010NORMAL
INVERSE<CR>
112200000200245 NORMAL
MIRROR<CR>
1911UH000450010P040P040<AC><4D><00><00><CR>
1911UH000450245P040P040<AC><15><00><00><CR>
A5<CR>
1911UH000450090P040P040<AC><4D><00><00><CR>
A1<CR>
M<CR>
1911UH000450390P040P040<AC><15><00><00><CR>
M<CR>
E<CR>
The notation “<xx>” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the
hexadecimal value of the byte sent to the printer.
276
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix Q
Plug and Play IDs
MFG; CMD; MDL; CLS; DES
Where:
MFG
= Datamax
CMD
= Fixed string: “DPL”
MDL
= Model: (Valid designations are A4212, A4310, A4408, A4606, A6212, A6310, EX2,
H4212, H4310, I4206, I4208, I4308, I4210, I4212, I4406, I4604, 4206MII,
4210MII, and 4308MII.)
CLS
= Fixed string: “PRINTER”
DES
= Description (subject to change with the application [firmware] revision and printer
model)
Example: Datamax 4208 Label Printer Version 06.06 07/09/2001
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
277
Appendix Q – Plug and Play IDs
278
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix R
Line Mode
Line Mode allows the printer to respond to raw data from a device that may not be able to
send a complete DPL file. In Line Mode, raw data is directed into replaceable fields in
formats, or templates, stored in the printer.
The printer can be placed in Line Mode via the front panel, as explained in the printer’s
Operating Manual, or by using the <STX>KcEM command (see Extended System-Level
Command Functions), where:
<STX>KcEM0 will enter standard DPL Mode; and,
<STX>KcEM1 will enter Line Mode.
•
A reset will follow a change of mode.
•
While in Line Mode, the printer will also respond to DPL commands; however, special
download types (such as firmware updates) should only be sent when the printer is in
DPL mode.
Line Mode Specifics
Raw data sent to the printer must be terminated by a carriage return [0x0D].
The host timeout setting (see <STX>KcHT) will determine the maximum waiting period
between data sent. If the timeout value is reached, the label will print using the data
received before timeout occurred.
A form feed command [0x0C] may be sent to terminate processing and print the data
that has been received.
Issuing the <STX>Ennnn command (where nnnn represents the print count), allows
quantities of the same label to be printed.
The printer must have a template program loaded. A template is a standard DPL file that
ends in a store format command, instead of the print command (E). The template name
must be either DMXFRM or DMXFRMxx. Using DMXFRMxx, allows multiple templates to
be available.
Sample Template 1:
The following sample uses DMXFRM as the template name and stores it to the default module.
(The default module is printer model dependent.)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
279
Appendix R – Line Mode
<STX>L
PG
SG
D11
15110000160001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
151100001200010FIXED FIELD #1
15110000080001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
151100000400010FIXED FIELD #2
15110000000001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
Q0001
sCDMXFRM
To print a label, the attached device now only has to send the data. Sample data in this
example is as follows:
TEST DATA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA[CR]
TEST DATA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB[CR]
TEST DATA CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC[CR]
The sample data will print the following label (layout and font are approximations):
TEST DATA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
FIXED FIELD #1
TEST DATA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
FIXED FIELD #2
TEST DATA CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
If multiple labels are needed, data for the labels can be sent at the same time. Sample data
for two labels:
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA[CR]
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB[CR]
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC[CR]
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD[CR]
EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE[CR]
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF[CR]
The sample data will print the following two labels (layout and typeface are
approximations):
280
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix R – Line Mode
Label 1:
TEST DATA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
FIXED FIELD #1
TEST DATA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
FIXED FIELD #2
TEST DATA CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
Label 2:
TEST DATA DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
FIXED FIELD #1
TEST DATA EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
FIXED FIELD #2
TEST DATA FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Sample Template 2:
If a template in the form of DMXFRMxx is used, the data must be preceded by the value of
xx. Below is a sample template for DMXFRMxx:
<STX>L
PG
SG
D11
15110000160001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
151100001200010FIXED FIELD NUMBER ONE
15110000080001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
151100000400010FIXED FIELD NUMBER TWO
15110000000001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
Q0001
sCDMXFRMA1
Sample data for DMXFRMxx type templates:
A1>TEST DATA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA[CR]
A1>TEST DATA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB[CR]
A1>TEST DATA CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC[CR]
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
281
Appendix R – Line Mode
282
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix S
RFID Overview
The printer has two different operational modes for the programming of RFID tags: Direct,
and Label Formatting.
The RFID programming data can be entered in one of two formats: ASCII, or Hexadecimal.
Data in the ASCII format is entered conventionally, while data in the hexadecimal format is
entered as the hexadecimal-pairs equivalent of the ASCII character(s). For example, to
program the word “TEST” in the ASCII format, the data is entered as TEST; alternately, in
the hexadecimal format the word is entered as 54455354. The other important
consideration is the data format byte count. Compared to the ASCII format, hexadecimal
formats use twice the number of bytes. Returning to the example above, in the ASCII
format “TEST” has a byte count of four, while the hexadecimal format equivalent has a byte
count of eight.
To send information about the results of tag printing back to the host, refer to the
<STX>KcOF command for option feedback.
Direct Mode
Direct Mode allows the user (host) to directly control the reading and writing of RFID tags.
This mode contains both a generic Read / Write Interface and a high level HF / UHF Tag
Interface. In Direct Mode, each RFID tag is individually processed with status and data
responses. Typically these commands are used for diagnostics or custom applications.
Generic Read/Write Interface
The Generic Read/Write Interface allows the Host Application to send generic commands
for RFID operations by utilizing the printer’s database for specific parameters. Requiring
no knowledge of the tag types being used (except the data format), these commands
consist of simple read and write operations. See the <STX>KaR and <STX>KaW commands
for details.
HF (13.56 MHz) ISO15693 Tag Interface
The ISO15693 Tag Interface allows the Host Application to perform specific operations
pertaining to HF-type (13.56 MHz) tags. Since these commands override the printer’s
database by interfacing directly to the tag module, knowledge of HF tags and their
operation is required. See the <STX>KtA, <STX>KtD, <STX>KtE, <STX>KtH, <STX>KtU,
<STX>KtR, and <STX>KtW commands for details.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
283
Appendix S – RFID Overview
UHF Interface
This interface allows the Host Application to perform specific operations pertaining to
UHF-type tags. Since these commands override the printer’s database by interfacing
directly to the tag module, knowledge of UHF protocols and their operation is required.
See the <STX>KuR and <STX>KuW commands for details.
Label Formatting Mode
Label Formatting Mode utilizes the current printer configuration to process all reading,
writing, and exception processing for each tag printed. (For exception processing and fault
handling; see the <STX>KcFH command.) The specification for RFID programming is
contained in the data fields of the DPL label format, which instructs the printer to write and
read data. Two Label Formatting Modes for RFID are available. While each supports auto
increment and decrement commands for numeric (+/-), alphanumeric (>/<), or
hexadecimal ((/)) data, they differ when a byte count specifier is added. Both RFID Label
Formatting commands are detailed below.
Up to six RFID operations per label are allowed.
Wx / W1x:
RFID
Syntax for RFID (spaces shown for readability):
a bbb c d eee ffff gggg jj…j
Where:
284
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix S – RFID Overview
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
Operation to perform, where:
1 = Read (report to host)
2 = Write
3 = Write w/ Read back and Verify
a
1, 2, and 3
bbb
Wnx
c
0
Not Used, should be 0
d
0
Not Used, should be 0
RFID Hexadecimal Operation, where no ‘n’ is an implied 1.
HF: Lock after write, where:
x = 0 – Use printer setup to determine if lock is performed.
x = 1 – Lock after write.
yy = Not Used
UHF EPC Gen2: Lock after write, where:
eee
xyy
x = 0 – Use printer setup to determine if lock is performed.
x = 1 – Lock after write.
yy = Lock state where “01”is permalock, “10” is pwd-write
lock or “11” is both states
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 000
HF: Starting block number to write.
ffff
0000 – 9998
UHF EPC Gen2: Block address where “0001” is EPC data, “0002”
is Tag ID or “0003” is user memory. Using “0000” is for EPC
data also (for backwards compatibility).
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 0000
HF: Not Used, should be 0000
gggg
0000
UHF EPC Gen2: Data word offset – currently only used for read
operation
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 0000
jj…j
Valid hexadecimal
pairs per character
followed by a
termination
character.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Data to write to the tag.
UHF data length must be 16 or 24 for EPC, 16 for Tag ID or
multiples of four for user memory sections.
285
Appendix S – RFID Overview
Example 1: The following example encodes an HF tag , starting at block 001, with
“Datamax writes RFID best”:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
2W1x0000000010000446174616D61782077726974657320524649442062657374<CR>
E
Example 2: The following format encodes a UHF Gen2 tag with EPC data
“112233445566778899AABBCC” and user memory data “1111222233334444”.
<STX>L
D11
2W1x0000000010000112233445566778899AABBCC
2W1x00000000300001111222233334444
E
Example 3: The following format reads a UHF Gen2 tag with data from address 1,
offset 2nd word (EPC data), Tag ID from address 2, and user data from address 3. Note
that the length of the data in the record determines how much data is read.
<STX>L
D11
1W1x0000000010002xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
1W1x0000000020000xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
1W1x0000000030000xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
E
With Option Feedback enabled, the format above would return data, such as:
<R;C;03;03;0002:0001;112233445566778899AABBCC;E20060010128FF33;11112222333
34444>
Where, “112233445566778899AABBCC” is the EPC data, “E20060010128FF33” is the
Tag ID and “1111222233334444” is the user memory data. See Option Feedback Mode
(<STX>KcOF) for more information on the response format.
WX / W1X:
RFID with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case X identifies an RFID data string with a string 4-digit
length specifier. The length specifier allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included
within the data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The
four-digit decimal data byte count immediately follows the four-digit column position
field. This value includes all of the data following the byte count field, but does not
include itself.
Syntax for RFID with Byte Count Specifier (spaces shown for readability):
a bbb c d eee ffff gggg hhhh jj…j
Where:
286
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix S – RFID Overview
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
Operation to perform, where:
1 = Read (report to host)
2 = Write
3 = Write / Verify
a
1, 2, and 3
bbb
Wnx
c
0
Not Used, should be 0
d
0
Not Used, should be 0
RFID Hexadecimal Operation, where no ‘n’ is an implied 1.
HF: Lock after write, where:
x = 0 – Use printer setup to determine if lock is performed.
x = 1 – Lock after write.
yy = Not Used
eee
xyy
UHF EPC Gen2: Lock after write, where:
x = 0 – Use printer setup to determine if lock is performed.
x = 1 – Lock after write.
yy = Lock state where “01”is for permalock, “10” for pwdwrite lock or “11” for both states
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 000
HF: Starting block number to write.
ffff
0000 – 9998
UHF EPC Gen2: Block address where “0001” is EPC data, “0002”
is Tag ID or “0003” is user memory. Using “0000” is for EPC
data also (for backwards compatibility).
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 0000
HF: Not Used, should be 0000
gggg
0000
UHF EPC Gen2: Data word offset – currently only used for read
operation
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 0000
hhhh
Four-digit decimal
data byte count.
Number of bytes to follow (to include all bytes that follow until
the end of the data).
UHF data length must be 8 or 12 for EPC, 8 for Tag ID or
multiples of 2 for user memory sections.
jj…j
Valid ASCII character
string followed by a
termination
character.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Data to write to the tag.
UHF data length must be 8 or 12 for EPC, 8 for Tag ID or
multiples of 2 for user memory sections.
287
Appendix S – RFID Overview
Example1: The following example encodes a HF tag, starting at block 001, with
“Datamax <CR> writes RFID best.” It includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in
bold), where 0024 equals a four-digit decimal data byte count and includes all bytes that
follow until the end of the data. Field termination is set by the byte count.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
2W1X00000000100000024Datamax<CR>
writes RFID best<CR>
E
Example 2: The following format encodes a tag with EPC data “1122334455667788”
with byte count shown in bold. Note that the field data is entered as the hex value for
the ASCII character.
<STX>L
D11
2W1x00000000000000008<0x11><0x22><0x33><0x44><0x55><0x66><0x77><0x88>
E
GEN2 Kill/Access Passwords
Gen2 tags are capable of storing a 4-byte kill password and a 4-byte access password. The
kill password is stored at address 0, word offset 0 and access password is stored at address
0, word offset 2. The default for these passwords is typically 0.
To write these to the tag it is necessary to store the desired password value in the printer
database:
•
To write the database for the kill password the command is <STX>KcRIKnnnnnnnn, where
nnnnnnnn represents the 4-byte value in hexadecimal pairs; and,
•
To write the database for the access password the command is <STX>KcRICnnnnnnnn,
where nnnnnnnn represents the 4-byte value in hexadecimal pairs.
These can also be viewed or modified on the printer’s display under RFID OPTIONS / UHF
SETTINGS. If the stored value for either or both of these passwords is non-zero and a label
formatting command to write EPC data is issued, then these passwords will be written also.
GEN2 Lock States
Gen2 supports a lock state of permalock, pwd-lock or both for any of the data sections of
the tag. This includes access/kill passwords, EPC data, Tag ID or user memory. To store
these states in the printer database the command is <STX>KcRIGn, where: 1 is permalock; 2
is pwd-lock; 3 is both; and, 0 is none (default). When a section of the tag is written via
label formatting command and the stored lock state and lock after write are enabled, the
section will be locked.
288
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix T
WiFi Region Country Codes
Region Country Codes
Code
Country
Code
Country
Code
Country
AF
Afghanistan
GH
Ghana
PK
Pakistan
AX
Åland Islands
GI
Gibraltar
PW
Palau
AL
Albania
GR
Greece
PS
Palestinian Territory
DZ
Algeria
GL
Greenland
PA
Panama
AS
American Samoa
GD
Grenada
PG
Papua New Guinea
AD
Andorra
GP
Guadeloupe
PY
Paraguay
AO
Angola
GU
Guam
PE
Peru
AI
Anguilla
GT
Guatemala
PH
Philippines
AQ
Antarctica
GN
Guinea
PN
Pitcairn
AG
Antigua and
Barbuda
GW
Guinea-Bissau
PL
Poland
AR
Argentina
GY
Guyana
PT
Portugal
AM
Armenia
HT
Haiti
PR
Puerto Rico
AW
Aruba
HM
Heard Island and
McDonald Islands
QA
Qatar
AU
Australia
VA
Holy See (Vatican City
State)
RE
Réunion
AT
Austria
HN
Honduras
RO
Romania
AZ
Azerbaijan
HK
Hong Kong
RU
Russian Federation
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
289
Appendix T – WiFi Region Country Codes
Code
Country
Code
Country
Code
Country
BS
Bahamas
HU
Hungary
RW
Rwanda
BH
Bahrain
IS
Iceland
SH
Saint Helena
BD
Bangladesh
IN
India
KN
Saint Kitts and Nevis
BB
Barbados
ID
Indonesia
LC
Saint Lucia
BY
Belarus
IR
Iran, Islamic Republic of
PM
Saint Pierre and Miquelon
BE
Belgium
IQ
Iraq
VC
Saint Vincent and the
Grenadines
BZ
Belize
IE
Ireland
WS
Samoa
BJ
Benin
IL
Israel
SM
San Marino
BM
Bermuda
IT
Italy
ST
Sao Tome and Principe
BT
Bhutan
JM
Jamaica
SA
Saudi Arabia
BO
Bolivia
JP
Japan
SN
Senegal
BA
Bosnia and
Herzegovina
JO
Jordan
CS
Serbia and Montenegro
BW
Botswana
KZ
Kazakhstan
SC
Seychelles
BV
Bouvet Island
KE
Kenya
SL
Sierra Leone
BR
Brazil
KI
Kiribati
SG
Singapore
IO
British Indian Ocean
Territory
KP
Korea, Democratic
People's Republic of
SK
Slovakia
BN
Brunei Darussalam
KR
Korea, Republic of
SI
Slovenia
BG
Bulgaria
KW
Kuwait
SB
Solomon Islands
BF
Burkina Faso
KG
Kyrgyzstan
SO
Somalia
(continued)
290
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix T – WiFi Region Country Codes
Code
Country
Code
Country
Code
Country
BI
Burundi
LA
Lao People's Democratic
Republic
ZA
South Africa
KH
Cambodia
LV
Latvia
GS
South Georgia and the
South Sandwich Islands
CM
Cameroon
LB
Lebanon
ES
Spain
CA
Canada
LS
Lesotho
LK
Sri Lanka
CV
Cape Verde
LR
Liberia
SD
Sudan
KY
Cayman Islands
LY
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
SR
Suriname
CF
Central African
Republic
LI
Liechtenstein
SJ
Svalbard and Jan Mayen
TD
Chad
LT
Lithuania
SZ
Swaziland
CL
Chile
LU
Luxembourg
SE
Sweden
CN
China
MO
Macao
CH
Switzerland
CX
Christmas Island
MK
Macedonia
SY
Syrian Arab Republic
CC
Cocos (Keeling)
Islands
MG
Madagascar
TW
Taiwan (Republic of
China)
CO
Colombia
MW
Malawi
TJ
Tajikistan
KM
Comoros
MY
Malaysia
TZ
Tanzania, United Republic
of
CD
Congo, The
Democratic Republic
of the
ML
Mali
TL
Timor
CK
Cook Islands
MT
Malta
TG
Togo
CR
Costa Rica
MH
Marshall Islands
TK
Tokelau
CI
Côte d'Ivoire
MQ
Martinique
TO
Tonga
HR
Croatia
MR
Mauritania
TT
Trinidad and Tobago
(continued)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
291
Appendix T – WiFi Region Country Codes
Code
Country
Code
Country
Code
Country
CU
Cuba
MU
Mauritius
TN
Tunisia
CY
Cyprus
YT
Mayotte
TR
Turkey
CZ
Czech Republic
MX
Mexico
TM
Turkmenistan
DK
Denmark
FM
Micronesia, Federated
States of
TC
Turks and Caicos Islands
DJ
Djibout
MD
Moldova, Republic of
TV
Tuvalu
DM
Dominica
MC
Monaco
UG
Uganda
DO
Dominican Republic
MN
Mongolia
UA
Ukraine
EC
Ecuador
MS
Montserrat
AE
United Arab Emirates
EG
Egypt
MA
Morocco
GB
United Kingdom
SV
El Salvador
MZ
Mozambique
US
United States
GQ
Equatorial Guinea
MM
Myanmar
UM
United States Minor
Outlying Islands
ER
Eritrea
NA
Namibia
UY
Uruguay
EE
Estonia
NR
Nauru
UZ
Uzbekistan
ET
Ethiopia
NP
Nepal
VU
Vanuatu
FK
Falkland Islands
(Malvinas)
NL
Netherlands
FO
Faroe Islands
AN
Netherlands Antilles
VE
Venezuela
FJ
Fiji
NC
New Caledonia
VN
Viet Nam
FI
Finland
NZ
New Zealand
VG
Virgin Islands, British
FR
France
NI
Nicaragua
VI
Virgin Islands, U.S.
GF
French Guiana
NE
Niger
WF
Wallis and Futuna
Vatican City State - see
Holy See
(continued)
292
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix T – WiFi Region Country Codes
Code
Country
Code
Country
Code
Country
PF
French Polynesia
NG
Nigeria
EH
Western Sahara
TF
French Southern
Territories
NU
Niue
YE
Yemen
GA
Gabon
NF
Norfolk Island
GM
Gambia
MP
Northern Mariana
Islands
ZM
Zambia
GE
Georgia
NO
Norway
ZW
Zimbabwe
DE
Germany
OM
Oman
Zaire - see Congo, The
Democratic Republic of
the
Table T-1: Region Country Codes
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
293
Appendix T – WiFi Region Country Codes
294
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix U
Graphics Display Icon Key
Large Display
Small Display
Red LED
Description
Printer faulted.
Green LED,
Blinking
Printer receiving data.
Amber LED
Printer paused.
RFID module detected.
SD Memory Card detected.
USB Memory or Keyboard detected.
Wired network detected.
WLAN is enabled, but NOT associated with an Access Point.
WLAN is associated with an Access Point
WLAN is in ADHOC mode.
DPL mode is selected.
LINE mode is selected.
PL-Z mode is selected.
N/A
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Large fonts are selected for the display.
295
Appendix U – Display Icon Key and Control Panel Button Sequence Functions
Control Panel Button Sequences
Three Button / Three LED Control Panel
Function
Printer Mode
Button Sequence
Pause
Idle
PAUSE
Feed / Clear Fault
Idle
FEED
Cancel
Idle
CANCEL
Soft Reset
Idle
PAUSE & CANCEL (or Long CANCEL)
Print Test Label
Idle
PAUSE & FEED
Print Configuration Label
Idle
FEED & CANCEL
Print Network Label
Idle
PAUSE, FEED, & CANCEL
Quick Calibration
Idle
Long FEED
Empty Calibration
Idle
Long PAUSE & FEED
Media Calibration
*
CANCEL
Reset Database to Configuration File
*
PAUSE & FEED
Menu / Setup
*
PAUSE
Reset firmware (without Ethernet)
*
PAUSE, FEED, & CANCEL
Reset firmware (with Ethernet)
*
FEED & CANCEL
Hex Dump Mode
Power-Up
Hold FEED
Enter Boot Mode
Power-Up
Hold PAUSE & CANCEL
*Power ON the printer then when the LEDs illuminate press and hold indicated the Button Sequence
until the LEDs extinguish.
296
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix U – Display Icon Key and Control Panel Button Sequence Functions
Seven Button Control Panel
Function
Printer Mode
Button Sequence
Pause
Idle
PAUSE
Feed / Clear Fault
Idle
FEED
Cancel
Idle
CANCEL
Soft Reset
Idle
PAUSE & CANCEL (or Long CANCEL)
Print Test Label
Idle
PAUSE & FEED
Print Configuration Label
Idle
FEED & CANCEL
Print Network Label
Idle
PAUSE, FEED, & CANCEL
RFID Calibration
Idle
Long FEED & TEST
Quick Calibration
Idle
Long FEED
Empty Calibration
Idle
Long PAUSE & FEED
Menu / Setup
Idle
MENU
Reset Database to Configuration File
Power-Up
PAUSE & FEED
Reset Firmware (without Ethernet)
Power-Up
Hold PAUSE, FEED, & CANCEL
Reset Firmware (with Ethernet)
Power-Up
Hold FEED & CANCEL
Hex Dump Mode
Power-Up
Hold FEED
Enter Boot Mode
Power-Up
Hold PAUSE & TEST (or PAUSE & CANCEL)
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
297
Appendix U – Display Icon Key and Control Panel Button Sequence Functions
298
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Appendix V
Bar Code Symbology Information Resources
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1819 L Street, NW
Washington, DC 20036 USA
Phone: 202-293-8020
Fax: 202-293-9287
http://www.ansi.org/
Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility, Inc.
125 Warrendale-Bayne Road
Warrendale, PA 15086 USA
Phone: 724-934-4470
Fax: 724-934-4495
http://www.aimglobal.org/
Automotive Industry Action Group
26200 Lahser Rd., Suite 200
Southfield, MI 48034-7100 USA
Phone: 248-358-3570
Fax: 248-358-3253
http://www.aiag.org/
Computing Technology Industry Association
1815 S. Meyers Road, Suite 300
Oakbrook Terrace, IL 60181-5228 USA
Phone: 630-678-8300
Fax: 630-268-1384
http://www.comptia.org/
GS1 (International Article Numbering Association)
Blue Tower
Avenue Louise 326 - Bte 10
1050 Brussels - Belgium
Phone: 32(0)2-788 78 00
Fax: 32(0)2-788 78 99
http://www.gs1.org/
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
299
Appendix V – Bar Code Symbology Information Resources
Health Industry Business Communications Council (HIBCC)
2525 E Arizona Biltmore Circle, Suite 127
Phoenix, Arizona 85016 USA
Phone: 602-381-1091
Fax: 602-381-1093
http://www.hibcc.org/
Uniform Code Council, Inc.
7887 Washington Village Drive, Suite 300
Dayton, OH 45459 USA
Phone: 937-435-3870
Fax: 937-435-7317
http://www.uc-council.org/
U.S. Government Printing Office
732 North Capitol St. NW
Washington, DC 20401 USA
Phone: 202.512.0000
Fax: 202-512-1293
http://www.gpo.gov/
300
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Glossary
alphanumeric Consisting of alphabetic, numeric, punctuation and other symbols.
backing material The silicon-coated paper carrier material to which labels with adhesive
backing are affixed. Also referred to as “liner”.
bar code A representation of alphanumeric information in a pattern of machine-readable
marks. The basic categories are divided into one-dimensional (UPC, Code 39, Postnet,
etc.) and two-dimensional bar codes (Data Matrix, MaxiCode, PDF417, etc.).
boot loader The resident program that loads the application from Flash memory,
decompresses it into the DRAM, and starts operations.
burn line The row of thermal elements in the print head.
calibration The process through which Media Sensor readings are entered into the printer
for correct sensor function (for example, detection of a given media type) and top of
form positioning.
character set The entire complement of alphanumeric symbols contained in a given font.
checksum An alphanumeric error detection method used in many bar code symbologies
for informational security.
continuous media An uninterrupted roll or box of label or tag stock media that contains
no gap, slit, notch, or black mark to separate individual labels or tags.
cutter A mechanical device with a rotary or guillotine type blade used to cut labels or tags
following printing.
defaults The functional setting values returned following a factory reset of the printer.
diagnostics Programs used to locate and diagnose hardware problems.
die-cut media Media that has been cut into a pattern using a press, where the excess
paper is removed leaving individual labels, with gaps between them, attached to a
backing material.
direct thermal The printing method that uses a heat sensitive media and only the heat of
the thermal print head to create an image on the label.
direct thermal media Media coated with special chemicals that react and darken with the
application of heat.
DPI (dots per inch) A measurement of print resolution, rated in the number of thermal
elements contained in one inch of the print head. Also referred to as “resolution.”
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
301
Glossary
DPL (Datamax Programming Language) programming commands used specifically for
control of and label production in Datamax printers.
fan-fold Media that is folded and stacked.
feed speed The rate at which the media moves under the print head in non-printed areas
or when the FEED Key is pressed.
Flash memory Non-volatile memory (does not require printer power to maintain data)
that can be erased and reprogrammed, used to hold the printer’s operating program.
font A set of alphanumeric characters that share a particular typeface.
gap A space between die-cut or notched labels used to sense the top-of-form.
IPS (inches per second) Imperial measurement of printer speeds.
label A paper or synthetic printing material, typically with a pressure sensitive adhesive
backing.
label length The distance from the top of the label to the bottom of the label as it exits
the printer.
label repeat The distance from the top of one label to the top of the next label.
label tracking Excessive lateral (side to side) movement of the media as it travels under
the print head.
label width The left to right measurement of the label as it exits the printer.
media Generalized term for all types of printing stocks, including: roll fed, continuous,
butt-cut, die-cut, reflective, and fanfold.
media hub Device in the printer used to support roll media.
media sensor An electronic device equipped with photosensors to detect media and the
top-of-form on die-cut, notched or reflective media.
MMPS (millimeters per second) Metric measurement of printer speeds.
notched stock Media, typically tag stock, with holes or notches in the material that is
used to signal the top-of-form. The printer must be set to ‘gap’ to use this media type.
perforation Small cuts extending through the backing and/or label material to facilitate
their separation. Also referred to as “perf”.
preprinted media Label stock that contains borders, text, or graphics, floodcoating, etc.
present sensor An electronic sensor that provides a signal to the printer firmware that a
label is present, typically located beyond the print head, where the labels exits the
printer.
302
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Glossary
print speed The rate at which the media moves under the print head during the printing
process.
reflective media Media imprinted with carbon-based black marks on the underside of the
material, which is used to signal the top-of-form when the ‘reflective’ Media Sensor is
enabled.
registration Repeatable top to bottom alignment of printed labels.
reverse speed The backward rate of media motion into the printer during tear-off, peel
and present and cutting operations for positioning the label at the start of print
position.
ribbon An extruded polyester tape with several layers of material, one of which is ink-like,
used to produce an image on the label. Also referred to as “foil”.
roll media A form of media that is wound upon a cardboard core.
slew The moving of media using the GPIO function.
start of print The position on the label where the printing actually begins.
tag stock A heavy paper or synthetic printing material, typically featuring a notch or black
mark for top of form and no adhesive backing.
thermal transfer The printing method that creates an image by transferring ink from a
ribbon onto the media using the heat from the thermal print head.
TOF (top-of-form) The start of a new label as indicated by a label gap, notch, mark or
programming.
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
303
Glossary
304
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement